JP2019005373A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a further variation in collaborative operation of a plurality of devices provided in a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine including a display device, a speaker, and a light emitting body includes: movable body operable in a rear area of the display device when viewed from a player; and peripheral control means for controlling display of a predetermined pattern by the display device, output of predetermined sound by the speaker, emission of predetermined light by the light emitting body, and operation of the movable body. The peripheral control means can execute a first pattern for operating the movable body in the rear area and executing at least one of output of the predetermined sound by the speaker or emission of the predetermined light by the light emitting body, and a second pattern for operating the movable body in the rear area, displaying the predetermined pattern on the display device, and preventing execution of output of the predetermined sound by the speaker and emission of the predetermined light by the light emitting body that are executable in the first pattern.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 99

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  In a conventional gaming machine, when a game ball launched into the game area of the game board enters the start opening (hereinafter also referred to as “start prize”), a big hit lottery is executed with this start prize as a trigger. , It shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, after the start condition is established in response to the above-mentioned start winning, the symbol display device starts the variable display of the symbol, and the game machine is provided with an effect suggesting the result of the big hit lottery. This is executed together with symbol variation using a plurality of devices such as a movable body and a display device.

JP 2009-006074 A

  There is room for improvement in the cooperative operation of a plurality of devices such as a movable body and a display device, and further variations are conceivable.

  In view of the above, an object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide further variations of the cooperative operation of a plurality of devices included in a gaming machine.

  In order to solve the above problems, one embodiment of the present invention employs the following configuration. A display device that displays a predetermined pattern; a speaker that outputs a predetermined sound; a light emitter that emits predetermined light; a movable body that is operable in a rear region of the display device as viewed from a player; and a game ball The lottery is executed in accordance with the winning of the predetermined winning opening, and when the lottery is won, game control means for shifting to a special gaming state, display of the predetermined picture by the display device, and the predetermined by the speaker Peripheral control means for controlling the output of the sound, the emission of the predetermined light by the light emitter, and the operation of the movable body, wherein the peripheral control means A first pattern that operates in a rear region and that executes at least one of the predetermined sound output by the speaker or the light emission of the predetermined light by the light emitter, and the movable body is operated in the rear region. ,Previous A second pattern that causes the display device to display the predetermined picture and that does not execute the output of the predetermined sound by the speaker and the emission of the predetermined light by the light emitter that can be executed in the first pattern; The predetermined picture displayed on the display device has a plurality of patterns, and when the predetermined picture is displayed on the display device by a predetermined display mode, the lottery is won. A gaming machine that is characterized by increased expectations.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide further variations in the cooperative operation of a plurality of devices provided in a gaming machine.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer-frame left assembly and outer-frame right assembly of an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit in a plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production | production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the upper front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lowered position, (b) It is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a push operation part is a raise position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and a rotation drive unit in the left view of an effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and an effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a tray unit when pressing is performed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the inside of the game area | region where the game ball | bowl distribute | circulates in a game board. It is a front view of the center actor and the front effect unit in the front unit of the game board. It is side surface sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the table | surface production | presentation unit in the left-right direction center with the center accessory, and was seen from right. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between LED in a front effect unit and the reflective recessed part of a front light-guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emission aspect of a front light-guide plate. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front effect unit is caused to emit light. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the lower front center decorative body is caused to emit light in the lower movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower center elevating base is raised in the lower movable effect unit and the lower front center decorative body and the lower rear central decorative body are caused to emit light. Lower lower elevating base, lower left side elevating base and lower right side elevating base are raised in the lower movable production unit to light the lower front center ornament, lower rear center ornament, lower left side ornament, and lower right side ornament It is a front view of the game board shown in the state made to do. FIG. 109 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 108 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The four rotating decorative bodies, left side rotational decorative body, left sub-side rotational decorative body, right side rotational decorative body, and right sub-side rotational decorative body in the lower movable effect unit are developed to schematically show the decorations of the decorative portions on each surface. It is explanatory drawing. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the kind (size) of the arrow light-emitted and displayed in a lower movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows schematically the drive mechanism of an upper rear movable production | presentation unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the clutch mechanism of an upper rear movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the upper front movable decoration body of an upper front movable production | presentation unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main control side power activation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a fluctuation pattern selection determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a peripheral control part timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of transition of the bit string in the work area holding the detection history of a press detection sensor. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st example of a press operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd example of a press operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd example of a press operation determination process. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit to which the some press detection sensor and the some press detection piece were attached from the advancing / retreating direction of the production operation part button unit. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st example of the press operation determination process using a some press detection sensor. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd example of the press operation determination process using a some press detection sensor. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd example of the press operation determination process using a some press detection sensor. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th example of press operation judging processing using a plurality of press detection sensors. It is a timing chart which shows the 5th example of press operation judging processing using a plurality of press detection sensors. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production including a special production. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a descent | fall position determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a specific order command input effect. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st example of a specific order command input effect. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd example of a specific order command input effect. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd example of a specific order command input effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a simultaneous press command input effect. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st example of a simultaneous press command input effect. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd example of a simultaneous press command input effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the command input effect of specific frequency. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st example of specific number of times command input effect. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd example of specific times command input effect. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd example of specific number of times command input effect. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st example of the press operation determination process using the some determination method. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd example of the press operation determination process using the some determination method. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd example of the press operation determination process using the some determination method. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th example of press operation judging processing using a plurality of judging methods. It is an example of a fluctuation | variation information source table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo-continuous production addition process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect change process 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect change process 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect change process 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the virtual pseudo | simulation production | presentation using the operation | movement of an upper front movable decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous LED production which is an example of the virtual quasi-continuous production using lighting of LED with which the door frame was equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the revival effect which is an example of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect which straddles three fluctuations. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a pseudo-continuous production addition process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect change process 3. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect change process 3. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect implement | achieved by the pseudo | simulation continuous effect change process 3. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of a fluctuation | variation information source table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a motivation meter. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a motivation meter distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a motivation meter rare pattern distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an outline of hand production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an outline | summary of flashback production. FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of the continuation of the flashback effect shown in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an outline of attack determination effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a technique selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a jackpot expectation degree table. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline | summary of attack determination effect. (A) is sectional drawing of the center actor and front effect unit cut | disconnected by the AA line in (b), (b) is a front view of a center accessory and front effect unit. FIG. 165 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. (A) is the schematic of the partial cross section of the center role thing, front light guide plate, and game panel cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. 165, (b) is the center role cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is the schematic of another example of the partial cross section of a thing, a front light guide plate, and a game panel, (c) is further another part of the partial cross section of the center role thing, front light guide plate, and game panel cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is the schematic of an example. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory, the front light-guide plate, and the stage rear end demarcation member. It is a rear view of a center actor and a front effect unit. (A) is a front view of another example of the center combination and the front effect unit, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view of a region surrounded by a dotted line in (a). (A)-(c) is a front view which shows the outline of another example of a center combination, (d) is A in (c), the center combination with which the front light-guide plate was attached and was attached to the game panel. It is the schematic of another example of the partial cross section cut | disconnected by the -A line | wire.

  The gaming machine of this embodiment includes means described below, for example.

Mean 1: In the gaming machine,
“The game area where the game is played,
A frame-shaped front structural member that defines the outer periphery of the gaming area;
A flat gaming panel attached to the rear side of the front component member and defining a rear end of the gaming area;
A unit base attached to the game panel;
A main decoration body, which is mounted on the unit base so as to be movable between a retracted position near the periphery in the gaming area in front view and an appearing position near the center and is visible from the front, and has a predetermined decoration. When,
When the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the main decorative body is moved to the second position where the overlapping is eliminated by moving from the first position overlapping each other in a front view. A plurality of sub-decorations that are attached and formed with a predetermined decoration;
A drive motor that is attached to the unit base and moves the main decorative body between the retracted position and the appearance position in accordance with a gaming state that is changed by playing a game in the gaming area;
It is arranged behind the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies in the center of the game area in front view, and has an effect display means capable of displaying an effect image. Features.

  Here, as “game”, “a game medium is driven into a specific entrance where a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage is performed, and the game media to the specific entrance is placed. When a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by acceptance is drawn, a specific entrance for paying out a predetermined number of game media is opened by accepting the game media, so the game media is aimed at a specific entrance. `` Games to be struck '', `` Games to be struck by game media aiming at the entrance to which benefits including payout of game media are given '', `` Multiple games each with multiple designs provided with multiple games A game in which the rotation of each of the revolving bodies is stopped so that a combination of symbols to which a privilege including payout of game media is given after the revolving bodies are rotated, etc. can be cited. Examples of the “game medium” include “sphere-shaped (game ball)”, “disc-shaped (medal)”, and the like.

  In addition, the “game area” in which the game is performed includes “a plurality of entrances to which a game medium is thrown in by a player's operation and a privilege including a payout of the game medium is given according to the reception of the game medium. `` Areas that are in play '', `` Each is equipped with a plurality of symbols, each of which is rotated by the player's starting operation triggered by the insertion of the game medium, and the combination of symbols stopped by the player's stopping operation '' The area | region where the some rotating body to which the privilege including payout | payout of a game medium is provided according to this is arrange | positioned "etc. are mentioned.

  The “game panel” includes “transparent plate”, “opaque plate”, etc., and the materials include “plywood (eg, veneer plate)”, “glued wood”, “metal plate”, “acrylic resin” “Plate”, “polycarbonate resin plate”, “ABS resin plate”, “polypropylene plate”, “polyarylate resin plate”, “methacrylic resin plate”, “glass plate”, and the like.

  In addition, “decoration” of the main decoration body and sub-decoration body includes “decoration of items in line with the gaming machine concept”, “decoration of logos or lines in line with the gaming machine concept”, “game” Examples include “decoration that imitates the character according to the concept of the machine”, “decoration of geometric pattern”, “decoration of animals and plants”, “decoration of scenery and background”, and the like.

  Further, examples of the moving direction of the main decorative body include “up and down direction”, “left and right direction”, “oblique direction”, and the like. The movement of the “sub-decoration body” includes “rotation around an axis extending in the front-rear direction around the main decoration body”, “movement in the vertical direction”, “movement in the left-right direction”, etc. It is done.

  In addition, as the moving mechanism of the sub decorative body that moves from the first position to the second position as the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position, “one end is attached to the unit base. In addition, a mechanism is provided that includes a rod-like link member attached to the sub decorative body at the other end, and moves the sub decorative body by the link member pressing or pulling the sub decorative body by the movement of the main decorative body. , “A mechanism in which the main decorative body is provided with a gear that rotates as the main decorative body moves, and the sub decorative body is moved by the rotation of the gear”.

  In addition, when a plurality of sub decorative bodies are in the first position, only one sub decorative body may be visible from the front, or a plurality of sub decorative bodies smaller than the total number can be viewed from the front. You may make it.

  Furthermore, examples of the “drive motor” include “stepping motor”, “DC motor”, “brushless DC motor”, “ultrasonic motor”, and the like.

  “Production display means” include “liquid crystal display (LCD)”, “cathode ray tube (CRT) display device (CRT)”, “plasma display”, “laser display”, “LED display device”, “organic” EL display device "," electronic paper display device ", and the like.

  In addition, as the “effect image” displayed on the effect display means, “an effect image in which a character in accordance with a gaming machine concept is displayed”, “an effect image in which an item in accordance with a gaming machine concept is displayed”, “Production image displaying a logo in line with the gaming machine concept”, “Production image displaying a line in line with the gaming machine concept”, “Assisting the game (eg,“ Right-handed ”,“ Aim at the navel ”) , “Stop button operation timing”, etc.), “Effect image that suggests the game situation such as the number of holds and the number of rounds”, “Multi-variable display of multiple symbol strings After stopping the game, the stop images are displayed one after the other, and the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is used to indicate to the player the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game medium at the starting port. When the displayed symbol combination satisfies the symbol combination in which an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous is satisfied, an effect image (reach effect) that stops and displays the remaining symbols Image) ”,“ production image that prompts the player to participate in player participation type production ”, and the like.

  By the way, in the prior art like patent document 1, the drive motor for moving a some rotation decoration body to an up-down direction, the drive motor for rotating a some rotation decoration body, and a some rotation decoration body And a drive solenoid for locking the rotation. In order to produce an effect (movable effect) using a plurality of rotating decorative bodies, it is necessary to control many drive means such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid. Therefore, it is difficult to produce an effect with other decorative bodies at the same time because the control for the production becomes complicated and the load becomes high, and it is difficult to produce an effect with other decorative bodies at the same time. There was a possibility of becoming easily.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine is attached to the gaming area where the game is played, the frame-shaped front structural member that defines the outer periphery of the gaming area, and the rear side of the front structural member. A flat gaming panel that defines the rear end of the game, a unit base attached to the gaming panel, and a retraction position near the periphery in the front-view gaming area and an appearance position near the center on the unit base. A main decorative body that is movable and visible from the front, and has a predetermined decoration, and when the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position, the first position overlaps each other in the front view. It is attached to the main decoration body so as to move to the second position where the overlap is eliminated, and a plurality of sub decoration bodies on which a predetermined decoration is formed and attached to the unit base Drive motor that moves the main decorative body between the retracted position and the appearance position according to the gaming state that changes as a game is performed in the gaming area, and more than the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies It is arranged at the center in the front view game area at the rear, and is provided with effect display means capable of displaying effect images.

  Thereby, in the normal state, the main decorative body is located at the retracted position near the periphery in the front view game area, and the plurality of sub decorative bodies are located at the first position overlapping each other in the front-rear direction. The main decorative body can be seen near the periphery in the front view game area, and at least one sub decorative body can be seen adjacent to the main decorative body. The main decorative body and the sub decorative body decorate the game area. The appearance of the gaming machine is improved. In a normal state, since the plurality of sub-decorations positioned at the first position overlap in the front-rear direction, only the foremost sub-decoration can be seen from the front (player side). It is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the sub-decorations arranged on the side, and it is possible to recognize that there are only the number of main ornaments and sub-decorations that are currently visible. Further, in the normal state, the main decoration body and the plurality of sub decoration bodies are in the retracted position near the outer edge of the front view game area, so that the effect display means arranged at the center in the front view game area The displayed effect image is not obstructed by the main decoration or the like, and the effect image can be viewed in a good state from the player side, and the player can enjoy the effect image. In this normal state, when the drive motor is driven according to the game state that changes as a game is played in the game area, the main decorative body in the retracted position moves to the appearance position near the center of the front view game area. At the same time, the plurality of sub-decorations that overlap in the front and rear at the first position move to the second position that does not overlap in the front and rear. At this time, since the effect image (a part of the effect image) is blocked by the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies, the player can be aware of the movement of the main decorative body and pay attention to it. Accordingly, since all the number of sub-decorations appear around the main ornament that has moved to the center of the game area, the number of sub-decorations can increase and the player's intention can be struck. The overall decoration can be enlarged by spreading a plurality of sub-decorations around the decoration body, and a strong impact can be given to the player to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the main decorative body can be moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the gaming state, when the main decorative body is in the normal state of the retracted position, the main decorative body is Depending on whether or not to move to the appearance position, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained with a higher expectation for the main decorative body. When the main decoration body is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor, the plurality of sub decoration bodies spread around the main decoration body, and the main decoration body and the plurality of sub decoration bodies can show a large decoration to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, by moving the main decorative body to the appearance position by driving the drive motor, it is possible to show a large decoration to the player with the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorating bodies, and to increase the player's expectation. From this, it is suggested that by moving the main decoration body to the appearance position, there is a high possibility (expected value) of an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit game”) that makes the player advantageous to the player. The expected value can be displayed by the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies.

  In addition, the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position near the center in the front view game area, and it becomes easy to secure a space around the main decorative body by moving the main decorative body to the appearance position. Multiple sub-decorations can be moved from the first position to the second position around the main ornament at the appearance position, and the main ornament and multiple sub-decorations form as large a decoration as possible. can do. Therefore, when the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the gaming state, a large decoration by the main decorative body and a plurality of sub-decorating bodies extending around the main decorative body is provided to the player near the center of the game area. Because it can be shown, it can surprise the player, attract the player's attention strongly to the center of the game area, and enjoy large decorations with the main decoration body and multiple sub decoration bodies It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the plurality of sub decorative bodies are moved from the first position to the second position. Since the sub-decorative body is moved, when performing an effect (movable effect) using the main ornament and a plurality of sub-decorative bodies, only one drive motor needs to be controlled. Such a load can be reduced. Therefore, when performing an effect using the main decorative body and a plurality of sub decorative bodies, even if an effect using another movable decorative body, a light emitting decorative body, etc. is performed at the same time, the load on the control of the effect is increased. Since the control of the production becomes unstable due to overload, the drive motor can prevent the main decoration body and the movements of the plurality of sub decoration bodies from being jerky. It is possible to make a gaming machine that exerts the above-described effects by surely exerting the effect of using the sub-decorative body.

  It is desirable that the main decorative body is attached to the unit base so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the retreat position and the appearance position near the upper edge in the front view game area. Thereby, in a normal state where the main decorative body is located at the retracted position, the main decorative body is visible together with at least one sub decorative body in the vicinity of the upper edge in the front view game area. In this state, when the drive motor is driven according to the gaming state, the main decorative body moves downward together with the plurality of sub decorative bodies to become an appearance position near the center of the front view game area, and the main decorative body Since there will be multiple sub-decorations around, the main adornment and the multiple sub-decorations will make the player feel like they will be posted from the sky. It is possible to make the player feel that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “hit game”) that will be advantageous to the player will occur, and to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state, and to reduce the interest Can be suppressed.

  One end portion is rotatably attached to the unit base, and the other end portion is rotatably attached to the sub decorative body, and the plurality of sub decorative bodies are moved from the first position to the second position. You may make it further provide several rod-shaped link members to move each. As a result, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies move together, but the sub decorative body is moved to the unit base via the link member. Therefore, the sub decorative body which is going to move together with the main decorative body is pulled to the unit base side by the link member, and the position of the sub decorative body relative to the main decorative body is changed by this force, The sub decorative body moves from the first position to the second position. On the other hand, when the main decorative body moves from the appearance position to the retracted position, the sub decorative body is pushed by the link member, the sub decorative body moves from the second position to the first position, and the initial state (first The normal state of being located). As described above, since the sub decorative body can be moved from the first position to the second position via the link member simply by moving the main decorative body from the retracted position to the appearance position, the game having the above-described effects. The machine can be realized with certainty.

  Further, when the link member as described above is provided, one end portion of the link member is within a range shorter than the moving distance of the main decorative body with respect to the unit base, and the moving direction of the main decorative body. It is desirable to mount it slidably in the same direction. Accordingly, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies move together. At this time, one end of the link member having the other end attached to the sub decorative body is attached to the unit base so as to be slidable in the moving direction of the main decorative body. The link member is pulled in the moving direction of the main decorative body by the sub-decorating body that moves to, and one end of the link member slides with respect to the unit base. Since one end of the link member is slidable within a range shorter than the moving distance of the main decorative body, the one end of the link member slides before the main decorative body reaches the appearance position. The end of the direction will be reached. Then, after the one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction, when the main decorative body further moves in the direction of the appearance position, one end of the link member moves in the direction of the appearance position. Therefore, the sub decorative body which is to be moved together with the main decorative body by the link member is pulled to the unit base side, and the position of the sub decorative body relative to the main decorative body is changed by this force, and the sub decorative body is changed. Will move from the first position to the second position. Therefore, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the plurality of sub decorative bodies remain in the first position until one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction. When one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction, the plurality of sub-decorations move from the first position while the main ornament moves in the direction of the appearance position. Since it moves to the second position and spreads around the main decorative body, the main decoration body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies can show the player a movable effect that moves in two stages. By controlling, it becomes possible to stop the movement (production) in the first stage or move (production) to the second stage, and to make a movable production using the main decoration body and a plurality of sub decoration bodies. Barrier ® emission can be increased, it is possible to entertain the player by a variety effect can be hardly bored the player, the reduction in the interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, when one end of the link member is slidably attached in the moving direction of the main decorative body, a plurality of sub-decorative bodies are moved from the middle of the main decorative body moving to the appearance position. Since the moving speed of the sub decorative body is relatively faster than the moving speed of the main decorative body, the plurality of sub decorative bodies move around the main decorative body. It is possible to make the movement suddenly spread, and to entertain the player using the main decoration body and the plurality of sub decoration bodies. Further, in this case, after the main decorative body moves to some extent from the retracted position to the appearance position, the plurality of sub decorative bodies are moved from the first position to the second position. In other words, the plurality of sub decorative bodies are moved from the vicinity of the periphery of the front view game area to the center side to some extent and then moved from the first position to the second position so as to spread around the main decorative body. When the decorative body moves to the second position, the sub decorative body can be made less likely to come into contact with other members, and damage to the sub decorative body and other members can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, when one end of the link member is slidably attached in the moving direction of the main decorative body, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, Since the movements of a plurality of sub-decorations can be changed in two stages, the player has an advantage that the player has an advantage when stopped at the first stage and when stopped at the second stage. It is possible to recognize that the possibility (expected value) of the gaming state is different, and it is possible to suggest that the expected value is higher in the second stage than in the first stage. And a plurality of sub-decorations, various expected values can be displayed to the player.

  Further, the plurality of sub-decorations may be attached to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth with the center of the main ornament as the center. Thus, by moving the main decorative body from the retracted position to the appearance position, when the plurality of sub decorative bodies are moved from the first position to the second position, the plurality of sub decorative bodies are rotated around the main decorative body. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which fans with a plurality of sub decorative bodies spread. Further, the plurality of sub-decorations move from the first position to the second position, so that the plurality of sub-decorations are arranged radially around the main ornament, and the main ornament and the plurality of sub-decorations You can show the player the decoration that spreads greatly in the body. In this way, by performing an effect using the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies, it is possible to achieve the same operational effects as described above, and to give a wide impression to the player. It can be thought that there is something good, can raise the expectation for the game, and can suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, a pair of sub-decorations arranged on both sides of the main ornament, and a connecting member that connects the pair of sub-decorations and is attached to the rear side of the main ornament, And when the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position, the sub-decorative bodies on both sides of the main decorative body in the front view are moved from the first position where they overlap each other to eliminate the overlap. A plurality of sub decorative body units that move to the second position may be provided. Thereby, in the normal state where the main decorative body is located at the retracted position, the sub decorative bodies are visible on both sides of the main decorative body. In this normal state, when the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor in accordance with the gaming state, the plurality of sub decorative bodies that overlap each other on both sides of the main decorative body move to the second position, respectively. As a result, the overlapping of each other is eliminated and the main decoration body is spread around the main decoration body, so that a large decoration can be shown to the player with the main decoration body and the plurality of sub-decorations, and the same effect as described above Can be played. When a plurality of sub-decorations move from the first position to the second position, a pair of sub-decorations with the main ornament between them are connected by a connecting member to constitute one sub-decoration unit. Therefore, when the connecting member is moved, the pair of sub-decorative bodies can be moved. Therefore, half the number of sub-decorative bodies (connecting members) is compared with the case where all the number of sub-decorative bodies are moved respectively. ) Can be moved, and the configuration relating to the movement of the sub-decorative body can be simplified, and a gaming machine having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

  Further, as described above, when a plurality of sub-decorating body units are provided, the connecting member of the sub-decorating body unit is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction around the center of the main decorative body. It is desirable to make it. Thus, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the gaming state, the plurality of sub decorative body units extend back and forth around the center of the main decorative body via the connecting member. Rotate around the axis, and the sub-decorations that are located at the first position on both sides of the main ornament and overlap the front and rear are rotated around the main ornament so that the overlap is eliminated. Since it moves to the second position, it can show the player a movable effect in which fans with multiple sub-decorations spread, and the player can decorate the player with a large radial decoration between the main ornament and multiple sub-decorations. It is possible to show the player's impression that it spreads and makes the player think that there is something good. That.

  Also, a plurality of main light emitting means attached to the rear side of the main decorative body and capable of irradiating light forward, and attached to the rear side of the plurality of sub decorative bodies, respectively, and capable of irradiating light forward. You may make it further provide a some sub light emission means. Thus, when the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means are caused to emit light, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies can be individually decorated with light emission. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the main decorative body and the like. Therefore, before the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies are light-decorated by the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means. Since the player can be focused on the main decorative body etc., the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether the main decorative body etc. is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor, and entertain the player be able to. And if the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position on the center side of the game area by the drive motor and a plurality of sub decorative bodies are spread around the main decorative body, there is nothing good to surprise the player. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for the game. When the main decoration body is moved to the appearance position on the center side, if the main decoration body and the plurality of sub decoration bodies are illuminated with the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means, a decoration that shines greatly in the center of the game area is played. Can be shown to the player, so that it can be assumed that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “hit game”) that the player has an advantage over the player is generated, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is increased. Can suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, it is desirable to further include effect display means arranged behind the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies in the center of the front view game area and capable of displaying the effect image. Thereby, in a normal state, since the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies are in the retracted position near the outer edge of the front view game area, the effect display means arranged at the center in the front view game area The effect image displayed on the screen is not obstructed by the main decorative body or the like, and the effect image can be viewed in a good state from the player side, and the player can enjoy the effect image. In this normal state, when the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position on the center side in the game area by the drive motor, the effect image (part) is blocked by the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies. The player can notice the movement of the main decorative body and the like and draw attention, and can move from the first position to the second position to show a plurality of sub-decorating bodies spreading around the main decorative body. Therefore, in the center of the game area, a large decoration made up of the main decoration body and the plurality of sub decoration bodies can be surely shown to the player, and a gaming machine that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

Means 2: In the constitution of means 1,
"The main decorative body is
It is attached to the unit base so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the retracted position and the appearance position in the vicinity of the upper edge in the game area when viewed from the front.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the main decorative body is attached to the unit base so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the retreat position and the appearance position near the upper edge in the front view game area.

  Thereby, in a normal state where the main decorative body is located at the retracted position, the main decorative body is visible together with at least one sub decorative body in the vicinity of the upper edge in the front view game area. In this state, when the drive motor is driven according to the gaming state, the main decorative body moves downward together with the plurality of sub decorative bodies to become an appearance position near the center of the front view game area, and the main decorative body Since there will be multiple sub-decorations around, the main adornment and the multiple sub-decorations will make the player feel like they will be posted from the sky. It is possible to make the player feel that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “hit game”) that will be advantageous to the player will occur, and to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state, and to reduce the interest Can be suppressed.

Means 3: In the constitution of means 1 or means 2,
“One end portion is rotatably attached to the unit base and the other end portion is rotatably attached to the sub-decorative body. A plurality of rod-shaped link members that are respectively moved to the second position,
It is further equipped ”.

  Here, as the “link member”, any member that extends in a rod shape may be used, and “one end portion rotatably attached to the unit base is further attached to be slidable in the direction of the main decorative body. And the like, "one end portion rotatably attached to the unit base is non-slidably attached", and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, one end of the game machine is rotatably attached to the unit base, and the other end is rotatably attached to the sub decorative body. Are further provided with a plurality of rod-like link members that respectively move the first to the second position.

  As a result, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies move together, but the sub decorative body is moved to the unit base via the link member. Therefore, the sub decorative body which is going to move together with the main decorative body is pulled to the unit base side by the link member, and the position of the sub decorative body relative to the main decorative body is changed by this force, The sub decorative body moves from the first position to the second position. On the other hand, when the main decorative body moves from the appearance position to the retracted position, the sub decorative body is pushed by the link member, the sub decorative body moves from the second position to the first position, and the initial state (first The normal state of being located). As described above, since the sub decorative body can be moved from the first position to the second position via the link member simply by moving the main decorative body from the retracted position to the appearance position, the game having the above-described effects. The machine can be realized with certainty.

Means 4: In the configuration of means 3,
"The link member is
One end is attached to the unit base so as to be slidable in the same direction as the moving direction of the main decorative body within a range shorter than the moving distance of the main decorative body. '' To do.

  Here, as a configuration to be slidably mounted in the moving direction of the main decorative body, “link to the distal end of a rod-shaped flange member whose base end side is attached to the unit base so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined rotation angle range. “A structure in which one end of the member is rotatably attached”, “A slit extending in the moving direction of the main decorative body is formed in the unit base, and one end of the link member is slidable in the slit. “A configuration in which the slide pin is provided on the unit base and a slit in which the slide pin is slidably inserted” is formed, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, one end of the link member is slidably attached to the unit base in the same direction as the moving direction of the main decorative body within a range shorter than the moving distance of the main decorative body. It is a thing.

  Accordingly, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies move together. At this time, one end of the link member having the other end attached to the sub decorative body is attached to the unit base so as to be slidable in the moving direction of the main decorative body. The link member is pulled in the moving direction of the main decorative body by the sub-decorating body that moves to, and one end of the link member slides with respect to the unit base. Since one end of the link member is slidable within a range shorter than the moving distance of the main decorative body, the one end of the link member slides before the main decorative body reaches the appearance position. The end of the direction will be reached. Then, after the one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction, when the main decorative body further moves in the direction of the appearance position, one end of the link member moves in the direction of the appearance position. Therefore, the sub decorative body which is to be moved together with the main decorative body by the link member is pulled to the unit base side, and the position of the sub decorative body relative to the main decorative body is changed by this force, and the sub decorative body is changed. Will move from the first position to the second position.

  Therefore, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the plurality of sub decorative bodies remain in the first position until one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction. When one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction, the plurality of sub-decorations move from the first position while the main ornament moves in the direction of the appearance position. Since it moves to the second position and spreads around the main decorative body, the main decoration body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies can show the player a movable effect that moves in two stages. By controlling, it becomes possible to stop the movement (production) in the first stage or move (production) to the second stage, and to make a movable production using the main decoration body and a plurality of sub decoration bodies. Barrier ® emission can be increased, it is possible to entertain the player by a variety effect can be hardly bored the player, the reduction in the interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  In detail, if the main decorative body is moved to the first stage, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies move in the direction of the appearance position in the normal state, so there is something for the player. It can make you think that there is a good thing and entertain the player. When the main decoration body is moved to the appearance position until the second stage, that is, the plurality of sub decoration bodies spread around the main decoration body, and a large decoration is played with the main decoration body and the plurality of sub decoration bodies. Can be shown to the player, which can make the player think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage will occur, and can increase the sense of expectation for the game. It can make it hard to get bored, and it can suppress the fall of the interest with respect to a game.

  Further, as described above, since the plurality of sub decorative bodies are moved to the second position from the middle of the movement of the main decorative body to the appearance position, Since the speed of moving the sub decorative body to the second position becomes relatively fast, it is possible to make the movement that multiple sub decorative bodies suddenly spread around the main decorative body, surprise the player and make the main decoration The production using the body and a plurality of sub-decorations can be enjoyed.

  Further, as described above, after the main decorative body moves to some extent from the retracted position to the appearance position, the plurality of sub decorative bodies are moved from the first position to the second position. In other words, the plurality of sub-decorations are moved from the vicinity of the periphery of the front view game area to the center to some extent, and then moved from the first position to the second position so as to spread around the main ornament. When the plurality of sub decorative bodies move to the second position, the sub decorative bodies can be made difficult to come into contact with other members, and the sub decorative bodies and other members can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, as described above, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the movement of the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies can be changed in two stages. It becomes possible to recognize that the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous gaming state that the player is advantageous is different between when stopping at the first stage and when stopping at the second stage. It can be suggested that the expected value is higher in the second stage than in the first stage, and various expected values can be displayed to the player with the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorating bodies.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
"The sub decorative body is
It is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, the plurality of sub decorative bodies are attached so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth with the center of the main decorative body as the center.

  Thus, by moving the main decorative body from the retracted position to the appearance position, when the plurality of sub decorative bodies are moved from the first position to the second position, the plurality of sub decorative bodies are rotated around the main decorative body. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which fans with a plurality of sub decorative bodies spread. Further, the plurality of sub-decorations move from the first position to the second position, so that the plurality of sub-decorations are arranged radially around the main ornament, and the main ornament and the plurality of sub-decorations You can show the player the decoration that spreads greatly in the body. In this way, by performing an effect using the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies, it is possible to achieve the same operational effects as described above, and to give a wide impression to the player. It can be thought that there is something good, can raise the expectation for the game, and can suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 6: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 5,
“A pair of sub-decorations arranged on both sides of the main ornament,
A pair of the sub decorative bodies are connected to each other, and a connecting member attached to the rear side of the main decorative body,
When the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the sub decorative bodies on both sides of the main decorative body in the front view are moved from each other and overlapped with each other from the first position. It has a plurality of sub decorative body units that move to the second position that has been eliminated.

  Here, “both sides”, “both left and right sides”, “upper and lower sides”, “both sides in an oblique direction”, and the like can be cited as “both sides” with the main decorative body in between.

  In addition, as "connecting members" attached to the main decorative body, "attached so that it can rotate around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body", "slidable in the vertical direction "Attached to", "attached to be slidable in the left-right direction", and the like.

  Furthermore, the “sub-decorating body unit” includes “a pair of sub-decorating bodies connected by a connecting member that are different from each other in the front-rear direction”, “a pair of sub-decorating bodies connected by a connecting member. The body has the same position in the front-rear direction ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, a pair of sub-decorative bodies arranged on both sides of the main ornamental body and a pair of sub-decorative bodies are connected to the gaming machine, A connecting member that is attached, and when the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position, from the first position where the sub decorative bodies on both sides of the main decorative body overlap each other in front view A plurality of sub-decorating body units that move to each other and move to the second position where the overlap is eliminated are provided.

  Thereby, in the normal state where the main decorative body is located at the retracted position, the sub decorative bodies are visible on both sides of the main decorative body. In this normal state, when the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor in accordance with the gaming state, the plurality of sub decorative bodies that overlap each other on both sides of the main decorative body move to the second position, respectively. As a result, the overlapping of each other is eliminated and the main decoration body is spread around the main decoration body, so that a large decoration can be shown to the player with the main decoration body and the plurality of sub-decorations, and the same effect as described above Can be played. When a plurality of sub-decorations move from the first position to the second position, a pair of sub-decorations with the main ornament between them are connected by a connecting member to constitute one sub-decoration unit. Therefore, when the connecting member is moved, the pair of sub-decorative bodies can be moved. Therefore, half the number of sub-decorative bodies (connecting members) is compared with the case where all the number of sub-decorative bodies are moved respectively. ) Can be moved, and the configuration relating to the movement of the sub-decorative body can be simplified, and a gaming machine having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

Means 7: In the configuration of means 6,
“The sub-decorative body unit is
The connecting member is attached to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the connecting member of the sub decorative body unit is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body.

  Thus, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the gaming state, the plurality of sub decorative body units extend back and forth around the center of the main decorative body via the connecting member. Rotate around the axis, and the sub-decorations that are located at the first position on both sides of the main ornament and overlap the front and rear are rotated around the main ornament so that the overlap is eliminated. Since it moves to the second position, it can show the player a movable effect in which fans with multiple sub-decorations spread, and the player can decorate the player with a large radial decoration between the main ornament and multiple sub-decorations. It is possible to show the player's impression that it spreads and makes the player think that there is something good. That.

Means 8: In any configuration from means 1 to means 7,
"A plurality of main light emitting means attached to the rear side of the main decorative body and capable of irradiating light forward,
And a plurality of sub light emitting means that are respectively attached to the rear sides of the plurality of sub decorative bodies and are capable of irradiating light forward.

  Here, as the “main light emitting means” and “sub light emitting means”, “single color LED”, “full color LED”, “high brightness LED”, “organic EL”, “incandescent bulb”, “neon bulb”, “cool” Cathode tube ", and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 8, attached to the gaming machine on the rear side of the main decorative body, and attached to the rear side of the plurality of main light emitting means capable of irradiating light forward and the plurality of sub decorative bodies, And a plurality of sub-light emitting means capable of irradiating light forward.

  Thus, when the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means are caused to emit light, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies can be individually decorated with light emission. The main decorative body and the sub decorative body can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the main decorative body and the like. Therefore, before the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies are light-decorated by the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means. Since the player can be focused on the main decorative body etc., the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether the main decorative body etc. is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor, and entertain the player be able to. And if the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position on the center side of the game area by the drive motor and a plurality of sub decorative bodies are spread around the main decorative body, there is nothing good to surprise the player. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for the game. When the main decoration body is moved to the appearance position on the center side, if the main decoration body and the plurality of sub decoration bodies are illuminated with the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means, a decoration that shines greatly in the center of the game area is played. Can be shown to the player, so that it can be assumed that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “hit game”) that the player has an advantage over the player is generated, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is increased. Can suppress a decrease in interest.

Mean 9: In the gaming machine,
“The game area where the game is played,
A frame-shaped front structural member that defines the outer periphery of the gaming area;
A flat gaming panel attached to the rear side of the front component member and defining a rear end of the gaming area;
A unit base attached to the game panel;
It is attached to the unit base so as to be vertically movable and visible from the front between a retracted position near the upper edge in the gaming area in front view and an appearing position near the center, and a predetermined decoration is formed. The main decorative body,
A pair of sub-decorations arranged on both the left and right sides of the main ornament between which a predetermined ornament is formed, and the pair of sub-decorations are connected to each other, and the center of the main ornament is centered Two sub-decorative body units each having a connecting member attached to the main decorative body so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction,
Drive that is attached to the unit base and moves the main decoration body up and down between the retracted position and the appearance position in accordance with a gaming state that changes as a game is played in the gaming area. A motor,
One end of the unit base is attached to be slidable in the vertical direction within a range shorter than the moving distance of the main decorative body while being rotatable on both the left and right sides with respect to the main decorative body as a boundary. One of the two sub-decorative body units is rotatably attached to the left-side sub-decorative body, and the other is rotatably attached to the right-side sub-decorative body, and the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position. When moved to the appearance position, in the front view, the left and right sub-decorative bodies sandwiching the main decorative body are rotated in different directions from the first position where the left and right sub-decorative bodies overlap each other. Two rod-shaped link members that move to a position;
A plurality of main light emitting means attached to the rear side of the main decorative body and capable of emitting light toward the front;
A plurality of sub-light-emitting means, each attached to the rear side of the plurality of sub-decorative bodies, and capable of irradiating light forward;
It is arranged behind the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies in the center of the game area in front view, and has an effect display means capable of displaying an effect image. Features.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the gaming machine is attached to the gaming area in which a game is performed, a frame-shaped front structural member that defines the outer periphery of the gaming area, and the rear side of the front structural member. Between the flat gaming panel that defines the rear end of the game, the unit base attached to the gaming panel, and the retraction position near the upper edge in the front-view gaming area and the appearance position near the center on the unit base The main decoration body is attached to be movable in the vertical direction and visible from the front, and has a predetermined decoration, and is arranged on both the left and right sides between the main decoration bodies to form the predetermined decoration. A pair of sub-decorative bodies, and a connecting member that connects the pair of sub-decorative bodies to each other and is attached to the main decorative body so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body, Have two each The main decorative body is attached to the sub decorative body unit and the unit base, and the main decorative body is moved in the vertical direction between the retracted position and the appearance position in accordance with a game state that changes as a game is performed in the game area. The drive motor and one end are attached to be slidable in the vertical direction within a range shorter than the moving distance of the main decorative body, and can be rotated on both the left and right sides with the main decorative body in the unit base as a boundary, The other end is attached to the left sub-decorative body, one of the two sub-decorating body units is rotatably attached to the right sub-decorating body, and the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position. Then, when viewed from the front, the left and right sub-decorations between the main ornaments are rotated in different directions from the first position where the sub-decorations on the left and right sides overlap each other. Two rod-shaped link members that are moved to the second position, a plurality of main light emitting means that are attached to the rear side of the main decorative body and can irradiate light forward, and a plurality of sub decorative bodies A plurality of sub-light emitting means that can irradiate light forward, and are arranged at the center in the front view game area behind the main decoration body and the plurality of sub decoration bodies. And effect display means capable of displaying effect images.

  Thus, in a normal state, the main decorative body is located at the retracted position near the upper edge in the front view game area, and the pair of sub decorative bodies of the two sub decorative body units are respectively connected to the main decorative body. Since the main decorative body is located near the periphery in the front-view game area, the main decorative body can be seen on the left and right sides of the main decorative body. The decoration body is visible, and the game area is decorated with the main decoration body and the two sub decoration bodies to improve the appearance of the gaming machine. Under normal conditions, since the two sub-decorations positioned at the first position overlap each other, only the front sub-decoration can be seen from the front (player side). It is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the sub-decorative body, and to recognize that there are only the number of main ornamental bodies and sub-decorative bodies that are currently visible. When the main light emitting unit and the plurality of sub light emitting units emit light in a normal state, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies can be decorated with light emission. The decoration body and the sub decoration body can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the main decoration body and the like. Further, in a normal state, the main decoration body and the two sub decoration body units are in the retracted position near the upper edge of the front view game area, so that the effect display arranged at the center in the front view game area The effect image displayed on the means is not obstructed by the main decorative body or the like, and the effect image can be viewed in a good state from the player side, and the player can enjoy the effect image.

  In this normal state, when the drive motor is driven according to the game state that changes as a game is played in the game area, and the main decoration body is moved from the retracted position to the downward appearance position, the main decoration The body and the two sub-decoration body units move (lower) together. At this time, on the left side of the main decoration body, the sub-decoration body of one sub-decoration body unit is disposed on the right side of the main decoration body, on the sub-decoration body of the remaining sub-decoration body unit, and on the other side of the link members arranged on the left and right. The end portions (lower end portions) are respectively attached, and one end portions (upper end portions) of the left and right link members are respectively attached to the unit base so as to be slidable in the same vertical direction as the moving direction of the main decorative body. Therefore, the left and right link members are pulled downward in the same direction as the main decorative body by the two sub decorative body units (sub decorative bodies) that descend together with the main decorative body, and the upper end of the link member is the unit. It will slide against the base. The upper end portions of the left and right link members are slidable in the vertical direction within a range shorter than the moving distance (elevating distance) of the main decorative body. Therefore, before the main decorative body reaches the appearance position, Each upper end part of a link member will reach the lower end part of a slide direction. Then, after the upper end portion of the link member reaches the lower end portion in the sliding direction, when the main decorative body further moves in the direction of the appearance position below, the lower end portion of the link member moves in the direction of the appearance position (downward). Therefore, one of the two sub-decorations in the two sub-decorations that are to be moved together with the main ornament by the left and right link members is pulled toward the unit base, and this force The two sub-decorating body units rotate in different directions around the axis extending in the front-rear direction around the center of the main ornamental body, and the second overlapped front-rear position is eliminated from the first position. It will move to the position. As a result, the sub-decorations that were seen as one on both the left and right sides of the main ornament were rotated so that the fans spread out in two, and the main ornament and the main ornaments were extended radially. One sub-decoration body can be used to form a large ornament and show to the player. Accordingly, since all the number of sub-decorations appear around the main ornament that has moved to the center of the game area, the number of sub-decorations can increase and the player's intention can be struck. The overall decoration can be enlarged by spreading a plurality of sub-decorations around the decoration body, and a strong impact can be given to the player to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, when the main decorative body is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the left and right sides of the main decorative body are left until the upper end portions of the left and right link members reach the lower end portions in the sliding direction. When the two sub decorative bodies move together with the main decorative body in the first position where they overlap each other, and the upper end of the link member reaches the lower end of the sliding direction, the main decorative body moves in the direction of the appearance position ( The two left and right sub-decorations are rotated from the first position to the second position where the overlap is eliminated and spread radially around the main ornament. Because it is possible to show the player a movable effect that moves in two steps depending on the body unit, by appropriately controlling the drive motor, the movement (effect) can be stopped in the first step, Can be moved (directed), and the variation of movable effects using the main decorative body and multiple sub decorative bodies can be increased, and the player can be entertained by various effects, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the main decorative body can be moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the gaming state, when the main decorative body is in the normal state of the retracted position, the main decorative body is The player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the appearance position is lowered, and the player can be entertained. When the main decorative body is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position side by the drive motor and moved to the first stage where the sub decorative body does not rotate, the main decorative body and the two sub decorative body units are in the normal state. Since the player moves downwards as it is, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good and to have a sense of expectation for the game. Further, when the main decorative body is lowered to the appearance position until the second stage, that is, the four sub decorative bodies spread radially around the main decorative body, and the main decorative body and the four sub decorative bodies have a large decoration. Can be shown to the player, and the main decorative body and the four sub-decorating bodies can be lowered to make the player feel like being posted from heaven. It can make the player think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage will occur, can increase the expectation of the game, and can make the player hard to get bored. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the.

  Thus, when the main decorative body is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position, the movement of the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies can be changed in two stages. It is possible to recognize that the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous gaming state that the player is advantageous is different between when stopped at the second stage and when stopped at the second stage. However, the second stage can suggest that the expected value is higher, and the player can display various expected values for the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorated bodies.

  In addition, the main decorative body is lowered to the appearance position near the center in the front view game area, and it becomes easy to secure a space around the main decorative body by lowering the main decorative body to the appearance position. Around the main decorative body at the appearance position, the four sub decorative bodies can be moved from the first position to the second position and spread radially, and the main decorative body and the two sub decorative body units are as large as possible. Decoration can be formed. Therefore, when the main decorative body is lowered to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the gaming state, a large decoration by the main decorative body and the four sub-decorating bodies extending radially around the game area is played in the vicinity of the center of the gaming area. The player can be surprised, can attract the player's attention to the center of the game area, and has a large decoration with the main decoration and four sub-decorations. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the two sub decorative bodies on the left and right sides of the main decorative body are moved from the first position to the second position, so that one drive Since the main decorative body and the two sub decorative body units are moved by the motor, one drive motor is used when performing an effect (movable effect) using the main decorative body and the two sub decorative body units. It is sufficient to control only, and the load on the production can be reduced. Therefore, when performing an effect using the main decorative body and the two sub decorative body units, even if an effect using another movable decorative body, a light emitting decorative body, etc. is performed at the same time, the load on the control of the effect is increased. Since the control of the production becomes unstable due to overload, the drive motor can prevent the movement of the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies from being jerky. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that exerts the above-described effects by surely exerting the effect using the two sub decorative body units.

  In addition, as described above, since the two sub decorative bodies on the left and right sides of the main decorative body are moved to the second position while the main decorative body is descending to the appearance position, the main decorative body is Because the speed at which the sub decorative body moves to the second position is relatively faster than the movement speed of the four sub decorative bodies, it is possible to make the movement that the four sub decorative bodies suddenly spread around the main decorative body, The player can be surprised and entertained using the main decorative body and the two sub decorative body units.

  Furthermore, as described above, after the main decorative body moves to some extent from the retracted position to the appearance position, the sub decorative bodies on the left and right sides of the main decorative body are moved from the first position to the second position. . In other words, the sub decorative body is moved from the vicinity of the periphery of the front view game area to the center side to some extent, and then moved from the first position to the second position so as to spread radially around the main decorative body. When the four sub-decorations are moved to the second position, the sub-decorations can be prevented from coming into contact with other members, and damage to the sub-decorations and other members can be prevented.

  In addition, when the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means are caused to emit light, the main decorative body and the four sub decorative bodies can be independently decorated to emit light. The main decorative body and the sub decorative body can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the main decorative body and the like. Accordingly, before the main decorative body and the two sub decorative body units are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the left and right sub-decorative bodies are illuminated with the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means. This allows the player to be focused on the main decorative body, etc., so that the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor. Can entertain. Then, if the main decoration body is lowered to the appearance position on the center side of the game area by the drive motor and the four sub decoration bodies spread radially around the main decoration body, something may surprise the player. It can be thought that it may be, and the expectation with respect to a game of a player can be raised. When the main decorative body is lowered to the appearance position, the main decorative body and the four sub decorative bodies are illuminated with the main light-emitting means and the plurality of sub-light-emitting means, so that the player can see a decoration that shines in the center of the game area. Therefore, it can be assumed that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit game”) in which the player has an advantage over the player is generated, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is increased, and the interest is increased. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the effect display means is arranged in the center in the front view game area, when the main decoration body is lowered to the center of the game area by the drive motor, the main decoration body and the two sub decorations are displayed. Since the production unit (part of the production image) is blocked by the body unit, the player can notice the main decoration body descending and draw attention, and move from the first position to the second position around the main decoration body. You can show four sub-decorating bodies spreading radially. Therefore, in the center of the game area, a large decoration made up of the main decoration body and the plurality of sub decoration bodies can be surely shown to the player, and a gaming machine that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

Means 10: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 9,
The gaming machine is
A game area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation;
A plurality of receiving ports arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media;
A pachinko machine comprising: a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in response to the reception of game media into the receiving port.

  Here, the “reception entrance” includes “a general prize opening that is always open in the game area”, “an open game opening that is always open in the game area, and an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by receiving game media "A start prize opening where a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate" (start opening), "by receiving a game medium in a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, in the game area, "Variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus prize opening, etc.) that can be accepted" "," Normal lottery that is drawn by passing game media through specific areas (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium can be assigned to a variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus game prize prize opening, etc.) that allows the game medium to be accepted, or a specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) within the game area. Through Depending on the result of the normal lottery, the game medium can be accepted, and a variable lottery in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not an advantageous gaming state that would be advantageous to the player by receiving the game medium is generated. Mouth (variable starting port) ”,“ V winning port that generates an advantageous gaming state where the player has an advantage when the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed and received by the distributing means ”,“ Game As an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, there are, for example, a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern and can receive gaming media.

  In addition, the “pachinko machine” includes “a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the start port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. The special symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the stop symbol, and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed, and the special lottery result display means has an advantageous gaming state. And an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called digipachi machine), Distribution means for distributing game media received in the mouth, and when the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V prize opening, the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (so-called honey machine) "," a game medium having a big prize opening and an accessory prize opening, When the special winning lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game is opened or closed in a predetermined pattern according to the result of the special lottery, and the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed to the V winning award, the prize winning port Or, a device having an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern (so-called multi-function machine).

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the gaming machine is a gaming area into which gaming media are driven by the player's operation, a plurality of gaming machines that are arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media, and games to the receiving game This is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in response to receiving of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, the effect of any of the above-described means can be achieved.

  In addition, it is desirable that the effect (movable effect) of moving the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies by the drive motor is executed when the game medium placed in the game area is received in the receiving port. As a result, when a game medium is received at the entrance, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and an effect of moving the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies is executed, so that the player can be entertained. Thus, it is possible to make it easier to continue driving the game medium aiming at the entrance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when a special lottery is generated to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the starting port, and the result of the lottery is indicated to the player, the result is presented to the player. As one effect, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies may be moved by a drive motor. As a result, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorating bodies move, so that it is possible to entertain the player with a strong impact due to the above-described effects, so that a special lottery is drawn for the player. The lottery result can be thought of as an advantageous game state where the player has an advantage (for example, a “hit”), which increases the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state and suppresses a decrease in interest Can be made. In addition, as described above, by moving the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorating bodies, it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect, so that the player is informed of the lottery special lottery result. It can be suitably used for an effect (for example, a reach effect) for performing, and a player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Means 11: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 9,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of swirl bodies each having a plurality of designs,
A start operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of revolving bodies by a player operating after inserting a game medium;
A plurality of stop operation portions for stopping rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine comprising: a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of stop symbols by all the spinning bodies that have been rotated and stopped by a player operating each of the plurality of stop operation portions. It is characterized by being.

  Here, “slot machine” means “the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols depending on the number of game media (medals) used in one game”, An internal lottery is executed at the start of rotation, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of stop symbols and the lottery result of internal lottery is given. ”And the like. The “privileges” include “big bonus (BB)”, “regular bonus (RB)”, “cherry rush bonus (CRB)”, “replay”, “long replay time (LRT)”, “assist time ( AT) ", etc.

  According to the configuration of the means 11, the game machine is operated by a plurality of spinning bodies each having a plurality of symbols, and a start operation unit that rotates the plurality of spinning bodies by the player operating after the game medium is inserted. And a plurality of stop operation parts for stopping rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and a combination of stop symbols by all of the rotating bodies stopped by the player operating each of the plurality of stop operating parts. A slot machine including a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, any of the above-described means can be obtained.

  In addition, for the effect (movable effect) in which the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies are moved by the drive motor, the combination of symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning symbols. During the game (so-called reach), as one of the effects presented to the player, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies may be moved by the drive motor. As a result, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies move, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to be a winning combination. In addition, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies may be moved by the drive motor, so that the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies can be moved. By moving, a strong impact can be given to the player. Therefore, when the game is stopped with a specific symbol combination, an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage (for example, “BB”) occurs. It can be made to think, and the expectation with respect to generation | occurrence | production of an advantageous game state can be raised, and the fall of an interest can be suppressed. In addition, as described above, by moving the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies, it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect, thus suggesting the player the lottery internal lottery. Therefore, it can be suitably used for production, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 12: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 9,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, a “fusion machine” in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused together is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols in accordance with the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are inserted. Is displayed in a variable manner, and thereafter, the change in the symbol sequence is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out in accordance with the combination of the stop symbols, or a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, , An advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine which united the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the effect of either of the means mentioned above can be produced.

  In addition, for the effect (movable effect) in which the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies are moved by the drive motor, the combination of symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning symbols. As one of the effects presented to the player at the time of so-called reach (so-called reach), the main decoration body and the plurality of sub decoration bodies may be moved by the drive motor, or the internal lottery When the lottery result is a winning combination, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies may be moved by the drive motor, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 99) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  The outer frame 2 is a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image; A table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege (for the player by receiving or passing the game ball B) ( For example, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first major winning port 2005, and a second major winning port 2006 for giving a predetermined number of game balls B) It has. The obstacle nail is implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first large winning opening 2005 and a second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B enters the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, the second major winning port 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. The player can enter the operation of driving the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the table effect unit 2600 and the lower movable effect. The player can be entertained by causing the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like to perform a movable effect and a light emitting effect.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front after disassembly. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side portion of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b A flat plate-like abutting portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The left and right cutouts 41a are attached with the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. This prevents the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Accordingly, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a rear portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size penetrating the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allowing only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 Is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200. Door frame left side unit 400 and the door attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit A right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the vicinity of the right end in the rear view on the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105. Rear handle relay board 106, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 that cover a part of door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing games.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatable, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 for mounting the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner in front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the right side and the right side of the front, and is recessed from the rear to the front. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b pass through front and rear on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass forward through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. And a ball feeding opening 101e to face the surface.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching the handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the tube portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tube portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b in the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylinder portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The cylinder part 102a is inclined so that the axis of the cylinder part 102a extends to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a part extending in the inverted L shape vertically) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position where the upper frame ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114b coincide with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can do.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a columnar cylinder main body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front of the ball feeding unit, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from behind. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 117) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button of the dish unit downward, the upper dish ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c is moved along with the downward movement of the operation transmission unit. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition. Is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the action rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by the spring 243, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be It is possible to prevent the 143a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed to the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. A tamper-proof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending left and right, and an upper piece 148a that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 148b, and inclined portions 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the leading end side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal game ball B with the string attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a and attached to the illegal game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B fired (hit) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act is performed in which the unauthorized string is manipulated to cause the illegal game ball B to be taken in and out of the first starting port, etc. The string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then formed into a V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed part of the game, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and a through ball passage 150a that communicates the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit; A full sphere receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and communicates with a full tank guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 is provided. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side when viewed from the front of the full ball receiving port 150b, and did not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that opens forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received in the full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower tray ball supply port of the tray unit is provided.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through-sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (to be described later) of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear protrusion 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and the player can drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 when operated. Is.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184 so as to cover And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 as viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the center of rotation, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked A locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusion 182b, the third protrusion 182c, and the fourth protrusion 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front view of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the counter-rotation around the opposite side The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. Slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side face in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 182b bulges outward, and the side face in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is away from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c is inclined substantially linearly on the side surfaces on both sides, and more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction where the side surface in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruded portion of the third protrusion 182c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and it is possible to perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 rotates most in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball B is most strongly struck into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the fourth protrusion 182d is formed on the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in an easy state, It is possible to reduce a player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the tray unit, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each of the main members. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 is an upper dish 201 that stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper dish 201 and is supplied from the upper dish 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. A unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball attached to the lower side of the mounting base 213 and a unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252, and left and right respectively. The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are provided below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 for rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, the decoration board cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, the front end is retracted backward, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the rear. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is attached to the right of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and a unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open at the rear). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper tray ball feeding port 211e that extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

  The dish unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and is placed on the left side of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e. Under the dish main body, it penetrates back and forth and passes through the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 in the unit 240 after the upper dish ball removal is inserted, and the front right and left in the lower right corner of the front view. The handle insertion port 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, After the dish ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the tray unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with the top opened. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the left end and a through port 213b penetrating up and down in the right corner of the rear end.

  The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is used to insert the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, the through-hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the dish lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 or cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed, This is for subtracting and returning the game balls B from which the rented cash or prepaid card has been lent.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 disposed on the right side of the unplug button 222, a translucent disk lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display section, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper bowl and after removing the upper bowl]
The pre-top bowl removal unit 230 and the post-top bowl removal unit 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower plate 202.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the lower side of the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after the top dish ball removal is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before the top dish ball removal on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 that extends vertically, and a front part that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end that is in contact with a lower end of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 after the upper dish ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is slidably attached to the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and is connected to the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass and the ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the sphere B downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. An operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the operation receiving portion 242a. Is in contact with the lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

  In the pre-top ball removal unit 230 and the post-top ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper pan ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

  Accordingly, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball withdrawal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball reception port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper dish is moved via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. While the ball removal button 222 is raised, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as seen from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a tray unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate body 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit of the dish unit main body 252 that are attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a has the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball | bowl B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and the dish upper left decorative unit 270, the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish lower right decorative unit are provided on the respective front surfaces. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a has a lower right end connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Moreover, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  In addition, the dish unit main body 252 includes a front notch 252e that is notched upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower dish main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. , And a bottom notch 252f that is notched at a portion below the bottom. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout part 252e and the bottom cutout part 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and is inserted into the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252g. An effect operating unit formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that passes through the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction. And an effect operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is about 1/3 of the horizontal width of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . When assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252 e and the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has a lower dish ball removal base 261. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed and the bottom surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and has a flat plate-like lower dish ball removal base 261 having a through-hole penetrating up and down at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 urging the slider 262 forward, A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 through the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position that coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A penetrating through-hole is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 leftward from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side of the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending left and right into which a protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface notch portion 252 f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the normal dish ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right edge side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located immediately above the through hole. The through-hole (lower dish ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction cover 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed rearward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. It becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously placed. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. The When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is positioned immediately above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5d-4. Dish upper left decorative unit and Dish upper right decorative unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, A dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative board 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decorative body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Dish lower left decorative unit and Dish lower right decorative unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252 so as to extend along the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is done. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish lower left decorative body 281, and a dish lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decorative body 281, And a dish lower left decorative board 283 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved line so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end and the center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that the half cylinder is bent. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a left end formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc is changed so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is milky white.

  The dish lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is positioned below the left end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end of the dish center lower decoration body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish lower left decorative body 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending right and left and has a translucent dish right lower decoration body 286, and a dish lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper right rear at the right end, The central axis extends to the left and right, and the semi-cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decorative body 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Continuation with the right end of. In the dish lower right decorative unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish lower right decorative body 286, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are caused to emit light, the dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided. It is possible to decorate the entire front surface of the lamp substantially uniformly and to make it appear that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation buttons. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the back. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303 a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330 An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a semispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from behind in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 mounted from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light forward. The dish center lower decoration board 316 with which a plurality of LEDs which can irradiate is mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the dish unit body 252 from above. Mounted as placed. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front part is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest part when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward so that the shape in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a that extends in a semicircular arc shape so that a semicircular arc that bulges forward is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front lower portion of the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulged semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extend in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is slightly thinner than the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. In the state where the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. When assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively. The left and right ends of 312b are connected to the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left edge of the dish lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated by emitting light.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular shape. When the LED on the center upper decorative board 314 and the LED on the dish lower central decorative board 316 are made to emit light, each of them can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a plate center upper decorative body 312a that is continuous with a plate left upper decorative body 271 and a plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plate center lower decorative body 312b is a plate left lower decorative body 281 and a dish right The lower decorative body 286 is continuous. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the production operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit of the upper plate body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having an outer shape of a substantially cubic shape, and has a main body 321 that is open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality (four in this case) of leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper attachment formed on the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. And a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed such that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion where the vibration speaker 354 is attached on the lower surface is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354. The vibration can be amplified, and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  A leg portion 361 b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. In addition, the main body 321 is formed with a through-hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The main body 321 has a rotation drive unit 340 attached to the outside of the left side wall and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the upper central decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the decoration board cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of leg portions 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear attachment member to attach the operation ring transmission gear so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the left-right direction. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. Under the 322, it is exposed to the outside.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The production operation ring 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation part base 320, an annular rotation base 332 that is rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotating base 332 is attached to the ring mounting base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates.

  Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the lower ring outer cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitute a part of the rotation operation unit 302. A ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

  The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Boss portion 331b for projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and rotatably mounting bush 333, and spaced apart in the circumferential direction on the outer side of mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A plurality of through holes 331c penetrating vertically. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled in the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface part 335a in which the circular arc that forms the outer and upper part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Yes. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attaching portion 335 c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc that forms the outer and lower part of the circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and centrally from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b. An outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc that forms an inner portion and an upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder that extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a constitute a part of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole becomes a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the back. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the right front side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the left front side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 that is attached to the rear side of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects leftward. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350 345, a transmission gear 344 and a transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with a rotational drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 348 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. Yes. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345 a meshes with the second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive side gear portion 350 b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like that. Thereby, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player participation type effect or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits the rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. The bearing portion 325 is rotatably attached.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation detection unit 340 detects transmission by rotating integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a. A spur gear-like drive side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a is constricted in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation shaft of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above, and the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, so that the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320. It is done.

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged. The rotation detection unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Stage control ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and includes a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative board cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The stage operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, thereby allowing the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to pass through the through-hole 331c. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Accordingly, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more various effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front and above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a columnar center press operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery press operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation unit 303a. ing.

  The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged on the object with the button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotating shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are coupled and the central shaft 66 is inserted so as to be rotatable and is rotated so as to cover the elevating cam member 371 for elevating the elevating base 364, the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the lifting base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373 A central button cover 375 is formed on the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. A central button on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted, and a rise detection sensor 376a is attached to the lower surface It includes a decorative substrate 376, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An outer peripheral board cover 378 that is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer periphery decorative lens 379 that is arranged on the outer periphery side above the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer periphery decoration lens 379 are moved up and down. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button operation base unit 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 and the lift cam drive gear member 370. And a descent detection sensor 382 that detects the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lowering detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance that is half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The lifting base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b penetrating vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through at the center. And a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the center hole 364b in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall 364c. Yes. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are attached to be rotatable around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the standing wall 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364. Forming. The elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the elevating cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a downward detection piece 370c that is detected by a downward detection sensor 382. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The raising / lowering cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

  The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a bottom portion 373b so that a pair of guide shafts 362 can slide. A pair of guide holes 373c to be inserted, a center port 373d penetrating with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 364c of the elevating base 364 at the center of the bottom 373b, and a press detection sensor protruding downward from the bottom 373b 381, a pair of guide bosses 373 f protruding rearward from the bottom portion 373 b and inserted through the button spring 374, and protruding upward from the bottom portion 373 b and detected by a rise detection sensor 376 a. Rising detection piece 373g.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that a bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and an upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end of the central port 373d abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central port 373 d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends pass through the lifting base 364 and extend downward, and screws with washers inserted into the lower ends are attached. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central port 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate through 364 and protrude downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a lower urging force than the elevating spring 365.

  The rising detection piece 373g of the central button main body 373 enters the opening provided in the upper base 363 when the bottom 373b of the central button main body 373 (the lower end of the central opening 373d) contacts the lower surface of the upper base 363. Is formed.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having a diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylinder portion 373 a in the central button main body 373.

  In the central button decoration board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can make the outer periphery decoration lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 emit light decoration by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. The central button decorative board 376 is arranged so that the rising detection sensor 376a is inserted into an opening provided in the upper base 363.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The outer peripheral board cover 378 extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the inner periphery of the base board portion 378a. A cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed to be transparent.

  In the outer periphery decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at a constant interval in the circumferential direction. The outer periphery decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer periphery substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a toward the center. As for the outer periphery button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical part 380a is attached to the raising / lowering base 364. As shown in FIG. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the production operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in a state where the lift base 364 is biased upward by a pair of lift springs 365. It is inserted from below into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the lifting cam member 371. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Accordingly, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is moved. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  When the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in the lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 364d along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to a raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the lowering position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When assembled in the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 are in a state of projecting larger than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65B, etc.). reference).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The center button body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 by moving downward against the force. In a state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the lifting base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward from the lifting base 364, but the lifting base 364 is the button unit base 361. Therefore, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62 (b)), the rising detection piece 373g of the central button body 373 is detected by the rising detection sensor 376a, and it is detected that the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is in the rising position.

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved up and down via the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364. However, since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) protrudes upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover part 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when the board box 391 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the rising detection sensor 376a, the lowering detection sensor 382, and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 Relaying connection.

[3-5e-10. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal operation state, the production operation unit 300 has a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. Unlike the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 and rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is smaller than the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the 1st rotation detection sensor 347 and the 2nd rotation detection sensor 348 are constituted so that detection piece 345b may not be detected at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) according to the order in which the detection pieces 345b are detected. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightly assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state in which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

  Thereby, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate in a manner that is easy for the player to perform. Sexuality is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a car handle.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302 in the production operation ring decorative substrate 352, the plurality of LEDs arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to decorate only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the production operation unit 300 has a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 with an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in a normal state. It is in a state of a lowered position slightly protruding upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380). The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and pressure detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is detached from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously protrudes upward to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upwardly from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303 a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303 a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b are the rotation operating portion 302. The height is substantially the same as the top surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

  Further, when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the center pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is substantially in the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the lower moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the center pressing operation portion 303a, and thus attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and opens forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can light up and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left-side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window decorations 410b capable of emitting light disposed in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or is playing with the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending in a cylindrical shape forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the part corresponding to the interior decoration part 410b, and the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and is attached to the right side reflector 415 extending vertically and the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front / rear direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame is formed with a through-hole 417a that extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three here) of side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window decorative member 410b of the side window decorative member 412 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a slightly smaller outer diameter on the front end side than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410 b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decorative member 412 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower position with respect to the vertical center. The side window decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the front side of the door frame right side base 411 that is behind the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration part decoration board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the vertical and horizontal directions around the axis of the side window decoration part 410b in the rear part of each of the side window decoration parts 410b. Has been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 is vertically extended at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends up and down and front and rear, the rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front and rear. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can light up and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends in a wave shape up and down along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) that extends forward in a wave shape so that a quarter portion from the top projects forward, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (columnar) side window decorative portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window decoration part 410b can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window decoration part 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window decoration portions 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b can block the line of sight of the player located nearby, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to feel like being seen by other players, so that other players can play games without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and a radial shape. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult to look into the game area 5a from other players such as the neighbors. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that other players are interested in being noticed. It is possible to prevent feelings of discomfort from being unable to devote themselves to the game and to feel uncomfortable due to mistakes being induced, making the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the upper front surface. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. I have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; The top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top Door frame top relay board mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a that extends to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from both the left and right ends of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. A forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outer sides of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the left-right direction center toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which the semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and are formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. As shown in FIG. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically spaced between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front and rear ends and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can light-decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a band plate shape extending left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. A through-hole penetrating back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to each mounted LED.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. This relays the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, thereby forming an integral decoration. Yes. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side through the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire periphery.

  Dish left upper decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top central decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, It is possible to show the player the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) two large dish central upper decorative body 312a and dish central lower decorative body 312b are attached two apart vertically and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish lower central decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are lined up and down in the rotation operation section 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

  Further, the upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and the lower central decorative body 312 b of the dish are arranged in half. The thickness of the tube-like tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the production operation unit 300, since it becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotating, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 81 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame base unit 5 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is based on instructions from the payout control board 633 for the ball guide unit 570 for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full sphere path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a and the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-like guide main body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be able to rotate the hinge. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84B).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. However, the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  In the present embodiment, the door passes more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 around the center axis (axial axis) of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 on the door frame through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502. The angle at which the tangent line that touches the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view, with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in a state where the ball is in the state, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hit ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Is dropped to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 150.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction substantially the same width as the top plate portion. Left side plate portion 551b, right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as top plate portion 551a and extending downward from the right side of top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of top plate portion 551a The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the right side plate portion 551c to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right and near the lower end with a substantially constant width. Back plate left portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b to the right Extends to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The ball straightening member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that circulates in two upper and lower stages by this rectifying piece 556a, the flow is rectified so as to flow in a single stage on the downstream side, so that the inside of the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is attached to be slidable in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. 87A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600, and the ball full path 580b is operated by the ball pull lever 593. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B toward the payout device 580. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a serpentine shape through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. 90A is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90B is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side of the back plate 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and has a payout motor 584 whose rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and a rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 and the second transmission gear 587 are meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-like payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a and between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. A payout gear member 588 that is rotatably attached, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 and project into the payout passage 580a. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball extraction passage 580b is branched at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in the rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and frontward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 includes three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 becomes the ball removal movable piece 592. Will flow down to the ball passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592. Therefore, more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 below the payout device 580 from the rear. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full sphere path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is open on the rear side, and a box-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and is open on the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are aligned side by side, and are opened forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens rightward in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the turning center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, respectively, It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full payout passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is open.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, from the game hall island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, a predetermined number of balls are detected based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball pass unit 610, and fills up the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 enters a non-detection state.

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the main body frame substrate unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs low sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open forward, and the rear part of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses sound output from the main body speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recessed portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Thus, the instructed number of game balls B are to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 can be detected, and the deterrent against fraud is increased.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main frame base 501 with the right side extending up and down of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis. Are attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame flange 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame collar 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 99 and FIG. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is a front view showing the inside of a game area in which game balls circulate in the game board. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a gate unit that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B 2003, a second start opening 2004, a first big prize opening 2005, and a second big prize opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 100). Accordingly, in the gaming board 5, the game ball B has the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, and the second grand winning in the gaming area 5a. This is for playing a game in which the operation of driving the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be received or passed through the mouth 2006 or the like.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 100). In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 97, FIG. 117, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit (not shown) arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 A front unit 2000 attached to the front surface and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder (not shown) to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear side.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive the game balls B that have been driven into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are a gaming region. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; According to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 A first big prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow the game ball B to be accepted in accordance with either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B; The Eteiru.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002 and a start opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200 which is attached to the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front opening unit 2100 in front view and has two general winning ports 2001, and the center in the vertical direction at the right end in front view in the game area 5a. A gate unit 2300 having a gate portion 2003 attached to the lower side of the game area 5a, and a general winning opening 2001, a second start opening 2004, which are attached to the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first big prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006.

  The back unit 3000 is a box shape that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and has a front opening, and is closed by attaching the effect display device 1600 to the rear wall from the rear side in a detachable manner. And a lower movable effect unit 3100, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and an upper front movable effect unit 3300 that are mounted in the back box.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop portion 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 coincides with a notch portion of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder (not shown) attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder is provided with a through-hole that holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has an inside that is substantially the same size as the game area 5a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. ing.

  Moreover, the panel holder is provided with the notch part notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch are passed through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed to the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 117) for controlling game contents and payout of the game ball B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second start opening sensor 2511, a first large winning opening sensor 2512, a second large winning opening sensor 2513, a starting opening solenoid 2514, and a first attacker solenoid 2515. Are connected to a second attacker solenoid 2516, a general winning port sensor 3001, a first start port sensor 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 includes two status indicators, which are three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and two normal lottery results that are drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs, and a normal hold display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate part 2003 are provided.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port 2002. The first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the game, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for display, and a second special reservation number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second start port 2004. ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 repeats the number of times of opening / closing patterns of at least one of the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like ( A round indicator composed of five LEDs for displaying the number of rounds).

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box (not shown) that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 99 and FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end forms an opening of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (in this case, a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that allow the game ball B to be received according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003. The first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize that allow the game ball B to be accepted in at least one of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B It is provided with a 2006, a.

  A plurality (four here) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed below the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view in the game area 5a. A right general winning opening 2001 is arranged immediately below the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004 is disposed at a lower position on the lower left side of the gate portion 2003 and slightly lower than the general winning port 2001 on the right side. The first grand prize winning port 2005 is disposed below the second starting port 2004 and at a slightly lower height than the first starting port 2002. The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged at a slightly lower position on the left side of the first big prize opening 2005.

  The front unit 2000 is attached at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1008. The start unit 2100 has one general winning port 2001 and a first start port 2002, and a start port A side unit 2200 which is attached to the left side of the unit 2100 in the front view along the inner rail 1002 and has two general winning ports 2001, and the center in the vertical direction at the right end of the game area 5a in the front view. A gate unit 2300 which is attached to the lower side and has a gate portion 2003, and a general winning port 2001, a second start port 2004, which is attached to the upper side of the game area 5a and slightly in the middle of the front view. A frame-shaped center object 2500 having a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second major prize opening 2006, and the frame of the center prize 2500 are closed. Includes a transparent front direction unit 2600 is attached to so that the.

  The gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is disposed at the right end of the game area 5a as viewed from the front and below the center in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2003 formed so that the game balls B can always pass one by one in the vertical direction, and a gate sensor 2301 that detects the game balls B that have passed through the gate portion 2003.

  In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then to the lower substrate holder 1200. Discharged. Further, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is sent to the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is done.

  In addition, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2511 and then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is detected by the first big prize opening sensor 2512 or the second big prize opening sensor 2513 and then moved to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. Sent to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8a. Center character]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 101 is a front view of the center accessory and the front effect unit in the front unit of the game board. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the front center of the game area 5 a and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the lower movable effect unit 3100 and the upper front movable effect unit provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. 3300 etc. can be visually recognized from the front. The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5 a Can not invade.

  The center accessory 2500 has one general winning opening 2001 arranged at the lower right corner when viewed from the front on the outer periphery of the frame, a second starting opening 2004 arranged slightly below the general winning opening 2001, It has a first big prize opening 2005 arranged below the second start opening 2004 and a second big prize opening 2006 arranged slightly below the first big prize opening 2005. Further, the center accessory 2500 is capable of releasing the warp inlet 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and the game ball B having entered the warp inlet 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. And a warp outlet 2502 opened in the frame, and a stage 2503 capable of releasing the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction and then released into the game area 5a.

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape that is depressed in the center side in the left-right direction, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110) is formed so that the position of the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowest. The stage 2503 is inclined so that the lowest part at the center in the left-right direction becomes lower toward the front, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from this part. In the center accessory 2500, the height of the lowest part of the stage 2503 is substantially the same as that of the second start port 2004.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the heightened portion (top) of the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and the first large sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first big prize port 2005. A winning opening sensor 2512 and a second winning opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the second winning opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 117). The center accessory 2500 includes a start-up solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second start-up port 2004 in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate unit 2003, and a first start-up port 2002 or a second start-up. A first attacker solenoid 2515 that opens and closes the first big prize opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottered by accepting the game ball B into the mouth 2004, and the first start opening 2002 or the first A second attacker solenoid 2516 that opens and closes the second big prize opening 2006 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B at the second starting port 2004.

  The center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right side and the upper side of the right side of the upper surface in the front view are the outer periphery (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. A gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. Further, when the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the lower right corner when viewed from the front is arranged with the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, and the second major winning port 2006. The lower right corner portion in front view that extends is extended to the lower right corner in the game area 5a, and a space is formed between the lower right corner portion and the upper right portion. In that space, the gate unit 2300 is arranged.

  Therefore, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center object 2500 (so-called right-hand hit), the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. In addition, the game ball B can be received into the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 that are opened (open) with a high probability.

[5-8b. Table production unit]
The table effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 is a side cross-sectional view of the front effect unit cut along the center in the left-right direction together with the center accessory as seen from the right. FIG. 103 is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs in the front effect unit and the reflective recesses of the front light guide plate. FIG. 104 is a front view showing a light emission mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front effect unit emits light.

  The front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is closed on the center actor 2500 and has a transparent flat front light guide plate 2610, a reflector 2620 attached to the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610, and an upper surface of the reflector 2620. The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 on which a plurality of LEDs 2630 that irradiate light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610 are mounted, and the center light so as to cover the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 and the reflector 2620 from the front. And a front cover 2650 attached to 2500.

  The front light guide plate 2610 of the front effect unit 2600 is formed on the transparent flat light guide plate main body 2611 and the back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611, and from any of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 on the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. And a plurality of fine reflecting recesses 2613 for reflecting incident light forward. The plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 are composed of a first specific light incident portion 2612a, a second specific light incident portion 2612b, a third specific light incident portion 2612c, and a fourth specific light incident portion 2612d. It is configured. The first specific light incident portion 2612a, the second specific light incident portion 2612b, the third specific light incident portion 2612c, and the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d divide the upper surface of the light guide plate body 2611 into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction). Then, they are arranged in order from the left to the right in two rounds (the order of returning to the beginning after the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d to become the first specific light incident portion 2612a).

  The reflection concave portion 2613 has a plane that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 and is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. . The reflective recess 2613 is recessed in a pent roof-like triangle. The reflective concave portion 2613 can reflect the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate body 2611. In addition, the reflection concave portion 2613 can reflect the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate body 2611.

  As a result, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, the light is reflected to the front front surface of the light guide plate body 2611 (perpendicular to the paper surface) by the reflective concave portion 2613. The reflective recess 2613 appears to emit light from a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, the light is reflected in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate body 2611 by the reflective concave portion 2613, From the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, it appears that the reflection recess 2613 is not emitting light.

  In the present embodiment, the reflective concave portion 2613 has a shape that is recessed in a triangle and extends in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be any one that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612.

  The plurality of reflective concave portions 2613 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612, and the plurality of first reflective concave portions 2613a and second specific light incident portions 2612b corresponding to the first specific light incident portion 2612a. A plurality of fourth reflections corresponding to a plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b corresponding to the third specific light input part 2612c, a plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c corresponding to the third specific light input part 2612c, and a fourth specific light input part 2612d. A recess 2613d.

  In addition, the front light guide plate 2610 includes a plurality of patterns 2614 that can emit and display in different modes by reflecting light forward from a specific group of the plurality of reflecting recesses 2613. Yes. The plurality of patterns 2614 includes a first pattern 2614a including only a plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a, a second pattern 2614b including only a plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b, and a third including only a plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c. The pattern 2614c includes a fourth pattern 2614d including only a plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d.

  The first design 2614a, the second design 2614b, the third design 2614c, and the fourth design 2614d are concentric, in order from the outside to the center, as shown in FIGS. 101 and 104, etc. (following the fourth design 2614d). Are arranged so as to return to the beginning and become the first pattern 2614a).

  The reflector 2620 has a fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of the front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. The reflector 2620 can sandwich the front light guide plate 2610 between the front light guide plate 2610 and the front light guide plate 2610 by inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed recess 2621, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without rattling. it can. On the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixed recess 2621, a through hole 2622 that penetrates up and down is formed at a portion corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640.

  The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 has a strip shape extending in the left-right direction, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted on the lower surface of the reflector 2620 immediately above the fixed recess 2621. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are respectively mounted (attached) to portions corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622 of the reflector 2620. The front light guide plate decoration board 2640 is formed on the upper surface of the reflector 2620 so that the plurality of LEDs 2630 face downward through the through holes 2622.

  The plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached so as to correspond to the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2630 include a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light incident part 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light incident part 2612b, and a third specific light incident part 2612c. And a fourth LED group 2630d corresponding to the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d. The first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d divide the plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction, and from left to right The second LED group 2630d is arranged in order in the order of the second LED group 2630d. In the present embodiment, the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d each have six LEDs 2630.

  Next, the light emission effect by the front effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the first specific light incident portion 2612a, is reflected to the front by the first reflective recess 2613a, and the remaining second Since the second reflection recess 2613b, the third reflection recess 2613c, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the first reflection recess 2613a appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, The first pattern 2614a composed of a plurality of first reflective recesses 2613a can emit light (see FIG. 104 (a)).

  When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the second specific light incident portion 2612b, is reflected to the front by the second reflection concave portion 2613b, and the remaining second Since the one reflecting recess 2613a, the third reflecting recess 2613c, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the second reflecting recess 2613b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, The second pattern 2614b composed of a plurality of second reflective recesses 2613b can emit light (see FIG. 104 (b)).

  When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the third specific light incident portion 2612c, is reflected to the front by the third reflection concave portion 2613c, and the remaining second Since the first reflective concave portion 2613a, the second reflective concave portion 2613b, and the fourth reflective concave portion 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the third reflective concave portion 2613c appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, The third pattern 2614c composed of the plurality of third reflective recesses 2613c can emit light (see FIG. 104C).

  When the fourth LED group 2630d of the front light guide plate decoration board 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d, is reflected to the front by the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d, and the remaining second Since the one reflecting recess 2613a, the second reflecting recess 2613b, and the third reflecting recess 2613c are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting recess 2613d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, A fourth pattern 2614d composed of a plurality of fourth reflective recesses 2613d can emit light (see FIG. 104 (d)).

  As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can be made to emit light, the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be divided into the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth. When the LED group 2630d is made to emit light in the order, the first picture 2614a, the second picture 2614b, the third picture 2614c, and the fourth picture 2614d can be made to emit light in this order, and there is a movement that spreads outward from the center. A lighting effect such as animation can be performed.

  On the other hand, when the plurality of LEDs 2630 are caused to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630d, the third LED group 2630c, the second LED group 2630b, and the first LED group 2630a, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, Light can be emitted in the order of the pattern 2614b and the first pattern 2614a, and a light-emitting effect such as an animation with a movement that concentrates from the outside toward the center can be performed.

  Thus, according to the front effect unit 2600, a single front light guide plate 2610 can emit a plurality (three or more) of different pictures 2614, so that each picture can be displayed for animation display or the like. There is no need to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and a wide space is provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. It can be easily secured. Accordingly, since a large space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like are provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. The pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal to the player by improving the appearance in the game area 5a can be arranged, and in addition to the effect by the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect Various effects can be provided to the player by performing the movable effects by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest. be able to.

  In addition, the front light guide plate 2610 causes a plurality of translucent patterns 2614 due to the point light emission of the plurality of reflective recesses 2613 to emerge in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. Because it can show a light-emitting decoration that moves like an animation, it can have a strong impact on players familiar with light-emitting effects using conventional light guide plates, and it can surprise and entertain players, It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since only the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emission display of the pattern 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 well, other players away from the front can see the pattern 2614. The light-emitting display becomes difficult to see, it can be difficult for other players to notice that an effect using the front light guide plate 2610 is performed, and other players can be prevented from paying attention. In addition to being able to play, the game can be performed without worrying about other players, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached so as to be sandwiched between the fixed recesses 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decoration board 2640 are reliably positioned with respect to the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. can do. Thereby, each LED 2630 (the 1st LED group 2630a, the 2nd LED group 2630b, the 3rd LED group 2630c, the 4th LED group 2630d) is arrange | positioned in the position corresponding to each specific light-incidence part 2612 of the front light-guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each LED 2630 can be reflected frontward by the corresponding reflection recess 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be reliably emitted.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 attached at the center in the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is displayed by light emission by the LED 2630, the light emitting display pattern is displayed. 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, the area where the game is actually played can be viewed in good condition from the player side, and the game is difficult to see, so the player is distrusted. It is possible to entertain the game in a good state by preventing feeling.

  Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed concave portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the case where the light guide plate main body 2611 is attached by two members as in the prior art. Can be eliminated, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light incident portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 can be reliably irradiated with light from the LED 2630, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be irradiated. It is possible to reliably display the light emission.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 are arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611. Compared to the case where the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) does not surround the outer periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 and the front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611. It is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in the player, so that the effect image can be easily seen from the player side, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. It is possible to entertain in a good state and suppress a decrease in interest, and there is no frame-like partition in the game area 5a in front view. In a feeling of opening may be a pachinko machine 1, can be assumed to be appealing is strongly attracted the attention of a player to improve the appearance of the game area 5a.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) is made by matching the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. Or a plurality of LEDs 2630) from the player side, making it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give a strong impact to a player who thought that 2610 did not exist and to surprise the player with light emission display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, since the front cover 2650 prevents the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from being seen from the player side, it is possible to prevent the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated by seeing the reflector 2620 and the like. The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are not seen from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630, and thus the LED 2630. The display 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 is displayed in a light-emitting manner, so that the player can be greatly surprised by the light-emitting display that the player has not predicted, and the player 26 can enjoy the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614. It is possible to think that there is something good for the game, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image behind the front light guide plate 2610 is provided, a light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610, and an effect image by the effect display device 1600 Since it is possible to show the player a combined effect, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 It is possible to entertain the player by directing and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610, the distance to the effect display device 1600, Therefore, by displaying the effect image related to the plurality of patterns 2614 displayed and emitted on the front light guide plate 2610, it is possible to add a sense of depth and a three-dimensional appearance to the displayed pattern 2614. An effect (display effect) that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the above-described embodiment, the reflection concave portion 2613 is shown as having a triangular cross section and extending uniformly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cross section is a semicircular arc and extending uniformly. May be a polygonal and constant extension, a curved cross-section and a constant extension, and the like.

  Further, the LED 2630 may be a single color or a full color. The number of the patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the number of the specific light incident portions, the reflective recesses, and the LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number of the patterns 2614.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a front view of the game board showing the lower front center decorative body in the lower movable stage unit, and FIG. 107 shows the lower front central base body and the lower front center base body in the lower movable stage unit. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower rear center decorative body is lit, and FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the central decorative body, the lower rear central decorative body, the lower left side decorative body, and the lower right side decoration are illuminated. FIG. 109 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state shown in FIG. 108 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. Further, FIG. 110 shows the four rotating decorative bodies, the left side rotational decorative body, the left sub-side rotational decorative body, the right side rotational decorative body, and the right sub-side rotational decorative body in the lower movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoration of no. FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the types (sizes) of arrows that are emitted and displayed in the lower movable effect unit.

  FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board shown with the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit lowered. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the front unit 2000 and a first start port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first start port 2002 (see FIG. 117).

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and has a box-like shape that is open at the front. The back unit 3000 has a square opening on the rear wall where the effect display device 1600 faces forward, and a lower part in the back box. Lower movable effect unit 3100 attached, upper rear movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box, and upper front attached in front of upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part in the back box A movable rendering unit 3300.

[5-9a. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. Lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower part of the back box, and a part thereof is located in front of the lower part of effect display device 1600. The lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a lower front center decoration unit 3110 attached below the effect display device 1600 and near the front end of the back box, and a lower center effect unit disposed behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110. 3120, and a lower left side effect unit 3150 and a lower right side effect unit 3170, which are respectively disposed on the left and right sides of the lower center effect unit 3120.

  The lower front center decorative unit 3110 includes a lower front central decorative body 3111 having a trapezoidal shape (an inverted isosceles triangle shape with a flat apex) constricted downward and having translucency. The lower front center decoration unit 3110 is located behind the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 in a state assembled to the game board 5. The lower front central decorative body 3111 can be decorated with light emission by the lower central decorative board of the lower central effect unit 3120.

  The lower center directing unit 3120 is attached to the lower central lifting base 3121 mounted in the back box behind the lower front central decoration unit 3110 so as to be lifted and to the front of the lower central lifting base 3121 and has translucency. The lower rear decorative body 3122 and the lower central decorative board (illustrated) on which a plurality of LEDs arranged on the rear side of the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and capable of irradiating light are mounted. And a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part of the lower central elevating base 3121.

  Although not shown, the lower center stage unit 3120 includes a unit base attached to the back box, a pair of elevating guides attached to the unit base and guiding the lower central elevating base in the vertical direction, and a unit. A rod-shaped arm member that is rotatably attached to an axis whose base end extends back and forth on the base, a sliding pin that is attached to the distal end of the arm member and is inserted into a slit of the lower central lift base 3121, and an arm member And a lower center raising / lowering drive motor to be rotated.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the lower center elevating base 3121 has a slit extending left and right, and a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted into the slit. The lower center elevating base 3121 is lowered by a lower center elevating drive motor between a lowered position that is entirely behind the lower front center ornament 3111 and an elevated position that is entirely above the lower front center ornament 3111. It is mounted so that it can be raised and lowered.

  The lower rear center decorative body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle and has a plurality of light emitting areas 3122a arranged in the vertical direction. The lower back center decorative body 3122 can be decorated with light emission by the light emission of the LED of the lower center decorative substrate. The lower central decorative board is mounted such that a plurality of LEDs can individually decorate the light emitting areas 3122a of the lower rear central decorative body 3122, and the lower central lifting base 3121 is raised. Sometimes, it is mounted so as to be able to irradiate light toward the lower front center decorative body 3111 which is lower and forward.

  Although not shown in detail, the central movable unit 3125 is attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 with an interval in the left-right direction, and a plurality of mounting bases each extending upward in a flat plate shape, A plurality of central rotary drive motors mounted on a plurality of mounting bases with the rotary shafts directed in the left-right direction, and the rotary shafts of the respective central rotary drive motors. And a plurality of cube-shaped rotating decoration bodies 3126 covering the above. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 can be rotated around an axis extending in the left and right directions by a central rotation driving motor, and are arranged coaxially in the left and right directions. In addition, each rotating decorative body 3126 is formed with different decorative portions 3127 on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 can be independently rotated by each central rotational drive motor.

  Although not shown in the figure, the central movable unit 3125 is attached to the lower surface of the lower central elevating base 3121 below the rotary decorative bodies 3126, and a plurality of movable movable bodies 3126 can be irradiated with light. The lower center upper surface decoration board | substrate with which LED is mounted is provided. Each rotating decorative body 3126 can be light-decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LED on the lower central upper surface decorative substrate.

  The lower left side production unit 3150 of the lower movable production unit 3100 is not shown in detail, but the flat plate-like lower piece portion extending horizontally, and the plate-like side extending upward from the left end of the lower piece portion. The front side of the unit base of the lower central stage unit 3120 has a side and a flat upper side extending from the upper end of the side to the upper side of the lower piece and extending to the right shorter than the lower piece. The left unit base mounted in the back box on the left side of the view, and the cylindrical guide shaft with the lower end and upper end mounted on the lower piece and the upper piece, respectively, near the right side of the side of the left unit base And a rod-shaped male screw member that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by a lower piece and an upper piece of the left unit base so as to extend in parallel with the guide shaft and has a male screw formed on the outer periphery. And male thread member A lower left side lift base 3151 slidably attached to the guide shaft with a nut fitted thereto, a lower left side lift drive motor attached to the left unit base and rotating a male screw member; A lower left side decorative body 3152 that is attached to the front surface of the left side lifting base 3151 and has translucency, and is attached to the right side surface of the lower left side decorative body 3152 so that light can be emitted toward the left. A lower left side decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The lower left side decorative body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3152a arranged in the vertical direction, and each of the light emitting areas is appropriately emitted by causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative board to emit light appropriately. The 3152a can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The lower left side production unit 3150 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper part of the lower left side lifting base 3151 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and has a slider having a slit extending in the front-rear direction, The lower left slide drive motor is attached to the rear side of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so that the rotary shaft extends upward below the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower left slide drive motor. And a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin that is slidably inserted into the slit of the slider on the distal end side extending in the horizontal direction from the proximal end side.

  Further, although the lower left side production unit 3150 is not shown in detail, the lower left side production unit 3150 is attached to the slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the rotation base is directed to the left and right in the mounting base. A left side rotation drive motor that is attached, and a cubic left side rotation decoration body 3153 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the left side rotation drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the left side rotation drive motor. The left side rotating decorative body 3153 has different decorative portions 3154 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). The left side rotating decorative body 3153 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a left side rotation driving motor.

  Further, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is not shown in detail, but is attached below the left side rotating decorative body 3153 on the upper surface of the slider and can emit light toward the left side rotating decorative body 3153. A lower left side upper surface decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided. By appropriately emitting the LED on the lower left side upper surface decorative board, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Further, the lower left side production unit 3150 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base and extends upward in the form of a flat plate, and the sub attachment base A left subside rotation drive motor attached to the rotation shaft of the left subside rotation drive motor and the left subside rotation drive motor that is mounted with the rotation shaft directed in the left-right direction, and a cubic left subside rotation that covers the outer periphery of the left subside rotation drive motor And a decorative body 3155. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 has different decorative portions 3156 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a left sub-side rotation drive motor.

  Further, the lower left side production unit 3150 is not shown in detail, but is attached below the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base, and faces the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155. And a lower left sub-side upper surface decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 can be light-decorated by appropriately emitting the LED on the lower left sub-side upper surface decorative board.

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 is assembled to the game board 5, and the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 attached to the left unit base is at a height that allows the left side rotation decoration body 3153 to enter the lower part. The lower center elevating base 3121 of the center effect unit 3120 is disposed at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower center elevating base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. Further, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a left side rotation ornament 3153 between the left sub rotation effect body 3126 and the leftmost rotation ornament 3126 of the lower center effect unit 3120 when the left sub-side effect decoration 3155 is assembled to the game board 5. There is a space that can enter.

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the male screw member with a lower left side elevating drive motor so that the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the lower center effect unit 3120 are moved together with the slider via the lower left side elevating base 3151. The lower central lift base 3121 can be moved up and down between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the lowered position and an elevated position having the same height as the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155. In addition, the lower left side production unit 3150 rotates the cam member with the lower left slide drive motor, thereby bringing the left side rotation decoration body 3153 close to the lower center production unit 3120 and the adjacent appearance position via the slider. Further, it can be slid in the left-right direction between the lower center effect unit 3120 and a retreat position in which about half is located below the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155.

  The lower right side production unit 3170 of the lower movable production unit 3100 is not shown in detail, but the flat plate-like lower piece portion extending horizontally, and the plate-like side extending upward from the right end of the lower piece portion. The front side of the unit base of the lower center stage production unit 3120 has a flat upper side that extends from the upper end of the side and the side to the upper side of the lower piece and to the left shorter than the lower piece. The right unit base installed in the back box on the right side of the view, and the cylindrical guide shaft with the lower end and upper end attached to the lower piece and the upper piece, respectively, near the left side of the side of the right unit base And a rod-shaped male screw member that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by a lower piece and an upper piece of the right unit base so as to extend in parallel with the guide shaft and has a male screw formed on the outer periphery. And male thread member A lower right side elevating base 3171 slidably attached to the guide shaft with a nut fitted thereto, a lower right side elevating drive motor attached to the right unit base and rotating a male screw member; The lower right side decorative body 3172 which is attached to the front surface of the right side elevating base 3171 and has translucency, and is attached to the right side of the lower right side decorative body 3172 and can irradiate light to the right. A lower right side decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3172a arranged in the vertical direction, and each of the light emitting areas can be appropriately emitted by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative board. The 3172a can be independently decorated with light emission.

  The lower right side production unit 3170 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper part of the lower right side lifting base 3171 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and has a slider extending in the front-rear direction. A lower right slide drive motor attached to the rear side of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so that the rotary shaft extends upward below the slider, and a base end side is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower right slide drive motor. And a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin that is slidably inserted into the slit of the slider on the distal end side extending in the horizontal direction from the proximal end side.

  Further, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the rotating base is directed to the mounting base in the left-right direction. A right-side rotation drive motor that is attached, and a cubic right-side rotation decoration body 3173 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the right-side rotation drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the right-side rotation drive motor. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 has different decorative portions 3174 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Further, the right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a right side rotation driving motor.

  Although the lower right side effect unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is attached below the right side rotating decorative body 3173 on the upper surface of the slider and can irradiate light toward the right side rotating decorative body 3173. The lower right side upper surface decoration board | substrate with which several LED is mounted is provided. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED on the lower right side upper surface decorative board.

  Further, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base and extends upward in the form of a flat plate, and the sub attachment base Right subside rotation drive motor attached to the right subside rotation drive motor and the right subside rotation drive motor mounted with the rotation axis facing the left and right direction, and a cubic right subside rotation that covers the outer periphery of the right subside rotation drive motor And a decorative body 3175. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 has different decorative portions 3176 on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Further, the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a right sub-side rotation drive motor.

  Further, although the lower right side effect unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is attached below the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base, and faces the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. And a lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be light-decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower right sub-side upper surface decorative board.

  When the lower right side effect unit 3170 is assembled to the game board 5, the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 attached to the right unit base is at a height that allows the right side rotating decorative body 3173 to enter the lower part. The lower center elevating base 3121 of the center effect unit 3120 is disposed at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower center elevating base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. Further, the lower right side effect unit 3170 has a right side rotation ornament 3173 between the right sub side rotation ornament 3175 and the rightmost rotation ornament 3126 of the lower center effect unit 3120 when the right sub-side ornament 3175 is assembled to the game board 5. There is a space that can enter.

  The lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the male screw member with the lower right side elevating drive motor, whereby the right side rotating decoration body 3173 and the lower center effect unit 3120 are moved together with the slider via the lower right side elevating base 3171. The lower central lift base 3121 can be moved up and down between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the lowered position and an elevated position having the same height as the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. Also, the lower right side production unit 3170 rotates the cam member with the lower right slide drive motor, thereby bringing the right side rotation decoration body 3173 close to the lower center production unit 3120 and the adjacent appearance position via the slider. Further, it can be slid in the left-right direction between the lower center effect unit 3120 and a retreat position in which about half is located below the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a decorative portion 3127 of each of the four rotational decorative bodies 3126, a decorative portion 3154 of the left side rotational decorative body 3153, a decorative portion 3156 of the left sub-side rotational decorative body 3155, Different decorations are formed on the decoration part 3174 of the side rotation decoration body 3173 and the decoration part 3176 of the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175, respectively. The four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 are each formed in a dice-shaped cube and extend left and right. Different decorations are formed on the first surface to the fourth surface around the rotation axis.

  In the state where the first surfaces of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 are directed to the front, It is “凰”, “First Eye”, “First Eye”, “Second Eye”, “Third Eye”, “Four Eye”, “First Eye”, “凰”. In the state where each second surface is directed to the front, “star”, “super” “chi” “ja” “n” “su” “!” “Star” are displayed from the left. In the state where the third surface is directed to the front, “!”, “凰” “ge” “ki” “a” “tsu” “凰” “!” Is displayed from the left. Furthermore, in the state where the fourth surface is directed to the front, “celebration”, “!”, “O”, “me”, “de”, “to”, “u” and “!” Are displayed from the left.

  As described above, the four rotational decoration bodies 3126, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 are respectively directed to the front with the same numbers. Thus, a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expected value that is “big hit” can be displayed according to the content of the message.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower movable effect unit 3100 causes the lower front center decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light appropriately. “Arrows” of different sizes can be displayed in a luminous manner. Specifically, if only the lower front center decorative body 3111 is caused to emit light, a “small arrow” of a triangle with the apex of the isosceles triangle facing downward can be emitted and displayed (FIGS. 106 and 111A). reference). Further, when the lower front center decorative body 3111 and the raised lower rear central decorative body 3122 are caused to emit light, a “middle arrow” facing downward with a bar extending upwardly larger than the “small arrow” is displayed in a light emitting manner. (See FIGS. 107 and 111 (b)). Further, in the state of “middle arrow”, the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 are raised, and the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right When all of the side decorative bodies 3172 are caused to emit light, a “large arrow” in which the upper end of the arrow that is directed downward and larger than the “middle arrow” is widened to the left and right can be displayed by light emission (FIGS. 108 and 111 (c)). See).

  In this way, three different sizes of arrows, “small arrow”, “middle arrow”, and “large arrow”, can be displayed in a light-emitting manner, so “big hit” in the order of “small arrow”, “middle arrow”, and “large arrow”. It is possible to display that the expected value of “is high”.

  Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 99 and the like, the lower movable effect unit 3100 is a lowered position in which the lower center elevating base 3121 is behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and cannot be seen from the front. The four rotating decorative bodies 3126 attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 are positioned so as to be in contact with the upper end of the lower front central decorative body 3111 in a front view.

  Further, in a normal state, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, the lower left side lifting base 3151 is located at a lowered position that is slightly above the upper end of the lower front center decorative unit 3110 and almost invisible from the front, The left side rotation decoration body 3153 is separated from the lower center stage production unit 3120 to the left via the slider, and a half of the rotation decoration body 3153 is positioned below the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155, and the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155 is a game. It is located in the vicinity of the lower left end of the region 5a from the center in the vertical direction.

  Further, in a normal state, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, the lower right side lifting base 3171 is positioned slightly above the upper end of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and in a lowered position almost invisible from the front. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 is located at a retracted position where the right side rotating decorative body 3173 is separated from the lower central effect unit 3120 to the right via the slider, and about half of the right side rotating decorative body 3175 is below the right sub side rotating decorative body 3175. It is located near the lower right end of the region 5a from the center in the vertical direction.

  As one of the effects presented to the player in this normal state, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, for example. According to the lottery result, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of the respective rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 stopped to rotate. To the player. Thereby, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops in a desired combination, and a movable effect by the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 can be enjoyed. When the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies a predetermined condition, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 attached to the lower central lift base 3121 by the lower central decorative substrate. Is emitted to decorate the lower front center decorative body 3111 of the lower front central decorative unit 3110 located in front. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106, a downward arrow is emitted and displayed by the lower front center decorative body 3111, so that the player's line of sight is displayed below the game area 5a by the emission display of the downward arrow. The player can be directed to the production operation unit 301 arranged on the screen, can prompt the player to operate the production operation unit 301, and can easily participate in the player participation type production that operates the production operation unit 301. It is possible to make the player entertain the player participatory type effect and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Or, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B from the normal state to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lower central lift base 3121 is changed. Raise from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front-view game area 5a so as to block part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. The player can be surprised and the player can think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. Then, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of the respective rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portion 3127 facing forward in each of the rotated decorative bodies 3126 stopped to rotate is given to the player. Make it visible. This may cause the player to think that if the four rotating decorations 3126 stop rotating in a desired combination, they must be “big hit” (the lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous) occurs. The player can be thrilled by whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorations 3126 stops in a desired combination, and the expectation for the lottery result can be enhanced. When the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies a predetermined condition, a plurality of lower central decorative substrates attached to the lower central lifting base 3121 that is rising The LED is caused to emit light, and the lower rear center decorative body 3122 disposed in front and the lower front central decorative body 3111 disposed forward and downward are illuminated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 107, a large downward arrow is emitted and displayed by the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111. The player's line of sight can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 disposed below the game area 5a to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301. By operating it, it can be thought that it will be a “big hit”, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 to entertain the player participation type effect.

  Furthermore, the lower center elevating base 3121 is selected according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B from the normal state to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Is raised from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front-view game area 5a so as to block part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. The player can be surprised and the player can think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. Subsequently, the left and right left side rotating decorative bodies 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 are respectively slid to the appearance position on the center side, and then the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 are respectively moved. The position is raised to the raised position (see FIG. 108). As a result, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 are aligned in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the game by making it seem that the lottery result is a “hit”. Then, after rotating the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175, the rotation is stopped and the left A decoration part 3156 of the sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, a decoration part 3154 of the left-side rotation decoration body 3153, a decoration part 3127 of each of the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, a decoration part 3174 of the right-side rotation decoration body 3173, and a right sub-side rotation decoration The player visually recognizes the combination of the decorative portion 3176 of the body 3175. At this time, since the plurality of decoration portions 3127 include a decoration portion 3127 that is decorated with numbers, the countdown is performed by stopping the rotation so that the number decoration portions 3127 face forward. As a result of the countdown effect, it is possible to make the player think that the lottery result must be a “hit” and to enhance the interest in the game. Then, when the rotation of the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 is stopped and the countdown ends, The lower front center ornament 3111, the lower rear center ornament 3122, the lower left side ornament 3152, and the lower right side ornament 3172 are illuminated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 108, an even larger downward arrow (giant arrow) is displayed by light emission, so that the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 arranged at the tip of the giant arrow. Therefore, it can be convinced that the lottery result is “big hit”, and the player can be surely operated on the production operation unit 301. When this huge arrow is displayed in a flashing manner, a message explaining the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 is raised, and the effect operation unit 301 is rotated. The operation unit 302 is rotated at high speed (see FIG. 109). Thereby, since the rotation operation part 302 rotates at high speed, the player's interest can be enhanced, so that the press operation part 303 can be surely pressed, and the player is entertained and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  As an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. 109, the effect display device 1600 displays a character “Rotation of the lower button is hot!”, Causing the player to pay attention to the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation operation. The faster the rotation speed of the section 302, the higher the expected value for “big hit” is to inform the player. That is, the expected value is represented by the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302, and an effect image informing the player of the expected value is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 109, as the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a lower front center ornament 3111, a lower rear center ornament 3122, and a lower left side ornament as shown in FIG. An effect image suggesting an operation method of the effect operation unit 301 in which the player's operation is prompted by an “arrow” emitted and displayed by the body 3152, the lower right side decorative body 3172, and the like may be displayed. Specifically, effect images such as “Press the button!”, “Turn the dial!”, “Turn the dial left!”, “Turn the dial right!”, Etc. are displayed. Thereby, operation in the production | presentation operation part 301 can be performed exactly, and the player participatory production which operates the production | generation operation part 301 can be enjoyed reliably.

  Then, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an expected value that is a “hit” by the effect image may be displayed. Using the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175, each of which is formed in a dice shape, the expected value is obtained. You may make it display.

  As an indication of an expected value using four rotating decorative bodies 3126, a left side rotating decorative body 3153, a left subside rotating decorative body 3155, a right side rotating decorative body 3173, and a right subside rotating decorative body 3175 formed in a dice shape, respectively. Performs an effect of displaying an expected value that is a “big hit” by combining each decoration part 3127, decoration part 3154, decoration part 3156, decoration part 3174, and decoration part 3176 that face the front by respective rotations and stops. . Specifically, when only the four rotating decoration bodies 3126 of the lower center stage production unit 3120 at the center are used, for example, there are the following three patterns. The pattern a1 displays an expected value in a state where the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing the front when the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 are stopped rotating is a combination of pieces that the player cannot read the meaning of. No pattern. The pattern a2 has a high expected value to some extent when each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops rotating with the second surface facing the front, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is “CHI” “A” “N” “SU”. Pattern showing that. The pattern a3 has a very high expected value when the respective rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating with the third surface facing the front, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is “ge” “ki” “a” “tsu”. Pattern showing that. As described above, the expected value can be displayed by the pattern displayed by stopping the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, and the expected value increases in the order of the pattern a1, the pattern a2, and the pattern a3.

  Furthermore, as the effects using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left subside rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right subside rotating decorative body 3175 ( Eight (8) dice-shaped rotating bodies are used to produce an effect of displaying an expected value that will be a “big hit” by combining the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176. You may make it do. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. In the pattern b1, the combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176 that have stopped rotating is a combination (no display of an expected value). In the pattern b2, the left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left-side rotating ornament 3153 is “!” Or “凰”, and the four center rotating ornaments 3126 are “Chi”, “ャ”, “「 ”. “S”, right side rotation decoration 3173 is “!” Or “凰”, and right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 is “凰” or “star” (chance display). In the pattern b3, the left sub-side rotation decoration 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left-side rotation decoration 3153 is “!” Or “凰”, and the four center rotation decorations 3126 are “ge”, “ki”, “ A) “tsu”, right side rotation decoration 3173 is “!” Or “凰”, and right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 is “組合 せ” or “star” (gekiatsu display). In the pattern b4, the left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left-side rotating ornament 3153 is “super”, and the four center rotating ornaments 3126 are “chi”, “ja”, “n”, “su”. ”, A combination of“! ”For the right side rotational ornament 3173 and“ 凰 ”or“ star ”for the right sub side rotational ornament 3175 (super chance display). In the pattern b5, the left sub-side rotational ornament 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left-side rotational ornament 3153 is “super”, and the four central rotational ornaments 3126 are “ge”, “ki”, “a”, “tsu”. ”, The right side rotational ornament 3173 is“! ”, And the right sub-side rotational ornament 3175 is a combination of“ 凰 ”or“ star ”(super-gequity display). In the pattern b6, the left sub-side rotational decoration 3155 is “celebration”, the left-side rotational decoration 3153 is “!”, The four central rotational decorations 3126 are “o”, “me”, “de”, “to”, and the right side. A combination in which the rotational decoration body 3173 is “U” and the right sub-side rotational decoration body 3175 is “!!” (“big hit” is determined). In this way, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 are displayed by stopping the rotation of the eight rotation bodies. The expected value can be displayed by the pattern, and the expected value increases in the order of the pattern b1, the pattern b2, the pattern b3, the pattern b4, the pattern b5, and the pattern b6.

  In the above production, if the player does not operate the production operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the production operation unit 301 is prompted, the production of displaying the expected value as described above is not performed. The “arrow” light emission display is also turned off. On the other hand, if the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is urged, an effect is displayed in which the expected value as described above is displayed using the remaining effect time. When the production time is over, the above production is finished and the light emission display of “arrow” is turned off and the production is finished.

  As described above, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when a game state is changed by playing a game in the game area 5a in a normal state (a game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004). (Depending on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery selected by receiving B), the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front central decorative body 3111 rotate or the lower center Four rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged side by side by the lifting base 3121 rise together with the lower rear central decorative body 3122, four rotating decorative bodies 3126 raised by the lower central lifting base 3121 rotate, Lower left slide drive motor of side effect unit 3150, lower right slide drive motor of lower right side effect unit 3170, etc. (slide The pair of left side rotation decoration body 3153 and right side rotation decoration body 3173 slide in the left-right direction, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173 rotate, the slide mechanism and the lower left side. The four rotating decoration bodies 3126, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 in which the left side rotation decoration body 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173 are raised by the lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171. The left and right sub-side rotating decorative bodies 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 rotate and the like can be shown to the player so that the player can see the central movable unit 3125 (four Rotating decorative body 3126), left side rotating decorative body 3153 and right side rotation Decorative body 3173, and it is possible to focus on the left Sabusaido rotary decoration member 3155 and the right Sabusaido rotating decorative body 3175 and the like, it is possible to entertain the movable effects by them.

  Further, when the lower center elevating base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower rear center ornament 3122 emits light and the lower front center ornament 3111 emits light to display a downward arrow, or lower center elevating By raising the base 3121 and causing the plurality of LEDs on the lower central decorative board to emit light from the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111, a large downward arrow is displayed by light emission, or a pair of lower left side up and down By raising the base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 and causing the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. It is possible to entertain the player even by directing, and the downward-facing lighting display It is possible to guide the viewpoint of the player's downward staging operation unit 301 by the mark, it is possible to urge the operation of staging operation unit 301 to the player. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, or the press operation unit 303 is pressed, so that the player participates in the player participation type effect. And can entertain.

  Therefore, since it is possible to perform various movable effects, light-emitting effects, and player-participation-type effects as described above, various combinations of effects can be presented to the player by combining them appropriately. Since it can make the player hard to get bored and make it difficult for the player to predict the production pattern, the player can be surprised by the unexpected production. Can be used to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  As described above, the lower front center decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, the lower right side decorative body 3172, etc. When prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 provides an effect image that prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 301, an effect image that explains the operation of the effect operation unit 301, or an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage By displaying an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of the event and the effect operation unit 301, etc., it is possible to strongly encourage the player to participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. The production operation unit 301 can be made easy to operate, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

[5-9b. Upper rear movable production unit]
The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. Upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the upper part in the back box above effect display device 1600. The upper rear movable rendering unit 3200 includes an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner in the back box, and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner in the back box.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable production unit 3200 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the left base 3211 mounted in the back box and slidable to the left base 3211 in an oblique direction from upper left to lower right. Left slider 3212, a linear rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212, an upper rear left drive motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with the rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction, and an upper rear left A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3214 and connected to the input side of the rotation shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214; a spur gear-like drive gear 3215 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250; A spur gear-shaped first gear meshing with the drive gear 3215 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211 A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3217 meshed with the first transmission gear 3216 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211; and a second transmission gear 3217 meshed with the left base 3211. A third transmission gear 3218 that is rotatably attached to the left base 3211 and a spur gear-like pinion gear 3219 that meshes with the third transmission gear 3218 and the rack gear 3213 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211. I have.

  Further, the upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and is attached to the rear side of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the flat upper rear left decorative body 3220 extending left and right. And an upper rear left decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 can be decorated with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear left decorative substrate to emit light.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 can raise and lower the upper rear left decorative body 3220 via the rack gear 3213 by driving the upper rear left drive motor 3214.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the right base 3231 mounted in the back box and slidable to the right base 3231 in an oblique direction from the upper right to the lower left. The right slider 3232, the linear rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232, the upper rear right drive motor 3234 attached to the right base 3231 with the rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction, and the upper rear right drive. A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the motor 3234 and connected to the input side of the rotating shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234; a spur gear-like drive gear 3235 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250; A spur gear-shaped first gear meshing with the gear 3235 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231 A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3237 meshed with the first transmission gear 3236 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231; and a second transmission gear 3237 meshed with the right base 3231. A third transmission gear 3238 that is rotatably attached to the right base 3231 and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3239 that meshes with the third transmission gear 3238 and the rack gear 3233 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231. I have.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232 and is attached to the rear side of the upper rear right decorative body 3240 and the flat upper rear right decorative body 3240 extending left and right. And an upper rear right decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be decorated with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear right decorative board to emit light.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 can raise and lower the upper rear right decorative body 3240 via the rack gear 3233 by driving the upper rear right drive motor 3234.

  The clutch mechanism 3250 has a cylindrical storage case 3251 and a plurality of protrusions 3252a extending radially near the inner surface of the storage case 3251 in the storage case 3251, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper An input member 3252 to which the rotation shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and a plurality of transmission grooves 3253a inserted in the housing case 3251 with the protrusions 3252a of the input member 3252 having a gap in the circumferential direction, A plurality of cam surfaces 3253b formed so as to be narrower from the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 projecting from the housing case 3251. An output member 325 having an output shaft 3253c to which is attached A plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between the plurality of cam surfaces 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251; a tightening spring 3255 for tightening the housing case 3251 from the outside; a housing case 3251; The main body housing 3256 attached to the left base 3211 or the right base 3231 and the housing concave portion 3256a of the main body housing 3256 are closed, and the output of the output member 3253 is provided. A lid member 3257 through which the shaft 3253c passes, and a bearing 3258 attached to the lid member 3257 and through which the output shaft 3253c is inserted are provided (see FIGS. 114A to 114C).

  In the clutch mechanism 3250, when the input member 3252 is rotated by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the plurality of protrusions 3252a of the input member 3252 are positioned at the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253. The output member 3253 rotates in contact with the output member 3253, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 rotates. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 as it is.

  Further, when the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side via the output shaft 3253c, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 moves in the direction of the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Therefore, the space between the cam surface 3253b and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 is narrowed, and the roller 3254 is caught between them. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, the rotation of the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side is caused by the upper rear via the input member 3252. There is no transmission to the left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if a force is applied to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 or the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward due to gravity, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 to pass through the output member 3253. Since the rotation is locked, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward arbitrarily, and a load is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234. Instead, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary position.

  In the clutch mechanism 3250 of this embodiment, the housing case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by a tightening spring 3255 made of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied to the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 via the output shaft 3253c becomes larger than a predetermined value, the tightening force (biasing force) of the tightening spring 3255 is increased. ), The circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 abuts on the protrusion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated with a strong force from the output side, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 is strongly bitten and cannot be unlocked, or the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 are damaged. Can be prevented.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts two rollers 3254 between the protrusions 3252 a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253 b, and two rollers 3254. These may be configured to be biased by the lock springs 3260 toward the protrusions 3252a close to the respective springs. Thus, when a force is applied to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved to the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251. The rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from when the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side is applied to when the lock is applied can be inserted between the inner surface and the inner surface. It can be reduced as much as possible.

  Next, an effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is located above the effect display device 1600 and behind the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is in a state invisible from the player side. In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are not driven, but as described above, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 The rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253 by the clutch mechanism 3250 interposed between the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward without permission.

  Accordingly, in order to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving downward, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are continuously driven or moved downward. It is not necessary to provide an electrical lock mechanism for preventing the movement, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. Further, since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving without permission due to the presence of the clutch mechanism 3250, the game board 5 is being transported or attached to the island facility of the game hall. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 remain in the original state at the time of shipment even when vibration or acceleration is applied, and unnecessary origin adjustment is not necessary. It is possible to reduce the labor involved in installing the game board 5 and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  In this normal state, depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved obliquely downward toward the center via the clutch mechanism 3250, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 is moved. And the left end of the upper rear right decorative body 3240 come into contact with each other to form one large decorative body (see FIG. 112). As a result, a large decorative body extending left and right appears in the upper front portion of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Thus, according to the upper rear movable rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the decorative body 3240 and the decorative body 3240), vibrations from the presentation operation unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies that can be operated by the player, the left slider 3212, the right slider 3232, and the upper part Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate because the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are about to descend due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the output The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the member 3253. Thus, the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the upper rear from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and upper rear right decorative body 3240 side). Since the rotation transmission to the left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side is interrupted and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are arbitrarily lowered. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from unexpectedly moving (falling) via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, and the upper rear The left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 cause untrustworthiness to the player due to unintended movement. Can be avoided, it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest to delight movement of the upper left rear decorative body 3220 and the upper right rear decorative body 3240 to the player.

  In addition, as described above, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250 even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side are about to be lowered. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position via the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are various. A variety of performance patterns that stop moving up and down at the position can be shown to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored with the movable effects of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 even if the upper rear left decorative body 3240 is stopped. The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and early damage to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload can be prevented, and the upper It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by avoiding interruption of the game due to breakage of the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protruding portions 3252 a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253 b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively moved by lock springs 3260. When urging to the projecting portion 3252a side close to each of them, a roller 3254 is immediately applied when a force is applied to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and the lock is applied after the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 until this can be reduced as much as possible. Thus, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without being jerky. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and enjoys the movable performance by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, by moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward to bring the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and Since the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body, the combined appearance of a large decorative body can have a strong impact on the player, making the player enjoyable And the appearance of a large decorative body can make it seem that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit game”) that would be advantageous to the player may occur, and expectation of the game A feeling can be raised and the fall of interest can be suppressed. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other and joined together, the upper upper right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side is moved by contacting each other. However, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided for each, a force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (from the output side to rotate). Force 3), the roller 3254 is engaged between the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 to lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving due to contact with each other, and the upper rear left decorative body can be prevented by reaction of the contact. It is possible to prevent the body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from returning, and the player can surely entertain the movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 come together and entertain. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. 3253 is rotated, and the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, so that the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force for rotating the housing case 3251 is applied via the plurality of rollers 3254, a force (torque) for rotating the housing case 3251 is a frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. Is larger between the housing case 3251 and the clamping spring 3255. Rigashoji, the accommodating case 3251 is able to rotate. Then, by rotating the housing case 3251, the output member 3253 rotates through the plurality of rollers 3254, the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253 abuts on the protruding portion 3252 a of the input member 3252, The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated with a strong force from the output side, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 is strongly bitten and cannot be unlocked, or the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 are damaged. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized.

[5-9c. Upper front movable production unit]
The upper front movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part in the back box in front view with respect to the effect display device 1600. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to a horizontally long unit base 3301 attached to the upper part in the back box, an upper front drive motor 3302 attached to the unit base 3301, and a unit base 3301 that can be moved up and down. And an upper front movable decorative body 3350 that moves up and down by driving of the upper front drive motor 3302.

  The upper front movable decorative body 3350 is arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 and a circular central decorative body 3351 that is attached to be vertically movable (downward) in the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction. A pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a and a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a are connected to each other, and are attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A first projecting decorative body 3352 having a connecting rod 3352b, a pair of second projecting decorative parts 3353a disposed on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, and a pair of second projecting decorative parts 3353a are coupled to each other. The second projecting decorative body 3352 is coaxially connected to the first connecting rod 3352b and is attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A second projecting decorative body 3353 having a Yuibo 3353B, and a.

  The first protruding decorative body 3352 is formed in an isosceles triangular shape in which a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a protrudes long with the central decorative body 3351 side as a base. In the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is disposed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the left side. Further, the first projecting decorative body 3352 has a link attachment portion 3352c to which the distal end of a right second link bar 3304, which will be described later, is rotatably attached to the distal end of the right first projecting decorative portion 3352a.

  The second protruding decorative body 3353 is formed in an isosceles triangular shape in which a pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a protrudes long with the central decorative body 3351 side as a base. In the pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353a, the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 is disposed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the right side. Further, the second projecting decorative body 3353 has a link mounting portion 3353c to which the tip of a left second link rod 3304, which will be described later, is rotatably attached to the tip of the left second projecting decorative portion 3353a.

  In the upper front movable decorative body 3350, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353 are formed in the same shape and the same size. Yes. The upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a left second protruding decorative portion 3353a behind the left first protruding decorative portion 3352a and a right first protruding decorative portion 3352a behind the right second protruding decorative portion 3353a. It is located and the 1st protrusion decoration body 3352 and the 2nd protrusion decoration body 3353 are comprised so that it may overlap in the front-back direction.

  Further, although not shown, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a plurality of LEDs on the front side, respectively, on the rear side of the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a. Are mounted on the upper front central decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board, and the second protruding decorative part decorative board, the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first protruding decorative parts 3352a, and the pair of The second projecting decorative portion 3353a can be independently decorated with light emission.

  Further, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a symmetrical position with the center in the left-right direction on the front side, and outward in the left-right direction. A pair of first link rods 3303 extending in a rod shape, and a distal end side of the pair of first link rods 3303 is attached to the distal ends of the first link rod 3303 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the distal end side projects first. A pair of second link rods 3304 attached to the link attachment portion 3352c of the decorative body 3352 and the link attachment portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative body 3353 so as to be rotatable around the respective axes, and the front surface of the unit base 3301 An upper stopper 3305 that protrudes forward from the upper end of the first link bar 3303 and restricts upward rotation of the first link bar 3303. It includes a lower stopper 3306, a for regulating the rotation.

  Next, an effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 has the upper front movable decorative body 3350 raised as shown in FIG. 99 and the like, and the central decorative body 3351 is located near the upper end in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. In addition, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 116 (a)). In this normal state, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are overlapped with each other in the front-rear direction, so that the player can recognize that it is one decorative body. In a normal state, the pair of first link bars 3303 are in contact with the upper stopper 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip side moves upward is prevented.

  In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. As a result, the central decorative body 3351 moves downward together with the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353. At this time, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 move downward while remaining in a horizontally extended state. When the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward, the right second link rod 3304 attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the right first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the left side The second link rod 3304 on the left side attached to the link attachment portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative portion 3353a is moved downward, and a pair of second link rods 3304 attached to the respective tips. The first link rod 3303 rotates so that the tip side moves downward.

  When the pair of first link rods 3303 that rotate as the upper front movable decorative body 3350 (central decorative body 3351) moves downward contact the lower stopper 3306, further rotation is prevented. A state is reached (see FIG. 116 (b)). When the central decorative body 3351 further moves downward after the pair of first link rods 3303 abut against the lower stopper 3306, the right first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the left second protruding decorative portion 3353a are Since the downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are located at the center of the first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b (see FIG. The first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the opposite side to the side on which the second link rod 3304 is attached rotate about the center) of the central decorative body 3351. (See FIG. 116 (c)). As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 rotate so that the scissors open around the central decorative body 3351, respectively. The entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enlarged, and the player can be surprised and a decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

  As described above, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, in a normal state, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 overlap each other in the front-rear direction. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first projecting decorative part 3352a and second projecting decorative part 3353a are rotated and opened so that the distal ends are separated from each other, The player who has been recognized as one decorative body can be surprised, and the movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enjoyed.

  Further, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are moved to the central decorative body 3351 simply by moving the upper front movable decorative body 3350 downward by the action of the first link bar 3303 and the second link bar 3304. Since the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be rotated and rotated in directions opposite to each other, there is no need to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the commands from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b for controlling the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but a ROM (main control built-in ROM) that stores various processing programs and various commands and a RAM (main control built-in RAM) that temporarily stores data. ) Etc., a main control MPU which is a microprocessor, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), and a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input A main control solenoid driving circuit for driving various solenoids, and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The mouth sensor 2511, the general winning mouth sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2301 that detects the gaming ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and the first big winning opening 2005. A first big prize opening sensor 2512 for detecting the game ball B, a second big prize opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2006, and illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are detected. Detection signals from the magnetic sensors 3003 and the like are input via the main control I / O ports, respectively.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid are output. The drive signal is output to 2516, the status display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port, the normal symbol display, the normal hold indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special hold number indicator, A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display, the second special reserved number display, the round display, or the like.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, the first big prize port sensor 2512, and the second big prize port sensor 2513 are non-contact type electromagnetic. In contrast to the type proximity switch, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2511. And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2301 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, and the gate sensor 2301.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters. Further, the detection of the game ball B by the first big prize opening sensor 2512 and the second big prize opening sensor 2513 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches having high durability and long life are also used for the first grand prize opening sensor 2512 and the second big prize opening sensor 2513. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls B do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU, which will be described in detail later, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, this power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like controls the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout, and performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the launch that performs the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail during maintenance 553, a ball guidance unit 570, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 is not illustrated in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  An error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, a notification is made that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is a ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589). When the number “3” is displayed, "Specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is in trouble based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591", and when the number "5" is displayed, “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes it is informed that “CR is not connected” (that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing reference pulse, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182 and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will are detected. A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 even when the power is turned off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 117, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 may further include a peripheral control RAM. The peripheral control RAM is a variety of information (for example, schedule data and various data for defining a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600) that continues across the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal described later is input. Information for managing schedule data for defining light emission modes such as LEDs).

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to each decoration board of the gaming board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is supplied from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board or the drive motor of the game board 5 For transmitting to the drive solenoid, or for outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc. Door-side drive light emission composed of side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced from the serial I / O port for display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting positions in the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5 are the peripheral control MPU. Has been entered. In addition, the detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the rise detection sensor 376 a, the drop detection sensor 382, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are peripheral control. Input to MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information are sent to the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main frame 4. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present an acoustic effect (sound effect) that has a more realistic feeling than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, movable body driving command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect driving board of the gaming board 5 are a plurality of serial inputs different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The effect drive board outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 or based on the received gaming board side lighting / flashing command. The lighting signal or the blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

  Further, the effect drive board sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lift drive motor 367 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. Or output to

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 displays a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls display of the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

  The display control MPU has a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. Control is in progress. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data is transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed at which the effect display device 1600 is drawn is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each character is referred to as “sprite”. As a result, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats main scanning in the direction intersecting with the main scanning for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. Driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially receives one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each of the pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as the sub-scan. Similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3. However, it passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously per minute. That is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nail N. Thus, the flow velocity of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503 into the game area 5a, the portion is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first start port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the game unit B is moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the side unit 2200 or the obstacle nail N, and the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 Alternatively, there is a possibility that the first start port 2002, the general winning port 2001, etc. of the start port unit 2100 may be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit). , And is discharged to the upper part of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center accessory 2500. In addition to the gate part 2003 of the gate unit 2300, this part is provided with the second start opening 2004 and the general winning opening 2001 of the center accessory 2500, and passes through the gate part 2003 with a certain probability.

  When the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the selected lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port that is closed 2004 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are transferred to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0 .01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change (probability fluctuation)”, and “shorter time (time reduction)”) is performed. Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). The special lottery results that are drawn by receiving the game balls B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “out of”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, There are “15R big hit”, “per probability variation (probability variation)”, “per time reduction (time reduction)”, “short per time when accuracy change”, “no per short when probability change”, and so on.

  The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special variation time, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball B can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the first grand prize port 2005 or the second major prize port 2006 when the first grand prize port 2005 or the second grand prize port 2006 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Thus, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580. Therefore, when the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 can accept the game ball B, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 accepts the game ball B. The game ball B can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize winning opening 2006 is a game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). An open / close pattern that is closed after the open state is received is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) after the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received. The game ball B cannot be received if any of the conditions of the passage or the reception of the predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B to the first grand prize port 2005 or the second grand prize port 2006 is satisfied. The open / close pattern to be closed (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R jackpot”, five rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  In this embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 until the special lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Deferred. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is a state where the image sequence is changed and displayed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of designs are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Are stopped and displayed in order, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “out of”, after the three picture sequences are stopped and each picture is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until display is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation. The press operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the front effect unit 2600 and the rear unit 3000, the upper rear Using the movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like as appropriate, it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like, and the player can be entertained by various effects. It can suppress that the interest with respect to falls.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player should perform an operation that should be mistaken or not, the correct operation is performed. To that effect to the player. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the front effect unit of the front unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the selected lottery result. 2600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. can be used as appropriate to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. Various effects can also entertain the player, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[8. Various control processes of main control board]
[8-1. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a main control program, thereby executing a main control side power-on process. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main-control-side power-on processing.

  When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU first executes an initialization process (step S202). In the initialization process, the execution condition of the interrupt process is set, and the data stored in the main control built-in RAM is set according to the activation state of the pachinko machine 1.

  For example, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure, the data stored in the main control built-in RAM is restored based on the game information backed up in order to restore the state before the power is cut off when the power is restored. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is turned on when the hall is opened (when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated), a RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM is executed.

  When the initialization process ends, the main control MPU first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S208). The power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning when the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs.

  When the power failure warning signal is not detected (the result of step S208 is “No”), the main control MPU executes a non-winning random number update process (step S218). In the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. Non-winning random numbers include, for example, reach determination random numbers, variation display pattern random numbers, big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, small hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, and the like. Thereafter, the non-winning random number update process is continuously executed until a power failure notice signal is detected.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU detects a power failure notice signal, the main control MPU executes main control-side power-off processing for protecting game information stored in the main control built-in RAM (step S219). In the main control side power-off process, first, execution of the interrupt process is prohibited to prevent writing to the main control built-in RAM, thereby protecting the game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, output of the drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2514, the function display unit 1400, etc. is stopped, a checksum for determining the validity of the game information at the time of power failure recovery is calculated, and a backup flag is set.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when a power failure occurs or momentary power failure, and after the power is restored, the main control side power-on process is executed, and the game protected by the main control side power-off process Based on the information, restore the state before the power failure.

[8-2. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process (FIG. 118).

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU clears the interrupt flag (step S72). When the interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the main control I / O ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. For example, a detection signal from a first grand prize opening sensor 2512 that detects a game ball B that has entered the first big prize opening 2005, and a second big prize that detects the game ball B that has entered the second big prize opening 2006. A detection signal from the mouth sensor 2513, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B that has entered the first start port 2002, and a first signal that detects the game ball B that has entered the second start port 2004. A detection signal from the two start sensor 2511, a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting fraud using a magnet, a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process to be described later, etc. are read and input information as input information Store in the storage area.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU performs timer update processing for managing time by subtracting from the set measurement time until the timer interrupt period (4 ms) becomes 0 (step S76). The measurement time in the timer update process includes, for example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the fluctuation display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, and the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process described later. A payer ACK indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) in addition to the normal symbol change time corresponding to the determined normal symbol change display pattern. There is a time until a signal is input (ACK signal input determination time) and the like.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a winning random number update process (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created, or a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. . Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball B enters the first grand prize opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 10 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633, or the prize ball command is paid out. When the payer ACK signal notifying that the reception of the board 633 has been normally completed is not input within a predetermined time, a payout is made by creating a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Or transmitted to the control board 633.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a frame command reception process (step S82). In the frame command reception process, various commands output from the payout control board 633 are received.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the first big prize opening sensor 2512 is inputted when the game is not in the big hit gaming state (the game ball enters the first big prize opening 2005) Or when a detection signal from the second grand prize opening sensor 2513 is input (when a game ball enters the second big prize opening 2006), a prize abnormality display command is displayed as an abnormal state. create.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value ("special lottery"), or whether or not the jackpot symbol random number matches the probability change hit determination value. (Determining whether or not to generate a probability variation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of probability change) set higher than that at the normal time (low probability). Details of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port, a random number for determining the normal symbol is extracted. Then, it is determined whether or not the random number for normal symbol determination matches the determination value for normal symbol (“normal lottery”). Whether or not the second start port 2004 is to be opened is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result by the normal lottery). By opening the second start port 2004, a game state in which a game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 becomes a game state advantageous to the player.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a port output process (step S90). In the port output process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the main control I / O ports of the main control MPU. For example, the main control program sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633 when various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. Output a driving signal to the first attacker solenoid 2515 that opens and closes the first big prize opening 2005 and the second attacker solenoid 2516 that opens and closes the second big prize opening 2006 when the game is in the big hit gaming state, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the start opening 2004, the 15 round big hit information output signal, the 5 round big hit information output signal, the 2 round big hit information output signal, the probability changing information output signal, special Symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time and medium information output information, Doguchi various information regarding the game, such as a winning information output signal (game data) signal and outputs to the payout control board 633.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information includes a command for instructing execution of an effect by the effect display device 1600 or a movable body, a command for notifying a gaming state, occurrence of an error, and the like.

  Finally, the main control MPU executes register switching (return) (step S96), and ends the main control timer interrupt processing. Here, when the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU saves the contents of the general-purpose register to the stack area in hardware. As a result, the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main process on the main control side are prevented from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved in the stack area are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU sets an interrupt permission after the process of step S96.

[8-3. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in step S86 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are collectively referred to as a start port. The first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are also collectively referred to as a big prize opening. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as a special symbol.

  In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the game ball is accepted into the starting port, that is, triggered by a winning award (establishment of the start condition), and a big hit for each start memory information (start information) that satisfies the start condition A determination random number is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Based on the lottery result, it is determined whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state. When the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (predetermined winning conditions are met) Transition from the gaming state to the big hit gaming state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won the big winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B has won a big winning opening (the result of step S100 is “yes”), a big winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU determines whether or not a game ball has won the start opening (step S112). Whether or not a game ball has won at the start port is detected from the first start port sensor 3002 or the second start port sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 119). This is performed based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM by reading the presence or absence of a signal.

  When the game ball wins the starting opening (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU executes the starting opening winning process (step S116). In the start opening winning process, a start opening winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball wins in the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot determination is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a special design For example, processing for executing a pre-reading effect is executed. The main control MPU determines whether the display result of the special symbol variation display is a big hit or a small hit based on a big hit determination random number or the like. If not, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the special symbol variation display mode type (for example, variation pattern and variation type) to be executed, and the winnings are subject to the special symbol look-ahead effect. Pre-determination information such as whether to be included in the pre-determination command is set. The main control MPU determines, for example, whether or not to make the winning a special symbol look-ahead effect based on the type of game effect corresponding to the winning and the number of reserved balls at the time of winning.

  Note that the main control MPU, for example, the display result of the special symbol variation display is a big hit, a small hit or out, or the type of big hit when the display result is a big hit, and the display result is a big hit or a small hit. The variation information source table is selected according to whether or not the reach effect is executed in the case where it is not, and the variation type and the variation pattern are determined with reference to the selected variation information source table. The fluctuation information source table is stored, for example, in the main control built-in ROM.

  For example, “out of reach”, “out of reach”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “15R big hit”, “probable per hit”, “short per hour”, “short per probable time”, “per short per probable time” ”, The variation information source table corresponding to each is stored in the main control built-in ROM. In addition, a fluctuation information source table corresponding to “out of reach” corresponding to each number of reserved balls is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the fluctuation information source table is used in a fluctuation pattern selection determination process described later. In addition, the information which these fluctuation | variation information source tables show may be managed by one table.

  FIG. 141 is an example of a variation information source table corresponding to a case where the display result of the variation display of the special symbol is out of order and the reach effect is executed (that is, “out of reach” is out). The fluctuation information source table stores, for example, information indicating a fluctuation pattern number, a fluctuation pattern name, and a fluctuation type selection probability. In the present embodiment, there are usually five types of fluctuations of addition 1, addition 2, addition 3, and addition 4.

  The main control MPU selects a variation pattern from the variation information source table according to a predetermined probability, and selects a variation type according to the variation type selection rate corresponding to the selected variation pattern. In the example of FIG. 141, when “normal reach B loss” is selected as the variation pattern, the variation type “normal” is selected with a probability of 150/200, and the variation type “addition 1” is selected with a probability of 50/200. The

  The variation type is used to determine the variation time. For example, for each variation pattern, a normal variation time that is a variation time corresponding to the variation type “normal” is determined in advance. In addition, for example, variation time addition values corresponding to the variation types “addition 1”, “addition 1”, “addition 2”, “addition 3”, and “addition 4” are determined in advance. When the variation type of the selected variation pattern is “normal”, the normal variation time of the variation pattern is the variation time. When the variation type of the selected variation pattern is “addition 1”, “addition 2”, “addition 3”, or “addition 4”, the variation type selected is changed to the normal variation time of the variation pattern. The value obtained by adding the corresponding fluctuation time addition values is the fluctuation time. For example, when the normal variation time of “CG reach A lose” is 20 seconds and the variation time addition value of the variation type “addition 2” is 10 seconds, the variation time is 20 seconds + 10 seconds = 30 seconds.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that the added value of the variation time is smaller in the order of “addition 1”, “addition 2”, “addition 3”, and “addition 4”. Further, the two pseudo-continuous effects, the three pseudo-continuous effects, and the four pseudo-continuous effects are executed when the variation types “addition 1”, “addition 2”, and “addition 3” are selected, respectively. This is an example of the production.

  The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the decorative symbol variation is executed a plurality of times during one change of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator. It is. “Ending the decoration symbol variation” includes, for example, a mode in which the player recognizes that the variation of the decoration symbol is once completed, such as a mode in which a part or all of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that a pseudo continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is referred to as N consecutive pseudo continuous effects. The following natural number) is called the Mth quasi-continuous production. However, the Nth-pseudo pseudo-continuous production may or may not include a reach production that may develop later. In addition, during the single fluctuation of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the player may actually execute the operation while suggesting that the operation may be executed a plurality of times. An effect that is executed only once is called a “pseudo gasse effect”. The pseudo-gase effect is executed, for example, when the variation type is “normal”. Hereinafter, the pseudo continuous effect is also simply referred to as “pseudo continuous effect”.

  In the variation information source table, a specific effect corresponding to each variation type and a selection rate of the specific effect may be defined. Specifically, for example, the pseudo-gase effect, the two pseudo-continuous effects, the three pseudo-continuous effects, and the four pseudo-continuous effects are the variation types “normal”, “addition 1”, “addition 2”, It is included in the specific effect corresponding to “addition 3”, and the selection rate of these pseudo-continuous effects may be defined in the fluctuation information source table. In addition, for example, for a variation type in which a specific effect may not be executed, such as the variation type “normal”, a selection rate at which the specific effect is not executed is further defined in the variation information source table. Also good. When the above-described specific effect and selection rate are defined in the variation information source table, the main control MPU further selects a specific effect corresponding to the selected variation type, and uses the information indicating the selected specific effect as a prior determination command. include. The pseudo-continuous effect is an example of a specific effect.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a corresponding process based on a special symbol / electrical accessory action number, which is a game progress state variable in which a type of branch process to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game is specified (step) S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed in accordance with the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to a branch process designated based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area. The process ends. The value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, and is therefore backed up in the main control side power-off process.

  In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, special symbol variation waiting processing (step S130), special symbol variation processing (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination processing (step S134), as branch processing, Special symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before opening a big prize opening (step S140), special winning opening release processing (step S142), processing during closing a big prize opening (step) S144) or the special winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

  In the special symbol fluctuation waiting process (step S130), based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the starting port, a process of starting the special symbol fluctuation display on the special symbol display is performed.

  In the special symbol variation processing (step S132), processing for controlling variation display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), based on the fact that a game ball has entered the start port, it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been confirmed and stopped generates a jackpot gaming state.

  In the special symbol losing stop process (step S136), when the big hit gaming state is not generated, the special symbol variation display is stopped and a process for notifying the fact is performed. In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when the big hit gaming state is generated, the special symbol variation display is stopped and a process for notifying the fact is performed.

  In the interval process before opening the big prize opening (step S140), a process for notifying that the big hit gaming state is generated and the big hit operation is started is performed. In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), processing relating to a big hit operation that makes it easy for a game ball to enter each big winning opening by performing the opening of the big winning opening is performed.

  In the big winning opening closing process (step S144), processing relating to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter each big winning opening by performing the closing of the big winning opening from the open state is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is finished, a process for notifying that is performed.

[8-4. Special symbol waiting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol variation waiting process. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the special symbol variation display is not being executed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparation for starting the special symbol variation display is performed.

  The main control MPU first determines whether or not the special symbol variation is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of special symbol actuated balls is not zero. Note that the number of special symbol actuated balls is stored for each starting port when a plurality of starting ports are provided. If the special symbol variation is not suspended (the result of step S420 is “no”), the special symbol variation display is not started, and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the variation display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control MPU sets a retained ball number designation command as command data (step S438).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a jackpot determination random number obtained at the time of winning the start opening.

  Further, the main control MPU executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU creates a variation pattern command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area is set as lower command data (step S458). Further, the variable type classification value is acquired from the variable type classification area (step S460), and the upper byte of the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type is obtained by adding the variation type category value to the command value set in the process of step S452. Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU sets a symbol type command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, a variable state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

  Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interruption process.

[8-5. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 122 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

  First, the main control MPU obtains the number of special symbol actuated balls (step S530). The special symbol operation reservation ball number is stored in the special symbol operation reservation ball number buffer. Further, the main control MPU sets a big hit flag from the big hit flag area (step S538).

  Then, the main control MPU executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of special symbol actuated balls and the big hit flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, the data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value is searched from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

  Further, the main control MPU executes a variation type determination process for selecting a variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The variation type type value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU searches the fluctuation time addition value data corresponding to the fluctuation type type value from the fluctuation time addition value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive times. Then, the main control MPU adds the variation time addition value retrieved in step S552 to the reference variation time value retrieved in step S546 to obtain the final variation time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol / electrical accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[8-6. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment process]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol.

  First, the main control MPU, for example, the display result of the special symbol variation display, the type of jackpot when the display result is a big hit, the presence or absence of the reach effect when the display result is not a big hit or a small hit, and A variation information source table is selected according to the number of reserved balls in the case of no reach reach (step S340).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU acquires a random number for variation pattern (S341). The main control MPU selects a variation pattern and variation type according to the obtained variation pattern random number (S342), sets a command including the selected variation pattern and variation type, and ends this processing.

  In the present embodiment, the main control MPU selects the variation pattern and variation type using one variation pattern random number. For example, the main control MPU selects 2 by two types of random numbers including the variation pattern random number 1 and the variation pattern random number 2. The variation pattern may be selected in stages. Specifically, for example, the main control MPU first selects a variation pattern type (a variation pattern group such as a OO system reach) based on the variation pattern random number 1. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally displayed is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2. Note that the method is not limited to the method of lottery in two stages, and may be a method of lottery in three or more stages.

[9. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. 124 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performed when the peripheral control unit is turned on. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process.

[9-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 executes the peripheral control unit power-on process by executing the effect control program. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU executes an initial setting process (step S1000). In the initial setting process, a process for initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, and the like are performed.

  The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in a very short time. Can do. As a result, the peripheral control MPU enters a state in which interrupt permission is set. For example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the peripheral control MPU outputs commands from the main control board 1310 and pachinko machines related to the control of game effects. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received. In the initial setting process, the image RAM is initialized by writing, for example, “0” in the storage area of the image RAM.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In the current time information acquisition process, for example, calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC held by the peripheral control unit 1511, and the current calendar information is stored in the peripheral control RAM. And set as current time information.

  The peripheral control MPU sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and is 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. When not executed, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V blank signal that is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the display control MPU can be received is input from the VDP. The value 1 is set in the interrupt process.

  The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed (the result of step S1008 is “YES”), the peripheral control MPU first starts the steady process flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set to (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes an interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the interrupt timer activation process, an interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is started, and a timer for counting the number of times this interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process is executed The timer execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the interrupt execution count STN. This timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller timer interrupt process (FIG. 125).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes an operation unit monitoring process (step S1012). In the operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process to be described later, the presence / absence of operation of each operation means is monitored based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 and the like. Then, it is determined appropriately whether or not it is reflected in the game effect.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes lamp data output processing (step S1014). In the lamp data output process, for example, a game board for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 created by the lamp data creation process Output side emission data.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes display data output processing (step S1016). In the display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the image RAM in the display data creation process is output to the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the production control program outputs the music and sound effects created in the sound data creation process, and also the sound data such as notification sounds and notification sounds to the sound source IC as serialized audio data.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes scheduler update processing (step S1020). In the scheduler update process, schedule data for instructing the timing for outputting screen data, light emission data, sound data, drive data such as a movable body, and the like is updated. For example, in the scheduler update processing, the display control MPU instructs the screen data to be output to the VDP from the top screen data among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. In order to update the pointer.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, the peripheral control MPU analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) (command analyzing means). Peripheral control MPU recognizes a game state according to the analysis result of the received command, or executes a corresponding effect. Further, the peripheral control MPU executes a notice determination process in the received command analysis process.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the notice determination process executed in the received command analysis process. The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a prior determination command has been received from the main control board 1310 (step S301). If the peripheral control MPU determines that the advance determination command has not been received (step S301: No), the notice determination processing ends.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the advance determination command has been received (step S301: Yes), the peripheral control MPU stores the advance determination information in the hold storage area corresponding to the hold number indicated by the received advance determination command. In the present embodiment, as the reserved storage area for storing the preliminary determination information indicated by the preliminary determination command, the first reserved storage area for storing the preliminary determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol And a second reserved storage area in which the prior determination information is stored, and the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area each have four storage areas corresponding to the number of holds. doing. Peripheral control MPU, if the received pre-determination command indicates pre-determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol, the pre-determination is made in the storage area corresponding to the number of holds indicated by the pre-determination command in the first hold storage area Information is stored, and if the received prior determination command indicates the prior determination information regarding the variation display of the second special symbol, the advance determination is performed in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations indicated by the prior determination command in the second reserved storage area. Stores judgment information.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the prior determination command has been received (step S301: Yes), the peripheral control MPU refers to the variation type indicated by the prior determination command and determines whether to execute the pseudo-continuous effect. (Step S302). When the peripheral control MPU determines not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect (step S302: No), the notice determination process ends. If the peripheral control MPU determines not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect in step S302, the peripheral control MPU also determines whether to execute the pseudo-gase effect according to a predetermined probability. Further, when the main control MPU includes information indicating whether or not the specific effect is executed in the prior determination command, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect according to the information.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the pseudo-continuous effect (step S302: Yes), the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the number of pseudo-continuous settings is less than a predetermined number (step S303). In addition, it is desirable that the predetermined number of times is, for example, (the minimum number of pseudo-reactions set for big hits minus 1). That is, when the three pseudo-continuous effects may be selected at the time of losing, and when the four pseudo-continuous effects are selected only at the time of the big hit, it is desirable that the predetermined number is 3. Further, when the determination target change in the notice determination process is a change corresponding to the jackpot, step S303 may not be executed.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the number of pseudo-continuous settings is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (step S303: No), the peripheral control MPU ends the notice determination process. If the peripheral control MPU determines that the number of times of pseudo-continuous setting is less than the predetermined number (step S303: Yes), the peripheral control MPU executes a pseudo-continuous effect addition process (step S304) and ends the notice determination process.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pseudo-continuous effect adding process in step S304. The peripheral control MPU refers to the first reserved storage area when the determination target variation of the notice determination process is the variation of the first special symbol, and when the determination target variation is the variation of the second special symbol, Referring to the two reserved storage areas, it is determined whether there is a change before the determination target change and before the start (step S401).

  A variation that matches the condition in step S401 is referred to as a previous variation. Note that when there are x pre-changes in step S401 (x is a natural number of 2 or more), for example, the peripheral control MPU may not treat all x pre-changes as pre-changes after step S402, For example, only y previous changes (y is a natural number between 1 and x, for example, randomly selected) are selected in order from the change immediately before the determination target change, and may be treated as the previous changes after step S402. Good.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that there is no pre-change (step S401: No), the pseudo-continuous effect addition process ends. If the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a previous change (step S401: Yes), the peripheral control MPU determines whether each change pattern of the previous change is a change pattern without reach (step S402).

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a previous variation having a variation pattern with reach (step S402: No), the pseudo-continuous effect addition processing ends. If the peripheral control MPU determines that all the variation patterns of the previous variation are variation patterns without reach (step S402: Yes), whether or not there is a pseudo-continuous effect setting or a pseudo-gase effect setting for each of the previous variations. Determination is made (step S403). Note that the determination in step S402 may not be performed. In this case, if the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a previous change (step S401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S403.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the pseudo-continuous effect or the pseudo-gasse effect is to be executed in any previous variation (step S403: Yes), the number of times of the pseudo-variable setting of the previous variation and the number of times of the pseudo-continuous setting in the second variation are determined. It is determined whether or not the sum is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times (step S404). In addition, when the change immediately before the notice determination process target change has already been a target of the pseudo continuous change process described later, the pseudo continuous effect is executed across a plurality of changes including the immediately preceding change. In this case, the continuous number of consecutive pseudo-continuous effects is used as the number of pseudo-continuous settings for the previous variation in step S404. In addition, the number of consecutive pseudo-series effects in step S404 includes the number of consecutive virtual pseudo-series effects described later. In addition, in the counting of the number of continuous times in step S404, the pseudo-gase effect is counted as one series of pseudo-continuous effects. Further, the predetermined number is the same as the predetermined number in step S303. Further, when the determination target change in the notice determination process is a change corresponding to the jackpot, step S404 may not be executed.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the sum is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times (step S404: Yes), it executes the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1 (step S404) and ends the pseudo-continuous effect adding process. If the peripheral control MPU determines that the sum exceeds the predetermined number of times (step S404: No), it ends the pseudo-continuous effect addition process.

  When the peripheral control MPU determines that neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gasse effect is executed in all previous fluctuations (step S403: No), the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2 is executed (step S406), and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. The addition process ends.

  The details of the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1 and the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2 are described in [14-1. Pseudo-continuous effect changing process] will be described later. Further, the peripheral control MPU does not necessarily execute the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1 even when the process proceeds to step S405. For example, the peripheral control MPU executes the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1 with a predetermined first probability. May be. Similarly, the peripheral control MPU does not necessarily execute the pseudo-continuous effect change process 2 even when the process proceeds to step S406. For example, the peripheral control MPU executes the pseudo-continuous effect change process 2 with a predetermined second probability. May be. Note that the pseudo-continuous effect addition process in the present embodiment may be applied to effects that are repeatedly executed other than the pseudo-continuous effect.

  Returning to the description of FIG. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes a warning process (step S1024). In the warning processing, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 includes various commands classified into notification display, screen generation schedule data and light emission mode generation for executing various abnormality notifications Schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are set. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU executes an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 are updated. By the RTC acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which are time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and the date, which is calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, is updated.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In the lamp data creation processing, game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards is created.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes display data creation processing (step S1030). In the display data creation process, screen data to be output to the effect display device 1600 is created. The peripheral control unit MPU transmits control data (display command) corresponding to the effect to be executed to the display control MPU, and the display control MPU analyzes the control data (display command). Further, the display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control MPU from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. When screen data is input, the VDP extracts at least one sprite character from the image ROM based on the input screen data and creates sprite data from the extracted at least one sprite character. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed is generated on an image RAM (corresponding to a line buffer).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, by extracting sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the sound ROM and controlling the built-in sound source, music and sound effects and the like are specified according to the track number specified in the sound command data. Incorporates sound data and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes a backup process (step S1034). In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the backup area for backup.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes a WDT clear process (step S1036). In the WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the built-in WDT and the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Finally, the peripheral control MPU sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), and returns to the processing of step S1006 again. Then, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1. If it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is executed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms). ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[9-2. Peripheral controller timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time an interrupt timer is generated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 12542 will be described. The peripheral control unit timer interrupt process is performed every (interval at which the V blank signal is input) / n [ms] (n is a natural number). In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process is performed every n = 32, that is, approximately every 1.04 ms.

  When the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not the timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 (step S1100). The timer interrupt execution count STN is the number of times that the interrupt timer is started in the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010) of the peripheral controller power-on process (FIG. 124) and the peripheral controller timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. It is a counter to count. In the present embodiment, as described above, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms. Therefore, the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010) of the peripheral control unit steady process performs the interrupt timer. The peripheral control unit timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed after the activation.

  If the timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100 (the result of step S1100 is “NO”), that is, if the 33rd timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing is started. The peripheral control MPU ends the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process as it is.

  On the other hand, when the timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 (the result of step S1100 is “YES”), the peripheral control MPU adds 1 to the timer interrupt execution count STN (step S1102). By adding a value of 1 to the timer interrupt execution count STN, the number of times the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process is executed by starting the interrupt timer in the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010) of the peripheral control unit power-on process is 1. It will increase by the number of times.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes a movable body information acquisition process (step S1104). In the movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby detecting history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, original position history information, movable position, etc.). History information). From the created history information, the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes an operation unit information acquisition process (step S1106). In the operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300 are input, whereby history information of detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the central pressing operation unit 303a). And operation history information of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b). The presence / absence of operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b can be acquired from the history information.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes a motor and solenoid drive process (step S1108). In the motor and solenoid drive processing, the game board decoration drive board, the frame decoration drive board, and the effect drive according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and solenoid arranged in time series. An electric drive source such as a substrate motor or solenoid is driven.

  Finally, the peripheral control MPU executes a drawing state acquisition process (S1110). Further, a backup process is executed (step S1112), and this process ends. In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM externally attached are copied to the backup area for backup.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process, the effect is advanced by executing various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 in a period of about 1.04 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process, the effect is advanced by executing various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 in a period of about 33.3 ms. Further, as described above, the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process is controlled not to be executed 33 times or more by counting the timer interrupt execution count STN while the peripheral control unit steady process is executed once. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  The peripheral control MPU acquires information (such as special lottery results and current game progress) from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) while the processing is being performed. Control for various effects is performed based on the information. As the control related to these effects, in the effect display device 1600, an effect pattern corresponding to the variation time determined by the main control board 1310 appears, a special effect image appears during the big hit game, and the like. In addition to the effect display device 1600, any one of various decorative bodies arranged on the game board 5 (or a plurality of appropriate decorative bodies) can be moved, or any of these decorative bodies ( Alternatively, it is also included that a plurality of appropriate decorative bodies) emit light.

  In the case where the game area 5a includes a plurality of effect display devices 1600, the peripheral control MPU and the display control MPU according to this embodiment are a plurality of effect display devices as one of the controls related to various effects. In 1600, it is possible to perform control for causing a specific effect image across the display surface of each effect display device 1600 to appear, or to perform control for causing different effect images to appear on the two display surfaces. .

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU according to this embodiment executes the specific movable effect as one of the controls related to various effects, and various decorative bodies during the period during which the specific movable effect is performed. The upper front movable decorative body 3350, which is one of the above, can emit light.

  Further, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 may be provided integrally with the liquid crystal display device 3600.

[10. Operation determination process in various pressing operation units]
An example of the operation determination process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130. Hereinafter, an example of the pressing operation determination process at the time of pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a will be described. It may be applied to processing.

[10-1. Work area for storing detection flags]
FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the bit string in the work area of the peripheral control RAM that holds the detection history of the press detection sensor 381. The work area 1261 is a 32-bit work area secured in the peripheral control RAM, and holds a detection history by the press detection sensor 381.

  The peripheral control MPU, for example, secures a work area 1261 in the peripheral control RAM in the first step S1106 in the first peripheral control unit steady process or before the first step S1106. Note that the initial value of the bit string in the work area 1261 is, for example, a state in which all bits of the bit string are 0. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, simply “cycle” indicates a cycle (about 1.04 ms in the present embodiment) in which timer interrupt processing is performed. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the “frame period” refers to an input interval of the V blank signal, that is, a period in which an image of one frame is updated (in this embodiment, about 33.3 ms). To do.

  In step S1106, the peripheral control MPU acquires detection information from the pressure detection sensor 381, and generates a detection flag indicating whether or not pressure is detected. That is, the peripheral control MPU acquires detection information from the press detection sensor 381 every cycle, and generates a press detection flag. When the detection flag is ON, it indicates that a press is detected, and when the detection flag is OFF, it indicates that no press is detected.

  Further, in step S1106, for example, the peripheral control MPU shifts the bit string of the work area 1261 to the right by 1 bit, and stores the detection flag generated at the first bit from the left. That is, the work area 1261 holds the detection history of the press detection sensor 381 in each of the latest 32 cycles (about 33.3 ms). Therefore, the work area 1261 holds all the detection histories of the pressure detection sensor 381 in the latest frame at the time of frame update.

  In addition, detection histories in each bit of the work area 1261 are arranged from the left in order from the newest. Note that the work area 1261 may be configured such that detection histories in each bit are arranged from the right in order from the newest.

  An example of the transition of the bit string in the work area 1261 in FIG. 126 will be described. First, the work area 1261 holds an initial value. Since the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 in the first cycle of F1 (first frame), 1 is stored in the first bit from the left in the bit string of the work area 1261 in the first cycle of F1, and the other bits 0 is stored.

  Subsequently, the pressure was detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 in the second period of F1 and the third period of F1, and then the pressure was not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 in F1. Therefore, 1 is stored in the first bit from the right, the second bit from the right, and the third bit from the right in the bit string of the work area 1261 at the end of F1 (during frame update), and 0 is stored in the other bits. Has been. The work area 1261 at the end of F1 shows the detection history in the entire F1.

  Subsequently, since the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 in the first cycle of F2 (the frame next to F1), the first bit from the left and the first bit from the right in the bit string of the work area 1261 in the first cycle of F2. 1 is stored in the second bit from the right and the right, and 0 is stored in the other bits. In the bit string of the work area 1261 in the first cycle of F2, the first bit from the left indicates the detection history in F2, and the other bits indicate the detection history in F1.

  Subsequently, because the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 in the second cycle of F2, in the bit string of the work area 1261 in the second cycle of F2, the first bit from the left, the second bit from the left, and the first bit from the right 1 is stored in the eye, and 0 is stored in the other bits. In the bit string of the work area 1261 in the second period of F2, the first bit from the left and the second bit from the right indicate the detection history in F2, and the other bits indicate the detection history in F1.

  Although details will be described later, the peripheral control MPU refers to the work area 1261 after the end of the most recent frame and before obtaining the detection history of the first frame of the next frame (for example, step S1012 of the next frame). Then, the operation determination for determining whether or not the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the latest frame is executed.

  In this embodiment, the length of the bit string in the work area 1261 is the minimum length that can store the entire detection history of the pressure detection sensor 381 in one frame, that is, the total number of cycles in one frame ((frame cycle) / (cycle). ), Which is the same 32 bits. Since the bit string of the work area 1261 is 32 bits, the peripheral control MPU can use the detection history in the latest frame without omission in the operation determination. The length of the bit string in the work area 1261 may be 33 bits or more, but from the viewpoint of saving the memory capacity of the peripheral control RAM, the length of the bit string in the work area 1261 is preferably 32 bits. .

  When the bit string of the work area 1261 is 32 bits, the work area 1261 after the end of the most recent frame and before acquiring the detection history of the next frame of the next frame is only the detection history by the pressure detection sensor 381 of the entire most recent frame. Hold. At this time, the peripheral control MPU refers to all the bit strings in the work area, and executes the pressure determination in the latest frame.

  On the other hand, when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 33 bits or more, the peripheral control MPU refers to, for example, only the 32 bits from the left of the work area 1261 (that is, the detection history of the latest frame), and determines the operation in the latest frame. Execute. Even if the bit string of the work area 1261 is 33 bits or more, the peripheral control MPU refers to all bits of the bit string of the work area 1261 if the work area 1261 is returned to the initial value after execution of the operation determination. The pressure determination in the latest frame can be executed.

  Therefore, also from the viewpoint of reducing the processing amount, the length of the bit string in the work area 1261 is desirably 32 bits, that is, a length capable of storing the entire detection history of the pressure detection sensor 381 in one frame.

[10-2. Pressing operation determination process using one pressing detection sensor]
FIG. 127A is a timing chart illustrating an example of a pressing operation determination process in F1 to F3 (F3 is a frame subsequent to F2). FIG. 127A is an example in which the press detection sensor 381 detects a press that continues for three cycles or more in F1.

  In step S1012 in each frame, the peripheral control MPU performs an operation determination for determining whether or not the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 continuously for three or more periods in the latest frame. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU searches the bit string in the work area 1261 and determines whether or not the bit string “111” is included. In addition, the condition of 3 cycles or more of the determination may be a condition of n cycles or more (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than the total number of cycles of one frame (32 in this embodiment)). The bit string “111” is an example of a specific detection pattern.

  Note that the smaller n is, the more erroneous determination results that determine that erroneous detection due to chattering, noise, or the like is due to an operation by the player, while the operation by the player is performed even if there is detection by the press detection sensor. Incorrect determination results that are determined not to be reduced. Similarly, as n increases, the erroneous determination result for determining that erroneous detection due to chattering, noise, or the like is due to an operation by the player decreases, while the operation by the player is performed even if detection by the pressure detection sensor is detected. An erroneous determination result that determines that it is not correct increases. However, since it is very unlikely that erroneous detection due to noise or chattering will occur continuously for three cycles (about 3.12 ms) or more, n is preferably 3 or more. Furthermore, in this embodiment, n is set to 3 in order to reduce an erroneous determination result that determines that an operation by the player is not performed even if detection by the pressure detection sensor is performed under the condition that n is 3 or more. .

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string “111” is included, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON. If the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string “111” is not included, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF. When the operation determination flag is ON, it indicates that the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in a state where the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position in the latest frame. When the operation determination flag is OFF, it indicates that the pressing operation unit is not in the lowered position or the central pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed even when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position in the latest frame.

  When the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON and the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the operation valid state, a predetermined button is used in steps S1028 to S1032 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the frame. An effect may be executed. The button effect includes, for example, display of a predetermined image on the effect display device 1600, output of a predetermined sound from various speakers, light emission of a predetermined pattern from various LEDs, and operation (vibration, etc.) of each operation unit. Including. Note that the states of the various operation units are set to the operation valid state, for example, in the first step S1012.

  When the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON, the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the operation valid state, and an operation instruction effect has occurred in the most recent frame, the peripheral control MPU In steps S1028 to S1032, etc. of the peripheral control unit steady process in the frame, preparation for executing the operation corresponding effect is performed instead of or in addition to the button effect. The peripheral control MPU executes the operation corresponding effect in steps S1014 to S1018 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the frame after completion of the preparation for executing the operation corresponding effect. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the preparation for executing the operation effect is completed in one frame, but the preparation for executing the operation corresponding effect and the operation corresponding effect may be executed across a plurality of frames.

  The operation instruction effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation unit 300. For example, a message such as “Press the center button!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The operation-corresponding effect is an effect that occurs when the player operates the effect operation unit 300 in accordance with the operation instruction effect, and indicates, for example, whether or not an advantageous gaming state has occurred and the expected expectation of the advantageous gaming state.

  In step S1012, the peripheral control MPU may set the operation determination flag to OFF when the current operation determination flag is ON before executing the operation determination. In this case, in step S1012, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON when it is determined that the bit string “111” is included, and sets the operation determination flag when it is determined that the bit string “111” is not included. Not going to change.

  In the example of FIG. 127A, in F1, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 continuously for three cycles or more. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. In addition, since the operation instruction effect is executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation corresponding effect execution preparation in F2.

  Subsequently, no pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 at F2. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F3. In the example of FIG. 127A, since the preparation for operation-related effect execution is completed in F2, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation-related effect from F3.

  Peripheral control MPU produces | generates the detection history by the press detection sensor 381 for every period, and does not miss a detection history irrespective of the operation timing of the production operation unit 300 by a player. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU performs operation determination using the detection history by the press detection sensor 381 generated every cycle, so that the operation determination flag is operated even though the player operates the effect operation unit 300. Can be prevented from being turned off, and as a result, a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed. Further, the peripheral control MPU is less than or equal to n cycles in one frame when the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 (n is 2 or more and less than the total number of cycles of one frame (32 in this embodiment)). By turning on the operation determination flag, errors in operation determination due to erroneous detection of the pressure detection sensor 381 such as noise and chattering can be suppressed, and consequently, a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed. it can.

  FIG. 127B is a timing chart illustrating another example of the pressing operation determination process. FIG. 127A is an example in which the pressure detection sensor 381 detects a continuous press for three cycles or more in F1.

  In the example of FIG. 127B, in F1, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 continuously for three cycles or more. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. The description of the effect state is the same as in FIG.

  At this time, the peripheral control unit MPU does not necessarily need to search all of the bit strings in the search for the bit strings in the work area 1261 in the operation determination in step S1012 of F2. The peripheral control MPU may set the operation determination flag to ON when one bit string “111” is detected and end the operation determination process. With this processing, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing related to operation determination.

  In the example of FIG. 127B, when the peripheral control MPU searches for the bit string in the work area 1261 in order of the newest time in the operation determination of F2 in step S1012, first, the bit string “1” indicating the detection history of the 20th period to the 17th period of F1. 111 "is detected. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU sets the determination flag to ON when the bit string is detected, and ends the operation determination process.

  FIG. 127C is a timing chart illustrating another example of the pressing operation determination process. FIG. 127C is an example in which the press detection sensor 381 detects a press that continues for two cycles in F1, and further detects a press that continues for three cycles across F1 and F2.

  In the example of FIG. 127C, in F1, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect pressing that continues for three cycles or more. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F2. Further, since the peripheral control unit MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F2, the effect state in F2 continues to be the operation instruction effect from F1.

  In the example of FIG. 127C, in F2, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 only in the first period and the second period. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F3.

  Note that, as in F1 and F2 in the example of FIG. 127C, when the pressure detection is not performed continuously for three cycles or more in each of the two frames, but the pressure detection is performed for three cycles or more across the two frames. The peripheral control MPU may set the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of the next frame (F3 in the example of FIG. 127C) of the two frames. Hereinafter, an example of the operation determination process for setting the operation determination flag to ON in such a case will be described.

  A specific example of the operation determination process when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 32 bits will be described. The peripheral control MPU stores the bit string “11” consisting of 2 bits in the peripheral control RAM when the 3 bits from the left of the bit string of the work area 1261 are “110” at the time of the operation determination, and the 2 bits from the left are In the case of “10”, a bit string “1” consisting of 1 bit is stored in the peripheral control RAM. Then, in the next operation determination, the peripheral control MPU may search a 33-bit or 34-bit bit string in which the stored bit string is added to the right side of the bit string in the work area 1261.

  A specific example of the operation determination process when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 33 bits will be described. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the second bit from the left of the bit string is “1” and the third bit from the left is “0” in the operation determination, the peripheral control MPU sets the bit string “1” consisting of 1 bit. Store in the peripheral control RAM. Then, in the next operation determination, the peripheral control MPU searches 34 bit strings obtained by adding the stored bit string to the right side of the bit string in the work area 1261. In addition, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the second bit from the left of the bit string of the work area 1261 is “0” at the time of the operation determination, in the next operation determination, the first bit from the left to the 33rd bit. What is necessary is just to search the bit string which consists of the above (that is, the bit string of the work area 1261).

  A specific example of the operation determination process when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 34 bits will be described. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the second bit from the left of the bit string is “1” and the third bit from the left is “0” in the operation determination, the peripheral control MPU is set to 1 from the left in the next operation determination. What is necessary is just to search the bit string (namely, bit string of the work area 1261) which consists of the 34th bit from the bit. In addition, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the second bit from the left of the bit string is “0” at the time of the operation determination, the bit string including the first bit to the 33rd bit from the left in the next operation determination You can search for.

  A specific example of the operation determination process when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 35 bits or more will be described. When the value of the 34th bit from the left is “1” and the value of the 35th bit from the left is “0”, the peripheral control MPU applies the bit sequence consisting of the 1st to 34th bits from the left. To determine the operation. Further, when the value of the 34th bit from the left is “0”, the peripheral control MPU performs an operation determination on the bit string including the 1st to 33rd bits from the left. With these processes, the peripheral control MPU can set the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F3 in the example of FIG. 127C.

[10-3. Press operation determination process using a plurality of press detection sensors]
In the above-described example, an example in which one press detection sensor and one press detection piece are attached to the presentation operation unit 300 has been described. However, a plurality of press detection sensors and a plurality of press detection pieces are attached to the presentation operation unit 300. It may be done. Hereinafter, an example of a pressing operation determination process using a plurality of pressing detection sensors will be described.

  FIG. 128 is a plan view of the effect operation unit 300 to which a plurality of press detection sensors and a plurality of press detection pieces are attached as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation unit button unit. The effect operation button unit 360 includes press detection sensors 381a to 381c that are attached to the lower part of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 and detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303.

  The central button main body 373 includes press detection pieces 373h to 373j that protrude downward from the bottom 373b of the central button main body 373. The press detection pieces 373h to 373j are detected by the press detection sensors 381a to 381c, respectively.

  The arrangement of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c in the plan view of the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the arrangement of the press detection pieces 373h to 373j in the plan view of the upper surface of the bottom part 373b of the central button body 373 are shown in the example of FIG. And may be different. The position that the player is likely to touch when pressing down the central pressing operation unit 303a differs depending on the installation position and inclination of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pachinko machine 1, the design of the central pressing operation unit 303a, and the like.

  For example, the more the installation position of the central pressing operation unit 303a is to the left of the center of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front, the center of the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed down. More likely to touch the right side. Similarly, the more the installation position of the central pressing operation unit 303a is to the right of the center of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front, the plan view of the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed down. There is a high possibility of touching the left side of the center.

  In addition, for example, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is installed at an inclination, that is, when the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a is not horizontal, the player presses the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a when pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a. There is a high possibility of touching a position where the height in the vertical direction is high. Further, for example, when a mark with characters such as “PUSH!” Is attached to the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a, the player can move the mark to the mark when the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed. High possibility of touching.

  For example, it is desirable that at least one press detection sensor is disposed immediately below in the pressing direction at a position where the player is likely to touch when pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a. Further, from the viewpoint of improving the pressure detection accuracy, for example, it is desirable that the arrangement of the pressure detection sensors in plan view is more dispersed as the area of the central pressing operation unit 303a is larger.

  In the example of FIG. 128, three press detection sensors and three pressure detection pieces are attached to the rendering operation unit 300, but two or more press detection sensors and press detection pieces may be attached. Good. From the viewpoint of improving the pressure detection accuracy, for example, it is desirable that a larger number of pressure detection sensors be attached as the area of the central pressing operation portion 303a is larger. By providing the production operation unit 300 with a plurality of press detection sensors, it is possible to reduce a press detection omission when the player presses the central press operation unit 303a, and thus suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. it can.

[10-3-1. Pressing operation determination process (OR determination) using a plurality of press detection sensors]
FIG. 129A is a timing chart illustrating an example of a pressing operation determination process using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. In the drawings after FIG. 129A, “sensor output A” indicates the output of the press detection sensor 381a, “sensor output B” indicates the output of the press detection sensor 381b, and “sensor output C” indicates the output of the press detection sensor 381c. Indicates.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU secures a work area 1261 corresponding to each of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c in the peripheral control RAM, for example, in the first step S1106 in the first peripheral control unit steady process or before the first step S1106. To do.

  For example, in step S1012 in each frame, the peripheral control MPU performs an operation determination that determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. The first condition is a condition indicating that the pressure is detected continuously for at least three cycles by at least one of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c in the latest frame. The “3 periods” in the first condition may be “n periods” (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than the total number of periods of one frame (32 in this embodiment)).

  In the determination of the first condition, for example, the peripheral control MPU searches the bit string of the corresponding work area 1261 for each of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c, and determines whether or not the bit string “111” is included.

  When the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string “111” is included in at least one work area 1261 of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c, the peripheral control MPU determines that the first condition is satisfied and sets the operation determination flag to ON. . If the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string “111” is not included in all the work areas 1261 of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c, the peripheral control MPU determines that the first condition is not satisfied, and sets the operation determination flag to OFF.

  In the example of FIG. 129A, in F1, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381a continuously for three cycles or more. Accordingly, since the first condition is satisfied in F1, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. In addition, since the operation instruction effect is executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation corresponding effect execution preparation in F2.

  Note that the priority order may be determined in advance for the press detection sensors 381a to 381c. At this time, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied in order from the press detection sensor having the highest priority order. judge. If the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string “111” is included in the work area 1261 corresponding to a certain pressure detection sensor, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON at that time, and prioritizes the pressure detection sensor. It is not necessary to perform the operation determination for the low pressure detection sensor.

  By the operation determination process using the priority order, the processing amount related to the operation determination can be reduced. In addition, as described above, the position that the player is likely to touch when pressing down the central pressing operation unit 303a is the installation position and inclination of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pachinko machine 1, and the position of the central pressing operation unit 303a. It depends on the design. By further setting the priority in the press detection sensor close to the position where the player is likely to touch when the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the effect of reducing the processing amount related to the operation determination is further increased. Can do.

  FIG. 129B is a timing chart illustrating an example of a pressing operation determination process using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. In the example of FIG. 129B, the press detection sensor 381a detects the press from the 4th cycle to the 5th cycle of F1, and the press detection sensor 381b detects the press from the 5th cycle to the 6th cycle of F1. The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the operation determination of step S1012 in each frame, and turns on the operation determination flag when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. If both are not satisfied, the operation determination flag may be set to OFF.

  The second condition is that the first pressure detection sensor, which is one of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c, detects the pressure in the a-2 period and a-1 period of the latest frame (a is 2 or more and 1 A-1 of the nearest frame by a second pressure detection sensor that is one of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c and is different from the first pressure detection sensor. This is a condition indicating that pressing is detected in the period and the period a. That is, the second condition is satisfied in F1 of the example of FIG. 129B.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the second condition is satisfied as follows. The peripheral control MPU searches the bit string of the corresponding work area 1261 for each of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c, and determines whether or not the bit string “110” is included. When the bit string “110” is not included in all work areas 1261, the peripheral control MPU determines that the second condition is not satisfied.

  The peripheral control MPU detects the bit string “110” from the work area 1261 corresponding to a certain pressure detection sensor, and the value of the bit at the same position as the detected bit string in at least one work area 1261 of another pressure detection sensor. Is determined to be “011”, it is determined that the second condition is satisfied. The peripheral control MPU determines that the second condition is not satisfied when the bit string “110” is not detected or when it is determined that the corresponding bit string “011” does not exist for all the detected bit strings “110”. .

  As described above, in the example of FIG. 129B, since the second condition is satisfied in F1, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. In addition, since the operation instruction effect is executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation corresponding effect execution preparation in F2.

  In addition, when “3 periods” in the first condition is “n periods”, the second condition is that the first press detection sensor continues for x periods and the second press detection sensor continues for y periods in the latest frame. (X and y are integers greater than or equal to 2 and less than n), a part of the x cycle and the y cycle overlap, and the x cycle from the earlier of the start of the x cycle and the start of the y cycle It is shown that the time until the later time of the end of the period and the end of the y period is n periods.

  Further, the second condition at this time is that, in the most recent frame, the first pressure detection sensor detects a continuous x cycle and the second pressure detection sensor detects a continuous y cycle (x and y are 1 or more and less than n). It is an integer, and at least one of x and y is 2 or more, and x + y = n), and the end of the x cycle and the end of the y cycle from the earlier time at the start of the x cycle and the start of the y cycle It may indicate that the time until the later time of the time is n cycles.

  Note that the peripheral control unit MPU does not necessarily need to search all of the bit strings in the search of each bit string of the work area 1261 in the operation determination in step S1012 of F2, even when the history of a plurality of press detection sensors is used. There is no. When the peripheral control MPU determines to set the operation determination flag to ON, the peripheral control MPU may stop the search and end the operation determination.

  FIG. 129C is a timing chart illustrating another example of the pressing operation determination process using the plurality of pressing detection sensors. In the example of FIG. 129C, the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381b detect pressure in the same two consecutive cycles of F1. However, since this does not satisfy both the first condition and the second condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F2. The effect state in F2 remains the operation instruction effect from F1.

  In F2, the pressure detection sensor 381a detects the pressure of one cycle, the pressure detection sensor 381b detects the pressure of the next one cycle, and the pressure detection sensor 381c is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381b. The pressing of one cycle following the pressing cycle is detected. However, since this also does not satisfy both the first condition and the second condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F3. The effect state in F3 continues to be the operation instruction effect from F2.

  In F3, the press detection sensor 381a detects a press of two cycles, and the press detection sensor 381b detects a press of the next one cycle of the two cycles. However, since this also does not satisfy both the first condition and the second condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F4 (the frame next to F3). The effect state at F4 remains the operation instruction effect from F3.

  The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the third condition is satisfied in the operation determination of step S1012 in each frame, and sets the operation determination flag to ON when the third condition is satisfied, and the third condition If the condition is not satisfied, the operation determination flag may be set to OFF. The third condition is a condition indicating that the pressure is detected by at least one of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c for three or more periods in the latest frame.

  In the example of FIG. 129C, the third condition is satisfied at F2 and F3. Note that “3 periods” in the third condition may be “n periods” (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than the total number of periods of one frame (32 in this embodiment)).

  For example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the third condition is satisfied as follows. The peripheral control MPU performs an OR operation on the bits at the same position in the bit string of the work area 1261 of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c, and generates a bit string in which the calculation results are arranged at corresponding positions. The peripheral control MPU determines that the third condition is satisfied when the bit string obtained from the operation result includes the bit string “111”, and determines that the third condition is satisfied when the bit string obtained from the operation result does not include the bit string “111”. It is determined that the condition is not satisfied.

  Peripheral control MPU can suppress the omission of detection of a press by performing the above-mentioned press operation judgment processing using a plurality of press detection sensors, and can suppress the fall of a player's interest. Further, in the order of the operation determination using only the first condition, the operation determination using the first condition and the second condition, and the operation determination using the third condition described above, the pressure detection sensor 381 for chattering, noise, and the like. The effect of suppressing an operation determination error due to erroneous detection is high. In addition, the player operates the effect operation unit 300 in the order of the operation determination using the third condition, the operation determination using the first condition and the second condition, and the operation determination using only the first condition. Nevertheless, the effect of suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the operation determination flag is turned off is high.

[10-3-2. Pressing operation determination process (AND determination) using a plurality of press detection sensors]
FIG. 130A is a timing chart illustrating another example of the pressing operation determination process using a plurality of press detection sensors. In the example of FIG. 130A, the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381b detect pressure in the same two consecutive cycles of F1. In the example of FIG. 130A, the operation determination is performed according to a fourth condition described later.

  The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the fourth condition is satisfied in the operation determination of step S1012 in each frame, and sets the operation determination flag to ON when the fourth condition is satisfied, and the fourth condition If the condition is not satisfied, the operation determination flag may be set to OFF. The fourth condition is that in the most recent frame, the pressure is detected in the same continuous three or more cycles by more than half of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c (that is, two or more in the present embodiment). This is a condition to show. In the example of FIG. 130A, the fourth condition is satisfied in F1.

  Note that “3 periods” in the fourth condition may be “n periods” (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than the total number of periods in one frame (32 in this embodiment)). Further, “half or more” in the fourth condition may be read as “a predetermined ratio or more”, “a predetermined number that is equal to or less than the number of press detection sensors installed in the rendering operation unit 300”, and the like.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the fourth condition is satisfied as follows. The peripheral control MPU searches the bit string of the corresponding work area 1261 for each of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c, and determines whether or not the bit string “111” is included. The peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string “111” is included in the work area 1261 corresponding to a certain pressure detection sensor, and in at least one work area 1261 of another pressure detection sensor, When it is determined that the value is “111”, it is determined that the fourth condition is satisfied.

  In the example of FIG. 130A, since the fourth condition is satisfied in F1, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. In addition, since the operation instruction effect is executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation corresponding effect execution preparation in F2.

  The peripheral control MPU performs operation determination using the fourth condition, so that the pressure detection sensor 381 such as noise and chattering is compared with the operation determination based on the first condition, the second condition, or the third condition described above. It is possible to further suppress an operation determination error due to erroneous detection. In addition, when the fourth condition is used, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON only when a plurality of press detection sensors detect presses simultaneously. For example, there is a foreign object in one press detection sensor. Even when the pressure detection sensor is always shielded from light, erroneous operation determination due to erroneous detection can be suppressed. Note that the operation determination using the first condition, the second condition, or the third condition described above is compared with the operation determination using the fourth condition, although the player operates the effect operation unit 300. The occurrence of a situation where the operation determination flag is turned off can be suppressed.

  FIG. 130B is a timing chart illustrating another example of the pressing operation determination process using a plurality of press detection sensors. In the example of FIG. 130B, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the fourth condition is satisfied in the operation determination of step S1012 in each frame, and sets the operation determination flag to ON when the fourth condition is satisfied. When the fourth condition is not satisfied, the operation determination flag is set to OFF.

  In the example of FIG. 130B, the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381b detect pressure in the same two consecutive cycles of F1. However, since this does not satisfy the fourth condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F2. The effect state in F2 remains the operation instruction effect from F1.

  In F2, the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381b detect pressure in the same two consecutive cycles, and the pressure detection sensor 381b and the pressure detection sensor 381c are one cycle immediately after the same two cycles. The pressure is detected. However, since this also does not satisfy the fourth condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F3. The effect state in F3 continues to be the operation instruction effect from F2.

  In F3, the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381b detect pressure in the same one cycle, the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381c detect pressure in the same first cycle, The press detection sensor 381b and the press detection sensor 381c detect the press in one cycle immediately after the immediately following one cycle. However, since this also does not satisfy the fourth condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F4. The effect state at F4 remains the operation instruction effect from F3.

  The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the fifth condition is satisfied in the operation determination of step S1012 in each frame, sets the operation determination flag to ON when the fifth condition is satisfied, and sets the fifth condition If the condition is not satisfied, the operation determination flag may be set to OFF. The fifth condition is a condition that indicates that the pressing has been detected by more than half of the pressing detection sensors 381a to 381c in the most recent frame for three or more cycles.

  In the example of FIG. 130B, the fifth condition is satisfied in F2 and F3. Note that “3 periods” in the fifth condition may be “n periods” (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than the total number of periods in one frame (32 in this embodiment)). “Half or more” in the fifth condition may be read as “predetermined ratio or more”, “predetermined number of press detection sensors installed in the rendering operation unit 300 and two or more”.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the fifth condition is satisfied as follows. For each bit at the same position in the bit string of the work area 1261 of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c, a sum is calculated. If the calculated sum is 2 or more, 1 is calculated, and if the calculated sum is 1 or less, 0 is calculated. A bit string arranged at a position corresponding to the same position is generated.

  The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the bit string “111” is included in the generated bit string. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the generated bit string includes the bit string “111”, the peripheral control MPU determines that the fifth condition is satisfied, and the peripheral control MPU determines that the generated bit string does not include the bit string “111”. In such a case, it is determined that the fifth condition is not satisfied.

  The determination using the fifth condition can suppress an error in the operation determination due to erroneous detection of the pressure detection sensor 381 such as noise and chattering, as compared with the determination using the fourth condition. In addition, in the determination using the fourth condition, the operation determination flag is turned off even though the player operates the effect operation unit 300 compared to the determination using the fifth condition. Can be suppressed.

[11. Special effects triggered by the lowering of the outer periphery pressing operation unit]
Examples of special effects triggered by the lowering determination of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. FIG. The special effects described below are not limited to the lowering determination of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b. For example, the upper determination of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, the pressing determination of the center pressing operation unit 303a, or the touch determination of the touch panel or the like. It may be an opportunity.

  FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram showing “lock a button effect” including an example of a special effect according to the present embodiment. “Lock the button effect” is an example of a reach effect in the normal gaming state. When the “lock the button effect” starts, the display control MPU causes the effect display device 1600 to display a reach state symbol in accordance with an instruction from the peripheral control MPU.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU drives the operation button elevating drive motor 367 so that the elevating cam member 371 rotates a predetermined amount in a counterclockwise or clockwise direction in a plan view, for example. The pressing operation unit 303b is moved to the raised position. The peripheral control MPU may drive the operation button lift drive motor 367 until the lift detection piece 373g is detected by the lift detection sensor 376a.

  Furthermore, the display control MPU displays characters such as “Lock the button!” On the effect display device 1600 in accordance with an instruction from the peripheral control MPU. Hereinafter, a state in which an effect that encourages the operation of the effect operation unit 300 is executed is referred to as a special effect operation instruction state. The player moves the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position by pressing the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b or the central pressing operation portion 303a in accordance with the instruction “lock the button !!”. At this time, the guide pin 364d moves downward along the second cam 371d.

  When the peripheral control MPU determines that the big win is announced in the “lock the button effect” and determines that the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is in the lowered position, the lifting cam member 371 is, for example, in plan view The guide pin 364d is locked to the locking portion 371c by driving the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 so as to rotate by a predetermined amount clockwise. That is, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is locked at the lowered position. The operation of locking the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b at the lowered position in the “lock the button effect” is an example of the special effect.

  The details of the method in which the peripheral control MPU determines that the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is in the lowered position will be described later. Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU displays, for example, a display effect on the effect display device 1600 for the display control MPU, for example, a symbol for winning the jackpot and a character notifying the winning of the jackpot such as “Hit! Congratulations!”. To execute.

  Although the details will be described later, in the special effect, the peripheral control MPU determines that the big win is announced in the “lock the button effect”, and the peripheral pressing operation unit 303b determines that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in the lowered position. This is performed in step S1108 in the control timer interrupt processing cycle. On the other hand, the execution instruction of the display effect for the display control MPU by the peripheral control MPU is performed, for example, in step S1016 in the peripheral control unit steady process after the next time. In place of or in addition to the display effect, output of predetermined sound from various speakers, light emission of a predetermined pattern from various LEDs, and operation (vibration, etc.) of an operation unit such as the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b are executed. May be.

  The peripheral control MPU does not drive the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 even when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is in the lowered position when the big hit non-winning is notified in “lock the button effect”. That is, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is raised to the raised position again. Further, for example, after the peripheral control MPU determines that the big hit non-winning is announced in “lock the button effect” and determines that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in the lowered position, the peripheral control MPU moves up by the rise detection sensor 376a. If it is determined that the detection piece 373g has been detected, the display control MPU produces an effect display of, for example, a symbol for losing, and a character for notifying a big hit such as “sorry ...” according to the instruction of the peripheral control MPU. Display on the device 1600.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU drives the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 so that the lifting cam member 371 rotates a predetermined amount in the counterclockwise direction in plan view after a predetermined time (for example, 200 ms) of the big hit non-winning notification has elapsed. By doing so, the guide pin 364d is locked to the locking portion 371c. That is, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 moves the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position and fixes it. The peripheral control MPU may drive the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 until the lowering detection piece 370c is detected by the lowering detection sensor 382.

  If the player ignores the instruction “lock the button !!” and does not press either the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b or the central pressing operation unit 303a, or the player presses the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b or If the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed but the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b does not move to the lowered position, the peripheral control MPU does not determine that the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is in the lowered position. At this time, the peripheral control MPU moves and fixes the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position after a predetermined time has elapsed. The method for moving and fixing the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position is as described above.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU is not limited to the special effect, and a predetermined time has elapsed since it was determined that the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is in the ascending position (that is, the ascending detection piece 373g was detected by the ascending detection sensor 376a). In this case, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b may be moved to the lowered position and fixed.

  In the above description, the operation of locking the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b at the lowered position when the big hit is won has been described as an example of the special effect. The special effect is, for example, display of a predetermined image on the effect display device 1600, various speakers, and the like. Output of a predetermined sound from the LED, light emission of a predetermined pattern from various LEDs, and operation (vibration or the like) of an operation unit such as the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b.

  Moreover, in the special effect operation instruction state at the time of winning the big hit, the example in which the special effect starts when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is determined to be in the lowered position has been described. This includes operation of the operation unit 303a or another operation unit such as a touch panel during the special effect operation instruction state.

  In addition, the special effects are not only effects that announce the winning or non-winning of the jackpot, but for example, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot, an effect that suggests the number of rounds of the jackpot when the jackpot is won, and Includes effects that suggest the presence or absence of certainty in the jackpot.

  Further, in the “lock the button effect”, the display effect is executed after executing the special effect, but there may be an effect in which only the special effect is executed.

  FIG. 132 is a timing chart showing an example of the descending position determination process of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b by the peripheral control MPU. In the example of FIG. 132, in F1, the lowering detection sensor 382 detects the lowering of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b for three or more periods continuously.

  The peripheral control MPU, for example, secures a work area in the peripheral control RAM for storing the detection history of the descent detection sensor 382 in the first step S1106 in the first peripheral control unit steady process or before the first step S1106. To do. Hereinafter, the work area is referred to as a special effect work area.

  The special effect work area is, for example, a work area that stores a bit string of 3 bits or more, and stores a detection flag by the descent detection sensor 382. The initial value of the bit string in the special effect work area is, for example, a state in which all bits are “0”. In addition, in the case where the peripheral control MPU secures a work area 1261 of 32 bits or more for storing the detection history by the lowering detection sensor 382 in FIG. 126, it is necessary to secure the work area for special effects separately from the work area 1261. The work area 1261 is also used as a work area for special effects.

  In step S1106 in each cycle, the peripheral control MPU updates the work area for special effects by executing processing similar to the update of the work area 1261 for the detection information by the descent detection sensor 382. Therefore, when the bit string of the work area for special effects is k bits, the work area for special effects holds the detection history by the descent detection sensor 382 in the latest k cycle.

  In addition, in step S1106 in each cycle, the peripheral control MPU performs a lifting cam member operation determination that determines whether or not the lowering detection sensor 382 has continuously detected a lowering in, for example, the latest three cycles. In the elevation cam member operation determination, specifically, the peripheral control MPU refers to the special effect work area and determines whether or not the bit string corresponding to the latest three cycles is “111”.

  When the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string corresponding to the latest three cycles is “111”, the peripheral control MPU determines that the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is in the lowered position. If the peripheral control MPU further determines that the current effect state is the special effect operation instruction state, in step S1108, the peripheral control MPU executes a special effect that locks the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b in the lowered position, that is, the lift cam member 371. However, the guide pin 364d is locked to the locking portion 371c by driving the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 so as to rotate by a predetermined amount clockwise in plan view, for example.

  That is, if the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1106 of a certain cycle that the current rendering state is the special rendering operation instruction state and the descending detection sensor 382 has continuously detected the descending in the three most recent cycles, Without waiting for the peripheral control unit steady process start (frame start), the elevating cam member 371 is operated in step S1108 of the certain cycle, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is locked at the lowered position. The peripheral control MPU desirably operates the elevating cam member 371 in step S1108 of the certain cycle. However, the peripheral control MPU is a cycle in the peripheral control unit steady process to which the certain cycle belongs, and is a cycle after the certain cycle. In step S1108, the lifting cam member 371 may be operated.

  This shortens the time from when the player moves the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position until the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is locked, so the player moves the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b to the lowering position. Then, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unnatural action in which the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b slightly rises, and consequently, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Further, after the player moves the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is raised before the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is locked, and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is not locked. The occurrence of the situation is suppressed.

  The “three periods” in the lifting cam member operation determination may be “m periods” (m is an arbitrary integer). The smaller m is, the more the error of lowering position determination due to erroneous detection of the lowering detection sensor 382 such as noise and chattering increases, but the special effect does not occur even though the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is moved to the lowering position. Occurrence can be suppressed. Similarly, as m increases, errors in determining the lowering position due to erroneous detection of the lowering detection sensor 382, such as noise and chattering, are reduced. On the other hand, a special effect occurs even though the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is moved to the lowering position. The situation that does not increase.

  As described above, since it is very unlikely that erroneous detection due to noise or chattering will occur continuously for three cycles (about 3.12 ms) or more, m is preferably 3 or more. Furthermore, m is set to 3 in this embodiment in order to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a special effect does not occur even though the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b has moved to the lowered position. When “3 periods” in the lifting cam member operation determination is “m periods”, the bit string in the work area for special effects is m bits or more.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU executes display effect start determination before acquiring the detection history of the first cycle of each frame (for example, step S1012 of each frame). In the display effect start determination, for example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the lowering detection sensor 382 detects the lowering continuously for three or more periods in the latest frame by the same method as the pressing operation determination described above.

  When the peripheral control MPU determines that the descent is detected by the descent detection sensor 382 for three or more consecutive periods in the most recent frame, and determines that the state of the most recent frame includes the special effect operation instruction state, In steps S1028 to S1032 of the peripheral control unit steady process, preparation for executing the display effect is made.

  The peripheral control MPU may determine whether or not the special effect has been executed in the most recent frame in the display effect start determination. If it is determined that the special effect has been executed in the most recent frame, the peripheral control MPU In steps S1028 to S1032 of the control unit steady process, preparation for executing the display effect is made.

  The peripheral control MPU executes the display effect in steps S1014 to S1018 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the frame after completion of the preparation for executing the display effect. In the example of FIG. 132, the display effect execution preparation is completed in one frame, but the display effect execution preparation and the display effect may be executed across a plurality of frames.

[12. Command input effect using the central press operation unit]
An example of a command input effect using the center pressing operation unit 303a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 138c. Note that the command in the command input effect is not limited to the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a, and may include an operation of another operation unit, for example. The other operation unit includes, for example, an outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, a touch panel (not shown), and other buttons (not shown). The command input effect in the present embodiment is an effect that progresses when one or more operation units are operated according to a specific operation pattern. A specific order command, a simultaneous pressing command, a specific number of times command, and a combination thereof, which will be described later, are all examples of a specific operation pattern. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, each operation part shall consist of one or more operation parts. An operation part is a part in which an operation can be detected independently of other operation parts. For example, the center pressing operation unit 303a includes an upper part, a lower left part, and a lower right part, which are parts that can be independently detected by the pressing detection sensors 381a to 381c. When the central pressing operation unit 303a has only one pressing detection sensor 381, the central pressing operation unit 303a itself is an operation part, that is, the central pressing operation part 303a includes one operation part.
[12-1. Specific order command input effect]

  FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an input effect of a command (hereinafter, referred to as a specific order command) for pressing a plurality of operation parts of the central pressing operation unit 303a in a specific order. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, an example in which the command input effect is an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation level during reach in the normal gaming state will be described. For example, an effect suggesting reach development expectation level in the normal game state Other effects such as The command input effect in FIG. 133 is an effect of inputting commands for sequentially pressing the lower left part, the upper part, and the lower right part, which are the operation parts of the central pressing operation unit 303a. That is, in the command input effect of FIG. 133, it is determined whether or not the press detection sensor 381b, the press detection sensor 381a, and the press detection sensor 381c detect the press in order.

  When the command input effect starts, the display control MPU displays a reach state symbol on the effect display device 1600 according to an instruction from the peripheral control MPU, and further displays characters such as “press the lower left of the center button!”. The player is urged to press the lower left portion of the center pressing operation portion 303a. In this state, when the lower left part of the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the peripheral control MPU displays characters such as “Press the upper part of the center button!” On the effect display device 1600 for the display control MPU. By instructing the player, the player is prompted to press the upper portion of the central pressing operation portion 303a. In this state, when the lower left portion of the center pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed, the effect does not proceed.

  Subsequently, when the upper portion of the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in a state in which the pressing of the upper portion of the central pressing operation portion 303a is urged, the peripheral control MPU instructs the display control MPU “the lower right portion of the central button. By instructing the player to display characters such as “Press!” On the effect display device 1600, the player is prompted to press the lower right portion of the center pressing operation portion 303a. In addition, in this state, when a portion other than the upper portion of the center pressing operation portion 303a (that is, the lower left portion or the lower right portion) is pressed, the command input is repeated from the beginning. In other words, the state returns to a state in which pressing of the lower left portion of the center pressing operation portion 303a is promoted.

  Subsequently, when the lower right portion of the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in the state where the lower right portion pressing of the central pressing operation portion 303a is prompted, the peripheral control MPU produces an effect according to the big hit winning expectation degree in the variation Execute. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot is selected in the variation, the peripheral control MPU displays characters such as “Intense heat !!” on the effect display device 1600 with respect to the display control MPU. The command corresponding effect at the chance pattern is executed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU instructs, for example, the display control MPU to display characters such as “...” On the effect display device 1600 at a high rate when the big hit is not selected in the variation. Execute command-related effects during non-chance patterns.

  In addition, instead of or in addition to the above-described display effects in the command response effect, for example, output of predetermined sound from various speakers, light emission of predetermined patterns from various LEDs, and the press operation unit 303, etc. Operation effects (vibrations, etc.) of various movable parts such as various operation parts and the upper front movable decorative body 3350 may be executed. The same applies to other command input effects described later.

  In addition, in a state where pressing of the lower right portion of the central pressing operation portion 303a is prompted, when a portion other than the lower right portion (that is, the upper portion or the lower left portion) of the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the command input is repeated from the beginning. . In other words, the state returns to a state in which pressing of the lower left portion of the center pressing operation portion 303a is promoted.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the command input is not completed even after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the command input effect, the peripheral control MPU ends the command input effect. At this time, for example, the peripheral control MPU may end the command input effect after executing a command corresponding effect in the non-chance pattern. The same applies to other command input effects described later.

  In the example of FIG. 133, in the command input effect, the operation part to be pressed is shown to the player via the effect display device 1600, but the operation part to be pressed is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. Good. The same applies to other command input effects described later. Further, for example, operation units other than the central pressing operation unit 303a, such as the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, a touch panel (not illustrated), and other buttons (not illustrated) may be included in the operation target in the specific order command.

  FIG. 134A is an example of a timing chart in the specific order command input effect. Specifically, an example will be described in which a correct command is input in the command input effect of FIG. 133 (an effect of inputting a command for sequentially pressing the lower left portion, the upper portion, and the lower right portion of the central pressing operation unit 303a).

  For example, the peripheral control MPU secures a work area 1261 corresponding to each of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c in the peripheral control RAM, for example, at the first step S1106 in the initial peripheral control unit steady process or before the first step S1106. To do. Hereinafter, an example in which each work area 1261 is 32 bits will be described. That is, each work area 1261 holds only the detection history of the entire previous frame at the frame start time.

  For example, in step S1012, the peripheral control MPU refers to the work area 1261 corresponding to each of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c, and operates the upper, lower left, and lower right portions of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the immediately preceding frame. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the work area 1261 corresponding to the pressure detection sensor 381a includes the first bit string “1110”, the peripheral operation MPU sets the upper operation determination flag to ON and sets the first bit string When it is determined that the upper operation determination flag is not included, the upper operation determination flag is set to OFF. The first bit string is a bit string other than “1110” in which “0” is added to the right of one or more “1” bit strings such as “10”, “110”, and “11110”. It may be a bit string. The peripheral control MPU performs operation determination on the lower left portion and the lower right portion of the central pressing operation portion 303a using the same method as described above.

  When the command input effect is started, the effect state first becomes a lower left operation accepting state for accepting an operation at the lower left portion of the center pressing operation unit 303a. When the lower left operation determination flag is set to ON in the lower left operation reception state, the peripheral control MPU executes the upper operation reception state execution preparation in the frame in which the lower left operation determination flag is set to ON, and receives the upper operation reception. When the state execution preparation is completed, it shifts to the upper operation acceptance state. In the present embodiment, the upper operation acceptance state execution preparation is completed in one frame, but may be executed over a plurality of frames. The same applies to operation reception state execution preparation in other operation parts and other effect execution preparation described later. In the command input effect, when the operation part to be pressed is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, the operation accepting state of the next part may be shifted to without executing the operation accepting state execution preparation.

  In the example of FIG. 134A, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the pressure detection sensor 381b at the start of F2 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the lower left operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. Further, since F1 is in the lower left operation acceptance state, the peripheral control MPU executes the upper operation acceptance state execution preparation in F2, and shifts to the upper operation acceptance state in F3.

  Subsequently, when the upper operation determination flag is set to ON in the upper operation reception state, the peripheral control MPU executes the right lower operation reception state execution preparation in the frame in which the upper operation determination flag is set to ON. When the operation acceptance state execution preparation is completed, the operation shifts to the lower right operation acceptance state.

  In the example of FIG. 134A, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381a at the start of F51 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the upper operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F51. Further, since F50 is in the upper operation acceptance state, the peripheral control MPU executes preparation for executing the lower right operation acceptance state in F51, and shifts to the lower right operation acceptance state in F52.

  Subsequently, when the lower right operation determination flag is set to ON in the lower right operation acceptance state, the peripheral control MPU completes the input of the correct command, so in the frame in which the lower right operation determination flag is set to ON, The corresponding effect execution preparation is executed, and when the command corresponding effect execution preparation is completed, the command corresponding effect is executed. Even in the command input effect in the case where the operation part to be pressed is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control MPU does not execute the command corresponding effect execution preparation until the input of the correct command is completed, and the correct command When the input of is completed, preparation for execution of command corresponding effect is executed.

  In the example of FIG. 134A, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381c at the start of F101 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the lower right operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F101. In addition, since F100 is in the lower right operation acceptance state, the peripheral control MPU executes the command corresponding effect execution preparation in F101 and executes the command corresponding effect from F102.

  Note that when the command-related effect includes, for example, operation effects (vibrations, etc.) of various movable parts such as the pressing operation part 303 and the upper front movable decorative body 3350, the peripheral control MPU determines the last input of the command (FIG. 134A). In this example, the operation determination of each operation part of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the lower right operation reception state may be executed in step S1106 in each cycle instead of step S1012.

  Specifically, in the example of FIG. 134A, the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string corresponding to the four most recent cycles of the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensors 381a to 38c is the first bit string in step S1106 in the lower right operation reception state. It may be determined whether or not. If the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string corresponding to the latest four cycles of only the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381c is the first bit string, for example, in step S1108 without waiting for the start of the next frame, The operations of the various operation units included in the command corresponding effect are executed. As a result, at least a part of the command response effect can be started quickly, and the game entertainment is improved.

  When the peripheral control MPU executes the last input determination of the command not in step S1012 but in step S1106 in each cycle, the peripheral control MPU corresponds to the latest four cycles of the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381a or the press detection sensor 381b. When it is determined that the bit string to be processed is the first bit string, the lower right operation acceptance state is terminated, and the lower left operation part acceptance state execution preparation is made to allow the player to input a command again from the beginning.

  Hereinafter, the peripheral control MPU determines the upper operation determination flag, the lower left operation determination flag, and the lower right operation in step S1012 of the frame in which the immediately preceding frame is in the upper operation reception state, the lower left operation reception state, or the lower right operation reception state. Processing in the first situation in which two or more of the operation determination flags are set to ON will be described.

  In the first situation, the peripheral control MPU regards, for example, that the pressing of the operation part corresponding to the operation determination flag set to ON in the immediately preceding frame is invalid. Further, in the first situation, the peripheral control MPU may consider that, in accordance with a predetermined priority, only one operation part among the operation parts corresponding to the operation determination flag set to ON is pressed in the immediately preceding frame. . In addition, in the first situation, the peripheral control MPU may consider that an operation part that should not be pressed in the operation reception state is pressed by the immediately preceding frame. The peripheral control MPU executes any one of the processes described above in the first situation, so that the specific command is established, for example, when all the operation parts of the central pressing operation unit 303a are continuously pressed simultaneously. Can be avoided.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 134A, consider an example in which the upper operation determination flag and the lower left operation determination flag are set to ON, and the immediately preceding frame is in the upper operation acceptance state.

  At this time, for example, the peripheral control MPU assumes that neither the upper part nor the lower left part of the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, and the upper operation receiving state continues. Further, for example, when the priority order is predetermined in the order of upper part, lower left part, and lower right part, the peripheral control MPU may consider that only the upper part with higher priority is pressed, that is, the lower right operation acceptance state. You may move to preparation for execution. Further, the peripheral control MPU may consider that the lower left portion that should not be pressed in the upper operation reception state is pressed, that is, shift to the lower left operation reception state execution preparation to execute the command input from the beginning. Also good.

  FIG. 134B is an example of a timing chart in the specific order command input effect. Specifically, an example in which an incorrect command is input in the command input effect of FIG. 133 will be described.

  In the example of FIG. 134B, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the pressure detection sensor 381b at the start of F2 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the lower left operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. Further, since F1 is in the lower left operation acceptance state, the peripheral control MPU executes the upper operation acceptance state execution preparation in F2, and shifts to the upper operation acceptance state in F3.

  Subsequently, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381c in F50 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the lower right operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F51. Since the lower right portion is pressed in F50, which is the upper operation acceptance state, the peripheral control MPU executes preparation for executing the lower left operation acceptance state in F51 in order to cause the player to redo the command input from the beginning, and the effect state in F52 Return to the lower left operation acceptance state.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU determines that an operation part other than the certain operation part has been pressed in the operation reception state of a certain operation part, the effect state is set to the command state in order to restart the command input from the beginning. Return to the operation acceptance state of the operation site to be input first.

  The peripheral control MPU can suppress omission of detection and erroneous detection of each operation part of the central pressing operation unit 303a by executing the input determination of the specific order command by the method described above. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player does not execute a command response effect even though a correct command has been input, and a situation in which a command response effect is executed despite an incorrect command being input. it can.

  FIG. 134C is an example of a timing chart in the specific order command input effect. Specifically, another example when a correct command is input in the command input effect of FIG. 133 will be described. In particular, another example of the pressure determination process in the first situation described above will be described.

  In the example of FIG. 134C, since each of the work areas 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381a and the press detection sensor 381b at the start of F2 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU performs the upper operation determination flag and the flag in step S1012 of F2. Set the lower left operation determination flag to ON.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU specifies the order in which the upper and lower left portions of the central pressing operation unit 303a are pressed in F1 in step S1012 of F2. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU first sets the bits in order from the left adjacent bit to the left in the leftmost first bit string for each of the work areas 1261 corresponding to the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381b. Scanning is performed until “0” appears, and the appearance position of bit “0” is specified.

  When the bit “0” does not appear, that is, when all the bits on the left side of the leftmost first bit string are bits “1”, the peripheral control MPU sets “0” to the 0th bit from the left, for example. Considered to have appeared. The peripheral control MPU determines that the operation portion corresponding to the press detection sensor whose bit “0” appears on the left is pressed first. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the appearance position of the identified bit “0” in each of the work areas 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381a and the press detection sensor 381b is the same, for example, in the above-described first situation The determination similar to the press determination process may be performed, or the press detection sensor that has been pressed first may be determined according to a predetermined priority.

  In the example of FIG. 134C, in F1, the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in the order of the lower left portion and the upper portion. In this case, the peripheral control MPU determines that the lower left part and the upper part of the commands that press the lower left part, the upper part, and the lower right part in order are pressed, and executes the lower right operation acceptance state execution preparation in F2, and F3 In the lower right operation accepting state.

  Subsequently, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381c at the start of F51 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the lower right operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F51. Further, since F50 is in the lower right operation acceptance state, the peripheral control MPU executes the command corresponding effect execution preparation in F51 and executes the command corresponding effect from F52.

  FIG. 134C shows an example in which two operation parts are sequentially pressed in one frame. However, the peripheral control MPU is a case where three or more operation parts are sequentially pressed in one frame. The order may be specified and the production state to be transferred may be determined. For example, in F1, when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the order of lower left, upper, and lower right, the peripheral control MPU executes a command corresponding effect execution preparation in F2, and executes a command corresponding effect from F3. To do.

By using the determination method described in FIG. 134C, the peripheral control MPU can specify the pressing order of the operation parts even in the above-described first situation, and as a result, when the specific order command is correctly input. The occurrence of a situation in which the command corresponding effect is not executed can be suppressed.
[12-2. Simultaneous press command input effect]

  FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an input effect of a command (hereinafter, referred to as a simultaneous pressing command) in which a plurality of operation parts of the central pressing operation unit 303a are pressed simultaneously. The command input effect of FIG. 135 is an effect of inputting a command for simultaneously pressing the lower left part and the lower right part of the center pressing operation unit 303a. That is, in the command input effect of FIG. 135, it is determined whether or not the pressure detection sensor 381b and the pressure detection sensor 381c have detected pressure simultaneously.

  When the command input effect starts, the display control MPU displays a reach state symbol on the effect display device 1600 according to an instruction from the peripheral control MPU, and further displays characters such as “press the lower left and lower right of the center button!”. And prompting the player to press the lower left portion and the lower right portion of the center pressing operation portion 303a simultaneously.

  In this state, when the lower left portion and the lower right portion of the center pressing operation portion 303a are pressed, the peripheral control MPU executes an effect according to the big hit winning expectation degree in the variation. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot is selected in the variation, the peripheral control MPU displays characters such as “Intense heat !!” on the effect display device 1600 with respect to the display control MPU. The command corresponding effect at the chance pattern is executed.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU instructs the display control MPU to display characters such as “...” On the effect display device 1600 at a high rate when the big hit is not selected in the variation. Execute command-related effects during non-chance patterns. In this state, if the lower left portion and the lower right portion of the center pressing operation portion 303a are not pressed at the same time, the effect does not proceed. Note that, for example, operation units other than the central press operation unit 303a such as the outer peripheral press operation unit 303b, a touch panel (not shown), and other buttons (not shown) may be included in the operation target in the simultaneous press command.

  FIG. 136A is an example of a timing chart in the simultaneous press command input effect. Specifically, an example will be described in which a correct command is input in the command input effect of FIG. 135 (an effect of inputting a command for simultaneously pressing the lower left portion and the lower right portion of the center pressing operation unit 303a).

  For example, the peripheral control MPU secures a work area 1261 corresponding to each of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c in the peripheral control RAM, for example, at the first step S1106 in the initial peripheral control unit steady process or before the first step S1106. To do. Hereinafter, an example in which each work area 1261 is 32 bits will be described. That is, each work area 1261 holds only the detection history of the entire previous frame at the frame start time.

  For example, in step S1012, the peripheral control MPU refers to the work area 1261 corresponding to each of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c, and operates the upper, lower left, and lower right portions of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the immediately preceding frame. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381a includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the upper operation determination 3F flag to ON. The upper operation determination 3F flag, the lower left operation determination 3F flag, and the lower right operation determination 3F flag are flags for which ON is continued for three frames and then returns to OFF once it is set to ON.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the work area 1261 corresponding to the pressure detection sensor 381a does not include the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU does not change the state of the upper operation determination 3F flag. The peripheral control MPU performs operation determination on the lower left portion and the lower right portion of the central pressing operation portion 303a using the same method as described above.

  When the command input effect is started, the effect state first becomes a lower left / lower right simultaneous operation acceptance state for accepting simultaneous operations of the lower left portion and the lower right portion of the central pressing operation portion 303a. The peripheral control MPU determines that the lower left operation determination 3F flag and the lower right operation determination 3F flag are set to ON in the lower left / lower right simultaneous operation acceptance state, that is, one of the operation parts to be simultaneously pressed. If it is determined that the other has been pressed within 3 frames after the is pressed, the command corresponding effect execution preparation is executed in a frame in which both the lower left operation determination 3F flag and the lower right operation determination 3F flag are ON, When the preparation for executing the command corresponding effect is completed, the command corresponding effect is executed. Also, for example, in the lower left and lower right simultaneous operation acceptance state, even if the lower left operation determination 3F flag and the lower right operation determination 3F flag are turned on, other operation determination flags (for example, the upper operation determination 3F flag) If it is ON, the peripheral control MPU continues the lower left / lower right simultaneous operation acceptance state, assuming that the correct simultaneous pressing command has not been input.

  In the example of FIG. 136A, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the pressure detection sensor 381b at the start of F2 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the lower left operation determination 3F flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. . The ON state of the lower left operation determination 3F flag continues until the end of F4. Further, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381c at the start of F4 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the lower right operation determination 3F flag to ON in step S1012 of F4. The ON state of the lower right operation determination 3F flag continues until the end of F6.

  Accordingly, in F4, only the lower left operation determination 3F flag and the lower right operation determination 3F flag are turned on. In addition, since F3 is in the state of accepting the lower left / lower right simultaneous operation, the peripheral control MPU determines that the simultaneous press command input is successful, executes the command corresponding effect execution preparation in F4, and starts the command corresponding effect from F5. Execute.

  For example, when the work area 1261 corresponding to each of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c secured in the peripheral control RAM is 96 bits or more (that is, the work area 1261 holds the detection history of the three most recent frames). The peripheral control MPU does not use the upper operation determination 3F flag, the lower left operation determination 3F flag, and the lower right operation determination 3F flag, and uses only the detection history indicated by each work area 1261, and the operation parts to be simultaneously pressed. It may be determined whether or not the other is pressed within 3 frames after the one is pressed.

  In the above-described example, when the peripheral control MPU determines that one of the parts to be simultaneously pressed is pressed and determines that the other is pressed within three frames, it determines that both are pressed simultaneously. Although an example has been described, when it is determined that one has been pressed and the other has been pressed within x frames (x is a natural number), it may be determined that both have been pressed simultaneously. That is, the peripheral control unit replaces the upper operation determination 3F flag, the lower left operation determination 3F flag, and the lower right operation determination 3F flag with the ON state continuing for x frames, the upper operation determination xF flag, and the lower left operation determination xF. The simultaneous pressing determination described above may be executed using the flag and the lower right operation determination xF flag. When there are three or more operation parts to be simultaneously pressed, the peripheral control MPU, for example, presses all the remaining operation parts within x frames after one operation part to be simultaneously pressed is pressed. If it is determined that all the operation parts have been pressed at the same time.

  FIG. 136B is an example of a timing chart in the simultaneous press command input effect. Specifically, an example in which an incorrect command is input in the command input effect of FIG. 135 (an effect of inputting a command that simultaneously presses the lower left portion and the lower right portion of the center pressing operation unit 303a) will be described.

  In the example of FIG. 136B, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the pressure detection sensor 381b at the start of F2 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the lower left operation determination 3F flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. . The ON state of the lower left operation determination 3F flag continues until the end of F4. In addition, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381c at the start of F6 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the lower right operation determination 3F flag to ON in step S1012 of F6. The ON state of the lower right operation determination 3F flag continues until the end of F8.

  Therefore, in the example of FIG. 136B, there is no frame in which both the lower left operation determination 3F flag and the lower right operation determination 3F flag are in the ON state, so the rendering state remains in the lower left / lower right simultaneous operation reception state. is there.

The peripheral control MPU can suppress the detection omission of detection of each operation part of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the erroneous detection by executing the input determination of the simultaneous pressing command by the method described above. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player does not execute a command response effect even though a correct command has been input, and a situation in which a command response effect is executed despite an incorrect command being input. it can.
[12-3. Command input effect for specific times]

  FIG. 137 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an input effect of a command for pressing one operation part of the central pressing operation unit 303a a specific number of times (hereinafter, a specific number of times command). The command input effect of FIG. 133 is an effect of inputting a command that presses the upper part of the central pressing operation unit 303a exactly twice within a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds after the start of the command input effect). That is, in the command input effect of FIG. 133, it is determined whether or not the press detection sensor 381a has detected a press exactly twice within the predetermined period.

  When the command input effect is started, the display control MPU displays the reach state symbol on the effect display device 1600 according to the instruction of the peripheral control MPU, and further displays characters such as “press the upper part of the center button just twice!”. Then, the player is prompted to press the upper portion of the central pressing operation portion 303a exactly twice. In this state, when the upper portion of the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed exactly twice within the predetermined period, the peripheral control MPU executes an effect corresponding to the big hit winning expectation degree in the variation as an effect corresponding to command input success. To do. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot is selected in the variation, the peripheral control MPU displays characters such as “Intense heat !!” on the effect display device 1600 with respect to the display control MPU. The command corresponding effect at the chance pattern is executed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU instructs, for example, the display control MPU to display characters such as “...” On the effect display device 1600 at a high rate when the big hit is not selected in the variation. Execute command-related effects during non-chance patterns. In addition, when a command different from the command in which the upper part of the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed twice is input within the predetermined period, the peripheral control MPU performs, for example, the command corresponding effect at the time of the non-chance pattern described above. This is executed as a command input failure handling effect. Note that, for example, operation units other than the central pressing operation unit 303a, such as the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, a touch panel (not shown), and other buttons (not shown), may be included in the operation target in the specific number of times command.

  FIG. 138A is an example of a timing chart in the command input effect for a specific number of times. Specifically, an example will be described in which a correct command is input in the command input effect of FIG. 137 (an effect of inputting a command for pressing the upper part of the central pressing operation unit 303a exactly twice).

  For example, the peripheral control MPU secures a work area 1261 corresponding to each of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c in the peripheral control RAM, for example, at the first step S1106 in the initial peripheral control unit steady process or before the first step S1106. To do. Hereinafter, an example in which each work area 1261 is 32 bits will be described. In other words, each work area 1261 holds only the detection history of the entire previous frame at the start of the frame.

  For example, in step S1012, the peripheral control MPU refers to the work area 1261 corresponding to each of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c and determines whether the upper, lower left, and lower right portions of the central pressing operation unit 303a have been operated. judge. Specifically, for example, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381a includes the first bit string, the peripheral operation MPU sets the upper operation determination flag to ON and sets the value of the upper operation count counter. Is incremented. If the peripheral control MPU determines that the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381a does not include the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the upper operation determination flag to OFF.

  The peripheral control MPU executes the same processing for the lower left portion and the lower right portion of the center pressing operation portion 303a. The values of the upper operation counter, the lower left operation counter, and the lower right operation counter are set to “0” at the start of the command input effect, for example.

  When the command input effect is started, the effect state is first an upper continuous operation acceptance state in which operations at the upper part of the central pressing operation unit 303a are continuously accepted. The upper continuous operation acceptance state continues for a predetermined period (200 frames in the example of FIG. 138A). The peripheral control MPU checks the values of the upper operation number counter, the lower left operation number counter, and the lower right operation number counter in step S1012 of the frame immediately after the upper continuous operation acceptance state ends.

  The peripheral control MPU inputs a command when determining that the value of the upper operation counter is “2”, the value of the lower left operation counter is “0”, and the value of the lower right operation counter is “0”. When the preparation for execution of the success corresponding to the production is executed and the preparation for execution of the production corresponding to the success of command input is completed, the production corresponding to the success of command input is executed.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the values of the upper operation count counter, the lower left operation count counter, and the lower right operation count counter are not in the above-described pattern, the peripheral control MPU executes the command input failure handling effect execution preparation, When the failure handling effect execution preparation is completed, the command input failure handling effect is executed.

  The peripheral control MPU checks the value of each counter at a predetermined timing even if the upper continuous operation acceptance state has not ended, and according to the check result, the command input success corresponding effect execution preparation or the command input failure corresponding effect You may move to preparation for execution. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU has a predetermined period (for example, 100 frames) since the value of any of the upper operation counter, the lower left operation counter, and the lower right operation counter is last incremented. The elapsed time is an example of the predetermined timing. Thereby, peripheral control MPU can advance production, without waiting for completion | finish of an upper continuous operation reception state, and amusement entertainment is improved. In particular, it is possible to remove the player's anxiety about the fact that the presentation does not proceed despite the correct specific number of commands being input.

  In the example of FIG. 138A, first, at the start of F0, the values of the upper operation count counter, the lower left operation count counter, and the lower right operation count counter are set to “0”. Subsequently, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381a at the start of F2 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the upper operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2, and further performs the upper operation count. The counter value is incremented to “1”.

  Subsequently, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381a at the start of F51 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the upper operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F51, and further performs the upper operation count. The counter value is incremented to “2”.

  Then, the upper continuous operation acceptance state ends at F200. At the start of F201, the value of the upper operation counter is “2”, the value of the lower left operation counter is “0”, and the value of the lower right operation counter is “0”. The command input success corresponding effect execution preparation is executed, and the command input success corresponding effect is executed from F202.

  FIG. 138B is an example of a timing chart in the specific number of times command input effect. Specifically, an example will be described in which an incorrect command is input in the command input effect of FIG. 137 (an effect of inputting a command that presses the upper part of the central pressing operation unit 303a exactly twice).

  In the example of FIG. 138B, first, at the start of F0, the values of the upper operation count counter, the lower left operation count counter, and the lower right operation count counter are set to “0”. Subsequently, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381a at the start of F2 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the upper operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2, and further performs the upper operation count. The counter value is incremented to “1”.

  Subsequently, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381a at the start of F3 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the upper operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F3, and further performs the upper operation count. The counter value is incremented to “2”.

  Subsequently, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381a at the start of F51 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the upper operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F51, and further performs the upper operation count. The counter value is incremented to “3”.

  Then, the upper continuous operation acceptance state ends at F200. At the start of F201, the value of the upper operation counter is “3”, the value of the lower left operation counter is “0”, and the value of the lower right operation counter is “0”. The command input failure corresponding effect execution preparation is executed at, and the command input failure corresponding effect is executed from F202.

  FIG. 138C is an example of a timing chart in the command input effect for the specific number of times. Specifically, another example will be described in the case where an incorrect command is input in the command input effect of FIG. 137 (an effect of inputting a command that presses the upper part of the central pressing operation unit 303a exactly twice).

  In the example of FIG. 138C, first, at the start of F0, the values of the upper operation count counter, the lower left operation count counter, and the lower right operation count counter are set to “0”. Subsequently, since the work area 1261 corresponding to the press detection sensor 381a at the start of F2 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU sets the upper operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2, and further performs the upper operation count. The counter value is incremented to “1”.

  Subsequently, since the work area 1261 corresponding to each of the pressure detection sensor 381a and the pressure detection sensor 381b at the start of F51 includes the first bit string, the peripheral control MPU performs the upper operation determination flag and the lower left operation in step S1012 of F51. The determination flag is set to ON, and the value of the upper operation number counter is incremented to “2”, and the value of the lower left operation number counter is incremented to “1”.

  Then, the upper continuous operation acceptance state ends at F200. At the start of F201, since the value of the upper operation counter is “2”, the value of the lower left operation counter is “1”, and the value of the lower right operation counter is “0”, the peripheral control MPU The command input failure corresponding effect execution preparation is executed at, and the command input failure corresponding effect is executed from F202.

  The peripheral control MPU can suppress omission of detection and erroneous detection of each operation part of the central pressing operation unit 303a by executing the input determination of the specific number of commands by the method described above. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player does not execute a command response effect even though a correct command has been input, and a situation in which a command response effect is executed despite an incorrect command being input. it can.

  The specific number command described above is a command for pressing the same operation part a specific number of times. For example, a command for pressing a plurality of operation parts a specific number of times regardless of the pressing order, or a plurality of operations by specifying an order. A command for pressing a part a specific number of times may be used. For example, when the work area 1261 corresponding to each of the pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c secured in the peripheral control RAM has a length that can hold all the detection histories in the continuous operation reception state, the peripheral control is performed. The MPU does not use the upper operation count counter, the lower left operation count counter, and the lower right operation count counter, and uses only the detection history indicated by each work area 1261 after the continuous operation acceptance state ends, so that the specific count command is correct. You may determine whether it was input.

  Further, in this embodiment, the example of command input effects in which any one of the specific order command, the simultaneous pressing command, and the specific number of times command is an input target command has been described. However, the specific order command, the simultaneous pressing command, and the specific number of times command are described. There may be a command input effect in which a command in which at least two types are combined is a command to be input. Specifically, for example, a command for pressing the upper part of the central pressing operation unit 303a, pressing the upper part and the lower right part at the same time, and then pressing the lower left part just three times may be the input target.

  For example, a plurality of correct commands may exist in one command input effect. Specifically, for example, there is an input effect in which different command-corresponding effects are associated with each of the plurality of correct commands.

  For example, the correct command in the command input effect is a command for sequentially pressing “upper”, “lower right”, “lower left”, “upper”, “lower left”, “lower right” of the central pressing operation unit 303a. Consider an example consisting of commands that sequentially press. First, the production state is “upper operation acceptance state”. In the “upper operation reception state”, when the upper part of the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the process proceeds to the “lower right or lower left operation reception state” in which the lower left or lower right operation is received. In the “lower right or lower left operation acceptance state”, when the lower right portion of the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the process proceeds to the “lower left operation acceptance state”, and when the lower left portion is pressed, “lower right operation acceptance” Transition to "state".

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU shifts to an operation reception state in which all operations of the operation part to be pressed next to each of the correct commands including the command being input are performed. It is possible to execute command input determination when there is a correct command.

  When the plurality of commands include the first command, it is preferable that the plurality of commands do not include a command including the first command. Specifically, for example, the plurality of commands include a first command for sequentially pressing “upper” and “lower right” of the central pressing operation unit 303a, “upper”, “lower right”, and “lower right”. It is desirable not to include the second command for sequentially pressing The peripheral control MPU is in a state where the input of the first command is completed or in the middle of the input of the second command when “upper” and “lower right” of the central pressing operation unit 303a are sequentially pressed. This is because it cannot be determined.

[13. Operation determination processing in various pressing operation units using a plurality of determination methods]
Hereinafter, an operation determination process in various pressing operation units using a plurality of determination methods will be described. Hereinafter, an example in which the plurality of determination methods include the determination method described with reference to FIG. 129A will be described with reference to FIGS. 139A to 140B. Hereinafter, an example of the pressing operation determination process when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed when the central pressing operation unit 303a has one press detection sensor 381 will be described. The present invention may be applied to an operation determination process at the time of operation of another pressing operation unit or the like or a touch panel.

  FIG. 139A is a timing chart illustrating an example of pressing operation determination processing in F1 to F3. FIG. 139A is an example in which the pressure detection sensor 381 detects a continuous pressure for three cycles or more in F1. The operation instruction effect, the operation corresponding effect execution preparation, the operation corresponding effect, and the like in FIGS. 139A to 140B are the same as the contents described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1106, the peripheral control MPU generates a pressure detection flag by the above-described method and performs bit shift of the work area 1261. Then, in step S1106, whether or not the timer interrupt execution count STN is a predetermined count. Determine. Hereinafter, an example in which the predetermined number is 17 will be described, but the predetermined number may be a natural number of 1 or more and 32 or less.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the timer interrupt execution count STN is 17, the peripheral control MPU executes a detection determination process and proceeds to step S1107. If it determines that the timer interrupt execution count STN is not 17, the peripheral control MPU executes the detection determination process. Instead, the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In the detection determination process, the peripheral control MPU determines, for example, whether or not the pressure detection flag generated in step S1106 is ON. If the peripheral control MPU determines that the pressure detection flag is ON, the peripheral control MPU determines that the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, and sets the operation determination flag to ON. If the peripheral control MPU determines that the pressure detection flag is OFF, the peripheral control MPU determines that the central pressing operation unit 303a has not been pressed, and sets the operation determination flag to OFF. The process performed when the peripheral control MPU determines that the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the operation instruction effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 139B. In the detection determination process, the peripheral control MPU determines whether, for example, all of the pressure detection flags generated in step S1106 and step S1106 in the immediately preceding x cycle (x is a natural number of 1 or more) are ON. Also good.

  In addition, the detection determination process in step S1106 may be executed a plurality of times during one frame. That is, there may be a plurality of predetermined times when the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the timer interrupt execution number STN is a predetermined number.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the central pressing operation unit 303a in the immediately preceding frame has been operated in step S1012 in each frame, for example, using the operation determination method described with reference to FIG. 127A. The operation determination flag is set to ON or OFF according to the result.

  In the example of FIG. 139A, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect the press in the 17th period of F1. That is, since the pressure detection flag generated in step S1106 in the 17th cycle of F1 is OFF, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in the 17th cycle of F1.

  Further, in F1, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 continuously for three cycles or more. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. In addition, since the operation instruction effect is executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation corresponding effect execution preparation in F2.

  Subsequently, no pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 at F2. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F3. In the example of FIG. 139A, the preparation for operation-related effect execution is completed in F2, so the peripheral control MPU executes the operation-related effect from F3.

  FIG. 139B is a timing chart illustrating an example of the pressing operation determination process in F1 to F3. FIG. 139B is an example in which the press detection sensor 381 detects the press for two consecutive periods across the 17th period of F1. In FIG. 139B, the operation determination method described with reference to FIG. 139A is used.

  In the example of FIG. 139B, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press in the 17th period of F1. That is, since the pressure detection flag generated in step S1106 in the 17th cycle of F1 is ON, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in the 17th cycle of F1.

  In addition, an operation instruction effect is executed at the start of the 17th cycle of F1. As in the example of FIG. 139B, when the operation instruction effect is being executed and the operation determination flag is set to ON in step S1106 in the middle of the frame, in step S1106, the peripheral control MPU performs step in the current frame. It is determined whether S1028 has been executed.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that step S1028 has not been executed in the current frame, the peripheral control MPU determines that preparation for execution of the operation corresponding effect can be executed in the current frame, and the operation corresponding effect in steps S1028 to S1032, etc. of the frame. Execute preparation for execution. If the peripheral control MPU determines that step S1028 has been executed in the current frame, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation corresponding effect execution preparation from the next frame.

  For example, when step S1028 is executed after a predetermined period for all frames, it may be set in advance that the detection determination process is executed in step S1106 before the predetermined period. In such a case, if the operation instruction effect is being executed and the operation determination flag is set to ON in step S1106 in the middle of the frame, it is determined whether or not step S1028 has been executed in the current frame. Without preparation, the operation corresponding effect execution preparation is executed in steps S1028 to S1032 of the frame.

  FIG. 139B is an example in which it is determined that step S1028 has not been executed in F1 at the time of step S1106 in the 17th cycle of F1. Therefore, the preparation for execution of the operation corresponding effect is started in the middle of F1.

  The peripheral control MPU uses the detection determination process in the middle of the frame and the operation determination process at the start of the frame to execute the operation determination of the central pressing operation unit 303a, so that the press detection sensor 381 detects the press. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation determination flag is turned off, and thus to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In particular, the peripheral control MPU can execute the operation-corresponding effect quickly by executing the detection determination process in the middle of the frame, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  FIG. 140A is a timing chart illustrating an example of a pressing operation determination process in F1 to F3. FIG. 140A is an example in which the press detection sensor 381 detects a press that continues for three or more cycles after the 17th cycle of F1. First, the operation determination method in the example of FIGS. 140A and 140B will be described.

  In step S1012 in each frame, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the central pressing operation unit 303a in the immediately preceding frame has been operated by the first history determination process, and sets the operation determination flag to ON or OFF according to the determination result. set. For example, the operation determination method described with reference to FIG. 127A is an example of a first history determination process.

  In step S1106, the peripheral control MPU generates a press detection flag by the above-described method and performs bit shift of the work area 1261. Then, in step S1106, whether the timer interrupt execution count STN is a predetermined count. Determine whether or not. Hereinafter, an example in which the predetermined number is 17 will be described, but the predetermined number may be a natural number of 1 or more and 32 or less.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the timer interrupt execution count STN is 17, the peripheral history control MPU executes the second history determination process and proceeds to step S1107. If the peripheral control MPU determines that the timer interrupt execution count STN is not 17, the second history The process proceeds to step S1107 without executing the determination process.

  In the second history determination process, the peripheral control MPU refers to, for example, the work area 1261, and whether or not the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 for three or more consecutive periods from the start of the frame to the 17th period. Determine whether. The condition of 3 cycles or more in the second history determination process may be a condition of n cycles or more (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than 17).

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in the second history determination process that a press of three cycles or more has been detected, the peripheral control MPU determines that the central pressing operation unit 303a has been pressed, and sets the operation determination flag to ON. Further, when the peripheral control MPU determines in the second history determination process that a press of three cycles or more has not been detected, the peripheral control MPU determines that the central pressing operation unit 303a has not been pressed, and sets the operation determination flag to OFF. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the second history determination process during the operation instruction effect, the operation corresponding effect execution preparation is advanced in the same manner as described with reference to FIG. 139B. If it can be executed, the preparation for execution of the operation corresponding effect is advanced and executed.

  For example, when step S1028 is executed after a predetermined period for all frames, it may be set in advance that the second history determination process is executed in step S1106 before the predetermined period. In such a case, if the operation instruction effect is being executed and the operation determination flag is set to ON in step S1106 in the middle of the frame, it is determined whether or not step S1028 has been executed in the current frame. Without preparation, the operation corresponding effect execution preparation is executed in steps S1028 to S1032 of the frame.

  In the example of FIG. 140A, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect the press before the 17th period of F1. That is, in the second history determination process performed in step S1106 in the 17th cycle of F1, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF.

  Further, after the 17th cycle of F1, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 for three or more cycles continuously. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. In addition, since the operation instruction effect is executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation corresponding effect execution preparation in F2.

  FIG. 140B is a timing chart illustrating an example of pressing operation determination processing in F1 to F3. FIG. 140B is an example in which the press detection sensor 381 detects a press that continues for three cycles or more before the 17th cycle of F1. In FIG. 140B, the operation determination method based on the first history determination and the second history determination described above is used.

  In the example of FIG. 140B, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press before the 17th period of F1. Accordingly, in the second history determination process performed in step S1106 in the 17th cycle of F1, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON. FIG. 140B is an example in which it is determined at step S1106 in the 17th cycle of F1 that step S1028 has not been executed in F1. Therefore, the preparation for execution of the operation corresponding effect is started in the middle of F1.

  In the first history determination process, the peripheral control MPU does not refer to the entire history of the immediately preceding frame, but after the 17th cycle of the immediately preceding frame until the end of the immediately preceding frame (that is, the second history determining process). It may be determined whether or not the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 continuously for three cycles or more during a period outside the determination target. In the example of FIG. 140B, since the pressure is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 continuously for three cycles or more from the 17th cycle of F1 to the end of F1, the peripheral control MPU determines the operation determination flag in S1012 of F2. Set to OFF.

  The peripheral control MPU can execute the operation corresponding effect early by executing the second history determination process in the middle of the frame in addition to the first history determination process, thereby improving the interest of the player. Can do.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in the first history determination process and the second history determination process when the press detection sensor 381 detects a press continuously for n cycles or more during the determination target period. By doing so, errors in operation determination due to erroneous detection of the pressure detection sensor 381 such as noise and chattering can be suppressed, and as a result, a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

[14-1. Pseudo-continuous effect change processing]
Hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous effect changing process executed in step S405 or step S406 will be described. First, the pseudo continuous effect change process 1 executed in step S405 will be described. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1. In the example of FIG. 144, in the start opening winning process in step S116 for the first variation, the variation pattern of the first variation is determined to be a variation pattern without reach and the variation type of the first variation is determined to be “normal”. It is an example. Furthermore, in step S302, it is determined that the pseudo-gase effect is executed with the first variation.

  In addition, the suspension of the second variation, which is the variation following the first variation, has been won before the first variation is started. In the start opening winning process in step S116 for the second variation, the variation pattern of the second variation is determined to be a variation pattern in which SP reach is executed, and the variation type of the second variation is determined to be “addition 1”. Note that the SP reach is an example of a reach effect selected at a high rate in the variation in which the big hit is selected. Furthermore, in step S302, it is determined that two pseudo-continuous effects are executed with the second variation.

  In addition, as described above, the pseudo-continuous effect is an operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the variation of the decorative symbol, during one change of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator. It is an effect that is executed multiple times. “Ending the decoration symbol variation” includes, for example, a mode in which the player recognizes that the variation of the decoration symbol is once completed, such as a mode in which a part or all of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that a pseudo-continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called an N-number of pseudo-continuous effects. The following natural number) is called the Mth pseudo-continuous effect. However, the Nth-pseudo pseudo-continuous production may or may not include a reach production that may develop later.

  Further, in the L-th pseudo-continuous effect in the N-th pseudo-continuous effect (L is a natural number of 1 or more and N-1 or less), for example, the decorative design suggesting the continuation of the pseudo-continuous effect is stopped. In addition, in the L-th pseudo-continuous production, for example, a decorative design that suggests discontinuation of the pseudo-continuous production is stopped, and when the L-th pseudo-continuous production ends or when the L + 1-th pseudo-continuous production starts, it is actually simulated. A revival pattern effect that is an effect indicating that the continuous effect continues may be executed. Further, in the N-th pseudo-continuous production, for example, the decorative symbol is stopped in a state where the reach is out of reach or in a reach state.

  The peripheral control MPU determines the execution of the pseudo continuous effect in the second change in the notice determination process in the received command analysis process in step S1022 for the second change (step S302: Yes), and the pseudo continuous number of times in the second change. Is determined to be less than the predetermined number of times (hereinafter, the predetermined number of times is 3) (step S303: Yes), the pseudo-continuous effect addition process (step S304) is executed for the second variation.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU determines that the first change is a previous change in step S401 in the pseudo-continuous effect addition process (S401: Yes). Further, the peripheral control MPU determines that the first fluctuation, which is the previous fluctuation, is a fluctuation without reach (step S402: Yes), determines that the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed (S403: Yes), Since it is determined that the sum of the number of pseudo-continuations in one variation and the number of pseudo-continuations in the second variation is equal to or less than a predetermined number (step S404: Yes), pseudo-continuous effect change processing 1 (step S405) is executed.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1, the peripheral control MPU changes the pseudo-gasse effect in the first variation to the first pseudo-continuous effect, and the first and second pseudo-continuous effects in the second variation are respectively changed. Change to second and third pseudo-continuous production. That is, the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1 determines an effect of executing the continuation of the pseudo-continuous effect in the previous variation with the determination target variation of the notice determination process, that is, a series of pseudo-continuous effects spanning the previous variation and the determination target variation. It is processing. For example, when there is a previous variation in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not set among the plurality of previous variations, the peripheral control MPU performs the pseudo-continuous change in the pseudo-continuous effect change process 1 to the previous variation in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not set. By adding the production, the series of pseudo-continuous production is realized.

  The peripheral control MPU may change the contents of the SP reach in the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU changes the SP reach before the change to an SP reach that can be selected only when three or more pseudo-continuous effects occur. When changing the contents of the SP reach, the peripheral control MPU selects an SP reach that has the same length of time as the SP reach before the change as the SP reach after the change. Since the time length of the SP reach before and after the change must be the same in this way, for example, the time length of the SP reach that is performed after the pseudo-continuous effect with different continuous times may be set in advance. preferable.

  An example of a series of pseudo-continuous effects that span a plurality of variations will be described. In the variation example after execution of the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1 in FIG. 144, the first pseudo-continuous effect is performed with the first variation. That is, for example, the decorative design that suggests the continuation of the pseudo-continuous production is stopped by the first variation, and the first variation ends. Also, for example, the decorative pattern that suggests the discontinuation of the pseudo-continuous effect is stopped by the first variation, and the second sequence in the variation example after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1 in FIG. The revival pattern effect may be executed at the start of the pseudo-continuous effect) or at the end of the first variation. Thereafter, in the second variation, two quasi-continuous effects are executed, for example, as if the quasi-continuous effects have continued from the first variation.

  Hereinafter, the pseudo continuous effect change process 2 executed in step S406 will be described. FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2. In the example of FIG. 145, in the start opening winning process in step S116 for the first variation, the variation pattern of the first variation is determined to be a variation pattern with no reach, and the variation type of the first variation is determined to be “normal”. It is an example. Furthermore, in step S302, it is determined that neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gasse effect is executed in the first variation. In addition, the winning timing, the variation pattern, the variation type, and the number of pseudo-continuations for the second variation before the pseudo-continuous effect change process 2 is executed are the same as the example in FIG.

  The peripheral control MPU determines the execution of the pseudo continuous effect in the second change in the notice determination process in the received command analysis process in step S1022 for the second change (step S302: Yes), and the pseudo continuous number of times in the second change. Is determined to be less than the predetermined number of times (step S303: Yes), a pseudo-continuous effect addition process (step S304) is executed for the second variation.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU determines that the first change is a previous change in step S401 in the pseudo-continuous effect addition process (S401: Yes). Further, the peripheral control MPU determines that the first change, which is the previous change, is a change without reach (step S402: Yes), and determines that neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gase effect is executed (S403). : No), therefore, the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2 (step S406) is executed.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2, the peripheral control MPU adds the first continuous pseudo-series effect to the first variation, and the first and second pseudo-continuous representations in the second variation are changed to the second and Change to the 3rd quasi-continuous production. In other words, the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2 adds a pseudo-continuous effect to a part or all of the previous variation, and determines that the added pseudo-continuous effect is continued with the determination target variation of the notice determination process, that is, the previous variation. This is a process for determining a series of pseudo-continuous effects across the subject variation. Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU may change the contents of the SP reach as in the description in the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1. If there is a number of previous fluctuations equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times in step S303, the peripheral control MPU determines that the number of fluctuations smaller than the predetermined number of times from the previous fluctuations in the pseudo-continuous effect change processing 2 It is desirable to select in the order close to the target variation and add the pseudo-continuous effect only to the selected variation. Note that if the determination target variation in the notice determination process is a variation corresponding to a big hit, the peripheral control MPU may add a pseudo-continuous effect to all the previous variations.

  Peripheral control MPU can implement | achieve a series of pseudo | simulation continuous effects which straddle a some fluctuation | variation by performing a pseudo | simulation continuous effect change process. In addition, the pseudo-continuous effect generally has a lower expectation of big hit as the number of consecutive times is smaller. However, by executing the pseudo-continuous effect changing process, for example, the pseudo-continuous effect is generated with such a small number of continuous times in the first variation. Even if the process is ended, the pseudo-continuous effect may continue due to the second variation, so that the player's interest in the pseudo-continuous effect can be increased.

  Moreover, in the example of FIGS. 144 and 145, the first variation and the second variation when the three-fold pseudo-continuous effect straddling the first variation and the second variation realized by the pseudo-continuous effect changing process is executed. The first total variation time of the variation is the sum of the time for three pseudo-continuous productions and the time for SP reach. On the other hand, for example, in the first total variation time when the reach variation without reach is executed in the first variation and the triple continuous effect and the SP reach are executed in the second variation, the shift variation without reach is executed. (The same as the time for one quasi-continuous production in the examples of FIGS. 144 and 145), the time for three quasi-continuous productions, and the time of SP reach.

  Thus, since the first total variation time is shorter than the second total variation time by the time of one pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous effect realized by the pseudo-continuous effect changing process has a shorter total variation time. It is feasible. That is, the peripheral control MPU can realize a pseudo continuous effect with a large number of consecutive times (high expectation) in a short total variation time by executing the pseudo continuous effect change process.

  FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2. In addition, the variation pattern, variation type, number of pseudo-continuations, and the winning timing of the first variation and the second variation for the first variation and the second variation determined in the start opening winning process in step S116 are shown in FIG. This is the same as the example. In the example of FIG. 146, since the number of holds is greater than or equal to a predetermined value when the variation pattern selection determination process in step S542 for the first variation is performed, the variation information source table in which the variation type with a short variation time is defined. Using this, the variation time of the first variation is determined.

  In other words, in the example of FIG. 146, it is determined in the variation pattern selection determination process in step S542 based on the variation time of the first variation determined in the start opening winning time process in step S116 (that is, determined immediately before the start of the variation). ) The actual variation time of the first variation is shorter. In addition, it is assumed that the actual variation time of the first variation determined in the variation pattern selection determination process in step S542 is shorter than the time during which the pseudo-gase effect described with reference to FIGS. 144 and 145 is executed.

  The peripheral control MPU determines the execution of the pseudo continuous effect in the second change in the notice determination process in the received command analysis process in step S1022 for the second change (step S302: Yes), and the pseudo continuous number of times in the second change. Is determined to be less than the predetermined number of times (step S303: Yes), a pseudo-continuous effect addition process (step S304) is executed for the second variation.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU determines that the first change is a previous change in step S401 in the pseudo-continuous effect addition process (S401: Yes). Further, the peripheral control MPU determines that the first change, which is the previous change, is a change without reach (step S402: Yes), and determines that neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gase effect is executed (S403). : No), therefore, the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2 (step S406) is executed.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect change process 2, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the variation type of the first variation selected in the variation pattern selection determination process of step S542 is a predetermined variation type, for example. Note that the variation time for each of the predetermined variation types is shorter than the time for which the pseudo-gase effect is executed. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the variation type of the first variation selected in the variation pattern selection determination process in step S542 is not the predetermined variation type, for example, the pseudo continuous effect change process described with reference to FIG. Execute.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the variation type of the first variation selected in the variation pattern selection determination process in step S542 is the predetermined variation type, for example, in the first variation, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 The peripheral control MPU determines to replace the first and second pseudo-continuous effects in the second variation with the operations of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 (variation example 1 in FIG. 146). That is, the peripheral control MPU operates the upper front movable decorative body 3350 in the first variation in the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2, and uses the upper front movable decorative body 3350 in place of the pseudo continuous effect in the variation other than the first variation. An effect to be operated, that is, a series of virtual pseudo-continuous effects that straddle the previous variation and the determination target variation is determined.

  As a result, the peripheral control MPU uses the upper front movable decorative body 3350 to generate a virtual pseudo-continuous effect even when the variation time of the first variation is shortened due to, for example, a large number of suspensions at the start of the first variation. Can be realized. Further, the player can expect a virtual pseudo-continuous effect to be generated by the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350. In the example of FIG. 146, it is assumed that the operation time of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is shorter than the variation time corresponding to the variation type of the first variation selected in the variation pattern selection determination process in step S542.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU may not replace part or all of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variation other than the first variation with the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350. In the example in FIG. 146, the first and second pseudo-continuous effects in the second variation are not replaced by the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350, but are replaced by the second and third pseudo-continuous effects, respectively. (Variation 2 in FIG. 146) is also possible.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU replaces the pseudo-continuous effect of the determination target variation in the notice determination process with the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350, the peripheral control MPU may execute part or all of the operation during the SP reach. In the example of FIG. 146, the peripheral control MPU replaces the first and second quasi-continuous effects in the second variation with the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350, and further, the upper front movable decorative body during SP reach. It is determined that 3350 is operated (variation example 3 in FIG. 146). As a result, even if the number of consecutive times is low (the expectation degree of big hit is low), the virtual pseudo-continuous production may be further added during the SP reach even if the virtual pseudo-continuous production develops to SP reach. The player can also have a strong interest in reach production developed from a virtual pseudo-continuous production with a small number of consecutive times (low expectation of big hit).

  It should be noted that, in place of or in addition to the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 described above, various types are completed in a time shorter than the variation time corresponding to the variation type of the first variation selected in the variation pattern selection determination process in step S542. A predetermined sound output from a speaker, light emission of a predetermined pattern from various LEDs, operation of other movable parts, or the like may be executed. In addition to the pseudo-continuous effect change process 2, the virtual pseudo-continuous effect using the movable ornament shown in the example of FIG. 146 is not limited to the pseudo-continuous effect change process 1 including the pseudo-continuous effect change process 1. It may be executed instead of the determined pseudo-continuous performance.

  FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a virtual pseudo-continuous effect using the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350. FIG. 147 is an example in which the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2 shown in the variation example 1 of FIG. 146 is executed for the second variation. The variation pattern is a variation pattern that is out of reach and the variation type selection determination process for the first variation, which is a variation type is normal, a plurality of holds have been won. That is, the variation time of the first variation is set to a short time when the variation pattern selection determination process is executed.

  When the first variation is started, the operation of returning the upper front movable decorative body 3350 to the original position after being lowered is executed once until the first variation is completed. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the display control MPU operates the upper front movable decorative body 3350 once in total in the operation number display area of the effect display device 1600 in accordance with an instruction from the peripheral control MPU. Is displayed (for example, display of characters such as “× 1”).

  Subsequently, when the second variation starts, the above-described operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is executed once instead of the first sequence of the pseudo-continuous production scheduled at the time of winning the second variation, and the effect display device 1600 The display in the operation count display area is changed to a display (for example, display of characters such as “× 2”) indicating that the upper front movable decorative body 3350 has been operated a total of two times.

  Subsequently, the above operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is executed once instead of the second series of pseudo-continuous effects scheduled at the time of winning the second variation, and the display in the operation frequency display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Then, the display is changed to a display indicating that the upper front movable decorative body 3350 has been operated a total of three times (for example, display of characters such as “× 3”). Subsequently, the decorative design becomes a reach state and SP reach is started.

  The peripheral control MPU executes a virtual pseudo-continuous effect using the upper front movable decorative body 3350 by executing a display indicating the number of operations of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 in the operation frequency display area of the effect display device 1600. It can be suggested to the player that the player has a feeling of expectation in the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350.

  In the case where the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 and the pseudo-continuous effect are executed as in Variation Example 2 of FIG. 146, the number of operations indicated by the display of the operation number display area of the effect display device 1600 is It may be incremented when one series of pseudo-continuous effects is executed, or may be incremented only when the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is operated.

  FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing a quasi-continuous LED effect that is an example of a virtual quasi-continuous effect using lighting of the LEDs provided in the door frame 3. The third variation is a variation following the second variation, and is a big hit variation.

  First, the variation pattern is a variation pattern with no reach and the variation type is “normal”, and the variation pattern selection determination process for the first variation has been held until the third variation has been won. The variation type of the first variation selected in the variation pattern selection determination process is the predetermined variation type in the description of FIG. That is, the variation time of the first variation is set to a short time when the variation pattern selection determination process is executed. Further, the second variation is a variation that is out of reach.

  When the first variation starts, the LED provided on the door frame 3 lights white, the LED color changes to green by the end of the first variation, and remains green after the first variation ends. . Subsequently, the LED lighting color remains green at the start of the second fluctuation, the LED lighting color changes to red by the end of the second fluctuation, and turns red after the second fluctuation ends. ing. In addition, the display which shows the frequency | count that the lighting color of LED changed in the operation frequency display area demonstrated in FIG. 147 of the production | presentation display apparatus 1600 may be performed.

  Subsequently, the lighting color of the LED remains red when the third variation starts. In the third variation, two pseudo-continuous effects are executed. By the end of the first series of pseudo-continuous effects in the third variation, red, which is the lighting color of the LED, is absorbed by the decorative design displayed on the effect display device 1600. That is, the lighting of the LED is stopped, and the color of the decorative pattern is changed to red. Subsequently, in the second series of pseudo-continuous effects in the third variation, the decorative design proceeds in a red state, and finally a big hit is announced.

  Hereinafter, a process for realizing the pseudo continuous LED effect of FIG. 148 will be described. In the example of FIG. 148, the variation pattern of the first variation is determined to be the variation pattern of non-reach in the start opening winning process of step S116 for the first variation. Further, the variation type of the first variation is determined to be “normal”, and it is determined in step S302 that neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gase effect is performed in the first variation.

  Further, in the start opening winning process in step S116 for the second variation, the variation pattern of the second variation is determined to be a variation pattern that is out of reach. Further, the variation type of the second variation is determined as “normal”. In step S302, it is determined that neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gasse effect is performed in the second variation.

  Further, in the start opening winning process of step S116 for the third variation, the variation pattern of the third variation is determined to be the variation pattern at the time of the big hit. Further, the variation type of the third variation is determined as “addition 1”. In step S302, it is determined that two pseudo-continuous effects are performed in the third variation.

  The peripheral control MPU determines the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect with the third change in the notice determination process in the received command analysis process of step S1022 for the third change (step S302: Yes). A continuous effect addition process (step S304) is executed. Note that since the third variation is a big hit variation, the process of step S303 is not executed.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU determines that the first variation and the second variation are pre-variations in step S401 in the pseudo continuous effect adding process (S401: Yes). Further, the peripheral control MPU determines that the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation, which are the previous fluctuations, are reachless fluctuations (step S402: Yes), and is a fluctuation in which neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gase effect is executed. In order to make a determination (S403: No), the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2 (step S406) is executed.

  In the peripheral control MPU, for example, the third variation is determined as a special symbol prefetching effect target, and the variation type of the first variation selected in the variation pattern selection determination process in step S542 is the predetermined variation type in the description of FIG. When the pseudo continuous effect change process 2 is executed for the second variation, it is determined whether to perform the pseudo continuous LED effect according to a predetermined probability.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines to perform the pseudo continuous LED effect, the peripheral control MPU executes the following processing. For example, the peripheral control MPU determines that the LED is lit white in the first variation and that the lighting color of the LED is changed to green by the end of the variation of the first variation. In addition, the peripheral control MPU determines to change the lighting color of the LED from green to red in the second variation.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU decides to execute an effect in which red, which is the lighting color of the LED, is absorbed by the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the first pseudo-continuous effect in the third variation. To do. The peripheral control MPU determines that the effect after the second pseudo-continuous effect in the third variation is allowed to proceed while the decorative design is red.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU switches the virtual pseudo-continuous effect by changing the lighting color of the LED ranging from the first change to the second change, the effect in the first half of the third change, and the reach effect in the third change. And the quasi-continuous LED effect which is a series of effects including the reach effect in the third variation can be realized.

  Note that the peripheral control MPU may execute the pseudo continuous LED effect even when the third variation is not determined as the special symbol prefetch target. For example, when only the suspension for the second variation has been won at the start of the first variation, the peripheral control MPU performs the pseudo variation effect change process 2 for the second variation in FIG. 148 for the first variation and the second variation. It determines to perform lighting of LED shown to. At this time, for example, if there is a third variation pending winning that is a jackpot variation that can be changed to the switching effect before the end of the second variation, the peripheral control MPU performs the third variation in the received command analysis process in step S1022. The effect may be changed to the effect shown in FIG.

  In addition, in step S302 of at least one of the first variation and the second variation, when it is determined that at least one of the pseudo continuous effects or the pseudo gaze effects is to be executed, the peripheral control MPU performs the pseudo continuous effects. In the change process 1, execution of the pseudo continuous LED effect may be determined.

  FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram showing a revival effect that is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect that straddles three variations. By the start of the first variation, the suspension for the second variation and the third variation has been won. In the first variation, the first sequence of pseudo-continuous effects is performed, and the second sequence of pseudo-continuous effects is not developed. Thereafter, no reach effect is generated, and the first variation ends. In the first variation, the effect display device 1600 displays that the first quasi-continuous effect such as “Chance at 6 stops in middle symbol! × 1” is being performed, and “6 Does not stop, and the first variation ends.

  In the second variation, first, a reviving pattern effect indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect has not ended is executed, and a second continuous effect is executed. After that, it develops into SP reach, and an outage is announced. In the second variation, the effect display device 1600 displays a revival pattern for which the pseudo-continuous effect has not yet been completed, such as “Still More !!” at the start of the variation, A display indicating that the second pseudo-continuous effect such as “Chance! × 2” is being performed is performed. Thereafter, the SP display effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In the third variation, which is a big hit variation, an effect of a revival pattern indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect has not ended is executed first, a third pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and then a reach effect is developed. In the third variation, the effect display device 1600 displays a revival pattern for which the pseudo-continuous effect has not yet been completed, such as “Still More !!!” at the start of the variation. A display indicating that the third pseudo-continuous production such as “Chance! × 3” is being performed is performed. After that, on the effect display device 1600, a display indicating that the fourth quasi-continuous effect such as “6 stops in middle symbol! × 4” is performed is performed, and the reach effect is displayed. A big hit is announced.

  Hereinafter, processing for realizing the restoration effect of FIG. 149 will be described. In the example of FIG. 149, the variation pattern of the first variation is determined to be the variation pattern of non-reach in the start port winning process of step S116 for the first variation. In addition, the variation type of the first variation is determined as “normal”. In step S302, it is determined that the pseudo-gase effect is performed with the first variation.

  Further, in the start opening winning time process of step S116 for the second variation, the variation pattern of the second variation is determined to be a variation pattern in which SP reach is executed. In addition, the variation type of the second variation is determined as “normal”. In Step S302, it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect is not performed due to the second variation.

  Further, in the start opening winning prize process of step S116 for the third variation that is a big hit variation, the variation pattern of the third variation is determined to be the big hit variation pattern, and the variation type of the third variation is determined to be “addition 1”. In addition, the third variation is determined as a special symbol prefetching production target. Further, in step S302, it is determined that two pseudo-continuous effects are executed with the third variation. In addition, the pseudo continuous effect addition process in the third variation is performed before the first variation starts.

  Since the peripheral control MPU determines the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the third change in the notice determination process in the received command analysis process in step S1022 for the third change (step S302: Yes), A pseudo-continuous effect addition process (step S304) is executed. Note that since the third variation is a big hit variation, the process of step S303 is not executed.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU determines that the first variation and the second variation are pre-variations in step S401 in the pseudo continuous effect adding process (S401: Yes). In the example of FIG. 149, it is assumed that the process of step S402 is not executed. The peripheral control MPU executes the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1 (step S405) in order to determine that the pseudo-gasse effect is executed in the first change included in the previous change (S403: s). Note that since the third variation is a big hit variation, the process of step S404 is not executed.

  For example, when the third variation is determined as a special symbol prefetching effect target and the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1 is executed for the third motion, the peripheral control MPU determines whether to execute the resurrection effect according to a predetermined probability. To decide.

  Therefore, if the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the revival effect, in the quasi-continuous effect change process 1, for example, the revival pattern effect indicating that the quasi-continuous effect has not ended yet at the start of the second fluctuation is performed. And the second pseudo-continuous effect is determined in the second variation. In addition, the peripheral control MPU performs, in the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1, for example, performing a revival pattern effect indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect has not yet ended at the start of the third variation variation, and the third variation one sequence. It is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect of the eye and the pseudo-continuous effect of the second series are changed to the pseudo-continuous effect of the third series and the pseudo-continuous effect of the fourth series, respectively. Note that the revival pattern effect may not be performed in at least one of the second variation and the third variation.

  In the above example, in the pseudo-continuous effect addition process (step S304) in the third variation, the process of generating the revival effect is performed, but when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the second variation, Peripheral control MPU may implement | achieve the process which produces | generates a resurrection effect in two steps, the pseudo continuous effect addition process in a 2nd fluctuation | variation, and the pseudo continuous effect addition process in a 3rd fluctuation.

  Specifically, for example, in the pseudo-continuous effect addition process for the second change, the peripheral control MPU performs the first continuous pseudo-continuous effect in the first change by the pseudo-continuous effect change process 1 or the pseudo-continuous effect change process 2. It is also possible to decide to continue the revival pattern effect and the pseudo-continuous effect with the second variation. Then, the peripheral control MPU may determine to continue the resurrection pattern effect and the pseudo-continuous effect with the third variation by the pseudo-continuous effect change process 1 in the pseudo-continuous effect addition process for the third variation.

  In addition, in step S302 of the first variation and the second variation, if it is determined that neither the pseudo continuous effect nor the pseudo gaze effect is executed in the first variation and the second variation, the peripheral control MPU In the continuous effect change process 2, execution of the revival effect may be determined.

  The peripheral control MPU can enhance the player's expectation by executing a pseudo-continuous effect including a revival pattern effect that straddles changes. In particular, as in the example of FIG. 149, when the pseudo-continuous effect and the reach effect that continue from the first variation are executed by the second variation, and the revival pattern effect is executed by the third variation and the pseudo-continuous effect continues. The player is highly likely to presume that the second variation is a variation of the look-ahead target. However, since the pseudo-continuous production continues in the third variation, the player can feel the unexpectedness in the production. .

[14-2. Pseudo-continuous effect addition processing for fluctuation during execution]
Hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous effect addition process for the variation being executed will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the pseudo-continuous effect adding process in step S304. Differences from FIG. 143 will be described.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that there is no previous change (step S401: No), the peripheral control MPU determines whether there is a change that is being executed in which neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gase effect is executed (step S407). If the peripheral control MPU determines that there is no change during execution in which neither the pseudo-continuous effect setting nor the pseudo-gase effect is executed (step S407: No), the pseudo-continuous effect adding process is terminated. If the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a change during execution in which neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gase effect is executed (step S407: Yes), the process proceeds to step S408.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step S403 that neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gasse effect is executed in all previous variations (step S403: No), the determination target variation in the notice determination process is the special symbol pre-reading effect target. It is determined whether or not (step S408). If the peripheral control MPU determines that the determination target change in the notice determination process is not a special symbol pre-reading effect target (step S408: No), the pseudo control effect change process 2 is executed (step S406), and the pseudo continuous effect addition process is performed. finish.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the determination target change in the notice determination process is a special symbol prefetching effect target (step S408: Yes), whether or not the remaining change time of the currently executed change is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. Determination is made (step S409). If the peripheral control MPU determines that the remaining fluctuation time of the currently executed fluctuation is less than the predetermined time (step S409: No), it executes the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2 (step S406), and the pseudo-continuous effect adding process Exit.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation currently being executed is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (step S409: Yes), the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3 is executed (step S410), and the pseudo-continuous effect adding process is performed. Exit. When the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3 is executed, for example, effects such as the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 are executed in the fluctuation during the execution. Therefore, it is desirable that the predetermined time in step S409 is a time during which the effect can be executed, for example.

  Note that the peripheral control MPU does not necessarily execute the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3 even when the process proceeds to step S410. For example, the peripheral control MPU executes the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3 with a predetermined third probability. May be.

  FIG. 151A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3. In the example of FIG. 151A, in the start opening winning process of step S116 for the first variation, the variation pattern of the first variation is determined to be a variation pattern without reach, and the variation type of the first variation is determined to be “normal”. Yes. Furthermore, in step S302, it is determined that neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gasse effect is executed in the first variation.

  The second variation is a variation that is won at a timing when the first variation is being executed and the remaining variation time of the first variation is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. In the start opening winning process of step S116 for the second variation, the variation pattern of the second variation is determined to be a variation pattern in which SP reach is executed, and the variation type of the second variation is determined to be “normal”. Furthermore, in step S302, it is determined that two pseudo-continuous effects are executed with the second variation.

  The peripheral control MPU determines the execution of the pseudo continuous effect in the second change in the notice determination process in the received command analysis process in step S1022 for the second change (step S302: Yes), and the pseudo continuous number of times in the second change. Is determined to be less than the predetermined number of times (step S303: Yes), a pseudo-continuous effect addition process (step S304) is executed for the second variation.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU determines that there is no previous variation (step S401: No), and since the first variation in which neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gase effect is performed is being executed, the pseudo-continuous effect and the pseudo-gase effect are performed. It is determined that there is a change during execution in which none of these are executed (step S407: Yes). Further, the peripheral control MPU determines that the second variation, which is the target for the notice determination process, is the special symbol pre-reading effect target (step S408: Yes), and the remaining variation time of the first variation currently being executed is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. (Step S409: No), the pseudo-continuous effect change process 3 is executed (step S410).

  In the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3, the peripheral control MPU operates, for example, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 in the first variation, and each of the first continuous pseudo-unit effect and the second pseudo-continuous effect in the second variation. Is replaced with the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350. That is, in the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 operates in the variation being executed, and the upper front movable decorative body 3350 operates in place of the pseudo continuous effect in other variations, that is, the front variation. This is a process of determining a series of virtual pseudo-continuous effects that straddle the determination target variation. For example, when there is a previous variation in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not set among the plurality of previous variations, the peripheral control MPU performs the pseudo-continuous change in the pseudo-continuous effect change process 1 to the previous variation in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not set. By adding an effect, the series of virtual pseudo-continuous effects are realized. In addition, it is desirable that the peripheral control MPU does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3 when there is a number of previous fluctuations equal to or larger than the predetermined number in step S303. Even in this case, the peripheral control MPU may execute the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3 if the determination target change in the notice determination process is a change corresponding to the jackpot.

  As a result, the peripheral control MPU can realize a virtual pseudo-continuous effect using the upper front movable decorative body 3350 with respect to the variation being executed. Further, the player can expect the generation of a virtual pseudo-continuous effect from the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350. Note that it is desirable that the operation modes of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 in the first variation and the second variation are different from each other.

  FIG. 151B is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3. Specifically, FIG. 151B shows an example of the pseudo-continuous effect changing process executed over three variations. In the example of FIG. 151B, in the start opening winning process in step S116 for the first variation, the variation pattern of the first variation is determined to be a variation pattern without reach, and the variation type of the first variation is determined to be “normal”. Yes. Furthermore, in step S302, it is determined that neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gasse effect is executed in the first variation.

  In addition, it is assumed that the suspension of the third variation which is a big hit variation is a big hit variation which is won at a timing when the first variation is being executed and the remaining variation time of the first variation is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. In the start opening winning process of step S116 for the third variation, the variation pattern of the third variation is determined to be a variation pattern in which SP reach is executed, and the variation type of the third variation is determined to be “normal”. Furthermore, in step S302, it is determined that two pseudo-continuous effects are executed with the third variation.

  Further, the second variation hold is assumed to be won after the winning corresponding to the first variation and before the third variation holding winning. In the start opening winning process in step S116 for the second variation, the variation pattern of the second variation is determined to be a variation pattern with no reach, and the variation type of the second variation is determined to be “normal”. Furthermore, in step S302, it is determined that neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gasse effect is executed in the second variation.

  The peripheral control MPU determines the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect with the third change in the notice determination process in the received command analysis process of step S1022 for the third change (step S302: Yes). A continuous effect addition process (step S304) is executed. Note that since the third variation is a big hit variation, the process of step S303 is not executed.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU determines that the second variation is a previous variation (step S401: Yes), determines that the second variation that is the previous variation is a reachless variation (step S402: Yes), and performs the previous variation. It is determined that neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gase effect is set for the second variation (step S403: No). Further, the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a running variation in which neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gase effect is executed because the first variation in which neither the pseudo-continuous effect or the pseudo-gase effect is executed is being executed. (Step S407: Yes). Further, the peripheral control MPU determines that the third variation, which is the target of the notice determination process, is the special symbol pre-reading effect target (step S408: Yes), and the remaining variation time of the first variation currently being executed is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. (Step S409: No), the pseudo-continuous effect change process 3 is executed (step S410).

  In the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3, the peripheral control MPU operates the upper front movable decorative body 3350 in the first change and the second change, for example, and the first continuous pseudo-effect and the second series in the third change. It is determined that each of the pseudo-continuous effects is replaced with the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350. The operation modes of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 in the first variation, the second variation, and the third variation may be different from each other or the same.

  As described with reference to FIG. 146, in the pseudo-continuous change process 3, the peripheral control MPU does not replace part or all of the pseudo-continuous effects after the second change with the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350. Also good. In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 146, when the peripheral control MPU replaces the pseudo continuous effect of the variation in which the SP reach is performed with the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350, part or all of the operation is performed. It may be executed during SP reach.

  In addition, in the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3, instead of or in addition to the above-described operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350, the output of predetermined sound from various speakers, which is completed in a time shorter than the predetermined time in step S409, various It may be determined that a predetermined pattern of light emission from the LED, operation of another movable part, or the like is executed.

  FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect realized by the pseudo-continuous effect change process 3. The first variation has an unreachable variation pattern and the variation type is “normal”. In Step S302, it is determined that neither the pseudo-continuous effect nor the pseudo-gase effect is executed in the first variation. In addition, the second variation has a variation pattern with reach, the variation type is “normal”, it is determined in step S302 that two pseudo-continuous effects are to be executed, and the special symbol prefetch target It is a fluctuation. It is assumed that the second variation is held at a timing when the first variation is being executed and the remaining variation time of the first variation is equal to or longer than the predetermined time in step S408.

  During the first fluctuation, which is a deviation fluctuation without reach, when the third fluctuation hold that is a special symbol look-ahead target is won, the first action is an action of returning to the origin position after the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, It is executed by the end of the first variation.

  Subsequently, in the second variation that is a special symbol prefetch target, the second operation and the final operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 are executed, and thereafter, the reach effect is developed. The mode of the second operation and the final operation is different from the mode of the first operation. In FIG. 152, from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawing, an example in which a triangular decorative body pops out from the central decorative body 3351 in the middle of the first operation is taken as an example of the second operation. An example in which a star-shaped decorative body jumps out from 3351 is described as an example of the final operation. As another example of the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 in each variation, after the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered to the first predetermined position, the second predetermined position below the origin position and above the first predetermined position There are operations such as reciprocating a first predetermined number of times between the first predetermined position and the like.

  For example, the operation mode of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 in the first variation and the second variation may be the same. The performance in which the operation mode of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 in the first variation and the second variation is the same, compared to the performance in which the operation mode of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 in the first variation and the second variation are different from each other, When the big hit is selected in the second variation, it is desirable to select at a high rate.

  In addition, for example, the peripheral control MPU may determine to change the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the first variation in the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3 to the pseudo-continuous effect suggesting symbol. FIG. 149 shows an example in which the pseudo-continuous effect continues when the left symbol is “5”, the middle symbol “6”, and the right symbol “7”, but the left symbol in this example is “5”, the middle symbol The combination consisting of “6” and the right symbol “7” is a pseudo-continuous effect suggestion symbol. Thus, the player can enjoy the game by guessing the relationship between the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 and the pseudo-continuous performance.

[15. Motivation meter change production]
[15-1. Another example of fluctuation information source table]
Hereinafter, the motivation meter effect which is an example of the effect of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram of another example of the variation information source table. Differences from the fluctuation information source table of FIG. 141 will be described. Hereinafter, the special lottery results (winning type) that are drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 are “out of”, “6R time short finite normal big hit”, “6R time short normal big hit”, “6R "Short Infinite Probability Big Hit" and "16R Time Infinite Probability Big Hit" are included. In addition, special lottery results (winning type) that are drawn when the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004 are “2R time short finite normal big hit”, “2R time short infinite positive change big hit”, and “16R short short infinite positive change”. "Big hit" is included (not shown).

  For example, 64 times or 76 times is selected as the number of time saving continuations after the end of the “6R time finite normal big hit” according to a predetermined ratio. In addition, as the number of time-continuations after “2R time-limited finite normal big hit” ends, for example, 52 times, 64 times, 72 times, 79 times, or 83 times are selected according to a predetermined ratio.

The fluctuation information source table in FIG. 153 shows correspondences between winning types, fluctuation pattern identifiers, presentation outlines of the fluctuation patterns, and distribution. In the example of FIG. 153, information on the variation pattern of each special lottery result (winning type) is stored in one variation information source table. “+ Pseudo 1” and “+ pseudo 2” described in the effect summary column indicate that two series of pseudo series effects and three series of pseudo series effects are executed, respectively. As described above, the two quasi-continuous effects and the three quasi-continuous effects are examples of effects that are executed when the variation types “addition 1” and “addition 2” are selected, respectively. That is, in the effect summary column, information indicating the variation type is described. [15-2. Motivation meter]
FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a motivation meter. The motivation meter is an icon indicating the expected degree of big hit of the fluctuation being executed, and is displayed in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600 in a low-accuracy non-short-time state, for example. The motivation meter is always displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the normal performance mode in the low-probability / non-time-short state (that is, when the execution ratio of a specific performance with a high expectation degree of big hit is not high). For example, it is desirable to be displayed (even during SP reach).

  The motivation meter suggests, for example, a “motivation state” indicating a big hit expectation using a plurality of colors. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the expected degree of jackpot increases in the order of “white <blue <yellow <green <orange <peach <red <rainbow”. In other words, by changing the display of the mood meter during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the expected degree of big hit of the fluctuation is suggested. The effect of changing the motivation meter may be executed in parallel with other effects. Moreover, although the motivation meter indicates the big hit expectation using a plurality of colors, the big hit expectation may be suggested using an index other than the color. Specifically, for example, the number of specific marks such as stars, or the strength of the shogi piece “Strength in the motif, such as“ Ayu <Incense <Katsura <Silver <Gold <Horn <Fly <King ”” A big hit expectation degree may be suggested using a display mode or the like that can be recognized.

  In the example of FIG. 154 (a), first, the motivation state of the motivation meter is promoted from yellow to yellow. In order to allow the player to recognize the current motivation state, in the example of FIG. 154, a star mark is displayed around a circle indicating a color indicating the current motivation state and a color having a lower hit expectation than the color. (I.e., the color below the current motivation state is displayed indicating that it has been cleared). When the current motivation state is white, the star mark may not be displayed around all the circles, that is, the initial state may be used. In the example of FIG. 154 (a), the motivation state of the motivation meter is finally promoted to red.

  In the example of FIG. 154 (b), after the initial state of the motivation meter, a color with a low jackpot expectation (for example, yellow or less) is excluded from the motivation meter. A motivation meter in which a color with a low expectation level is excluded is also referred to as a rare pattern motivation meter. In the example of FIG. 154 (B), it is determined at this point that the motivation state of the motivation meter is promoted to green or higher. In the example of FIG. 154 (B), the motivation state of the motivation meter is finally promoted to red.

  FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the motivation meter distribution table. The motivation meter distribution table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The motivation meter distribution table stores, for each variation pattern, the final arrival color distribution of the motivation state of the motivation meter in the variation. In addition, when white is selected as the final arrival color, the motivation meter change effect may not be performed.

  In addition, when the color of the motivation meter satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, a color of green or more), it is determined that a reach effect is executed, or an effect having an expectation level of SP reach or more is executed. It is desirable that the distribution is determined so that the

  FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a motivation meter rare pattern distribution table. The motivation meter rare pattern distribution table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The motivation meter rare pattern distribution table stores, for example, a distribution indicating whether or not the motivation meter is changed to a rare pattern when a motivation state of green or higher is selected in the motivation meter distribution table for each variation pattern.

  Hereinafter, the process for executing the motivation meter change effect will be described. If the peripheral control MPU determines in the received command analysis process in step S1022 that the prior determination command has been received, the peripheral control MPU specifies a variation pattern included in the prior determination command. If the peripheral control MPU determines that the current state is a low-probability non-short-time state, the peripheral control MPU refers to the record of the motivation meter allocation table corresponding to the identified variation pattern, and finally determines the motivation state of the motivation meter in the variation. Determine the reached color. Note that the peripheral control MPU does not execute the motivation meter change effect when it is determined that the current state is a state other than the low-accuracy non-short-time state.

  The peripheral control MPU, when the determined final arrival color is a color indicating a predetermined expected level or more (in this embodiment, green or more), the distribution corresponding to the variation pattern and the final arrival color of the motivation meter rare pattern distribution table To determine whether to change the motivation meter to a rare pattern. When the peripheral control MPU decides to change the motivation meter to a rare pattern, it is desirable to change it at the time of winning corresponding to the change.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to change the mood meter that the game ball wins at the start port to a rare pattern when the momentum state of the momentum meter has changed from the initial state in the fluctuation during execution When executing the determination, an exception process may be executed so that the motivation meter is not changed to the rare pattern regardless of the distribution indicated by the motivation meter rare pattern distribution table. This is in order not to confuse the player. However, even if the motivation state of the motivation meter is changing from the initial state in the fluctuation during execution, the motivation state in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start opening prize is more than the motivation state in the fluctuation during execution. When the big hit expectation is high, the peripheral control MPU may change the motivation meter to the rare pattern in the variation corresponding to the new start opening winning according to the distribution indicated by the motivation meter rare pattern distribution table.

  The peripheral control MPU determines the promotion timing of the motivation state and the color of the motivation state after the promotion at each promotion timing based on, for example, the final arrival color and the variation pattern. Development from normal reach to SP reach at the time of a predetermined notice, at the time of quasi-continuous design (a design that the decorative design is determined to re-variate in the change, that is, a decorative design that the pseudo-continuous is determined to start or continue) Time, a predetermined timing during SP reach, and a winning in SP reach (whether the change is a big hit or a miss) are all examples of the promotion timing of the motivated state.

  Further, the promotion effect in the motivated state may be executed as a special symbol prefetching effect (hereinafter also simply referred to as a prefetching effect). In other words, the promotion timing of the motivated state may include a pre-paid effect target holding prize, a maintenance 1 change start time, a maintenance 2 change start time, and a maintenance 3 change start time. Note that the retention 3 variation is a variation immediately before the pre-reading effect subject variation, and indicates a variation that was held at the time of winning corresponding to the prefetching effect subject variation. The maintenance 2 variation is a variation one previous to the maintenance 3 variation, and indicates a variation that is held at the time of winning corresponding to the prefetch effect subject variation. The variation 1 is a variation immediately before the variation 2 and is a variation that is held at the time of winning corresponding to the pre-reading effect variation.

  Note that even if the final reached color in the motivated state is the same, the expected degree of jackpot may differ depending on the timing of promotion to the final reached color. Specifically, for example, the first big hit expectation when the motivated state is promoted to red, which is the final achieved color, in the promotion effect performed using only one change, and the promotion performed using the pre-reading effect In the production, look ahead in the second big hit expectation when the motivated state is promoted to red, which is the final arrival color, and the promotion effect performed using the look-ahead effect. The third big hit expectation degree when the motivation state for the first time in the production target variation is promoted to the final reached color, red, may be different or the same.

  For example, when the third big hit expectation is the highest, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation when the promotion effect is executed in the pre-reading effect. Further, for example, when the second big hit expectation is the highest, a state where the big hit expectation is high can be continued for a long time, and a sense of exhilaration and superiority can be given to the player. Also, for example, when the first big hit expectation is the highest, the player's sense of expectation can be continued even when the pre-reading effect does not occur.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU may gradually promote the motivation state toward the final reaching color of the motivation meter. Specifically, for example, one or more scenarios are defined for each combination of the final reached color and the variation pattern. The peripheral control MPU selects one scenario according to the combination of the final arrival color and the variation pattern.

  Each scenario has a promotion timing and a color after promotion at each promotion timing. For each scenario, it is determined that the motivated state is not promoted after the motivated state is promoted to the corresponding final color.

  Further, in each scenario, the promotion timing is defined by the effects that can occur in the corresponding variation pattern. Specifically, for example, for the definition of promotion timing in a scenario corresponding to a fluctuation pattern in which normal reach occurs, SP reach or movie reach that cannot occur in the fluctuation pattern is not used.

  In addition, when there is no variation that defines the promotion timing of the selected scenario, the peripheral control MPU does not execute the promotion effect at the promotion timing. More specifically, for example, when the promotion timing of the selected scenario includes the start of the maintenance 3 change, and there is no hold 3 change hold at the time of winning corresponding to the pre-reading production target change, the peripheral control MPU No promotion effect is executed at the start of the maintenance 3 change. The same applies to the case where there is no hold of 2 keeping change at the time of winning corresponding to the pre-reading object change and the case where there is no hold of 1 keeping change. However, it is desirable that a scenario corresponding to each holding state at the time of winning corresponding to the pre-reading target effect change is prepared in advance and the scenario corresponding to the holding state is selected.

  Instead of the above-described scenario, a promotion lottery scenario may be defined for each variation pattern, and the peripheral control MPU may select one promotion lottery scenario according to the variation pattern. Each promotion lottery scenario defines the promotion timing and the promotion probability of the motivated state at each promotion timing. In this case, the peripheral control MPU executes the motivated promotion lottery according to the promotion probability corresponding to the promotion timing at each promotion timing indicated by the selected promotion lottery scenario, and when the promotion lottery is won, Promote.

  When the promotion lottery is won, the peripheral control MPU may promote the motivated state by one level (for example, white to blue) or may be promoted for a plurality of levels (for example, white to green). However, in the case of promotion in a plurality of stages, the peripheral control MPU determines a motivation state so as not to exceed the final color. The peripheral control MPU discards the winning result or does not execute the promotion lottery even if the motivation state has reached the final arrival color even if the promotion lottery at the promotion timing is won.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines that the motivated state at the start of the last promotion timing indicated by the selected promotion lottery scenario has not reached the final reached color, the peripheral control MPU does not perform the promotion lottery at the last promotion timing, It is desirable to forcibly promote the state of motivation for the final color at the final promotion timing.

  Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation pattern production outline includes “normal reach”, if the motivated state up to the time when the reach state is an example of the final promotion timing is not promoted to the final reached color, peripheral control The MPU forcibly promotes the motivated state at the promotion timing to the final color. Further, for example, when the outline of the variation pattern includes “first half of SP reach” (the stage of performing a win notification when the first half of the SP reach ends), the first half of the SP reach that is an example of the last promotion timing is generated. If the motivated state by the time has not been promoted to the final achieved color, the peripheral control MPU promotes the motivated state to the final achieved color at the promotion timing.

  Further, for example, when the outline of the variation pattern includes “first half of SP reach” (the effect of performing a win notification at the end of the second half of the SP reach), a win notification effect of the second half of SP reach, which is an example of the last promotion timing, is generated. If the motivated state by the time has not been promoted to the final color, the peripheral control MPU promotes the motivated state to the final color at the promotion timing. Further, for example, when the production outline of the variation pattern includes “movie reach” (reach production with a very high expectation level of big hits in which the predetermined video flows in the production display device 1600), the success of movie reach as an example of the last promotion timing If the motivated state by the time of the announcement production has not been promoted to the final achieved color, the peripheral control MPU promotes the motivated state to the final achieved color at the promoted timing.

  Further, for example, when the production outline of the variation pattern is “full rotation reach” (reach production in which the big win is determined or the big hit expectation is extremely high in the production display device 1600 in a state where the decorative symbols are aligned), the final promotion is performed. If the motivated state by the start of the full rotation reach, which is an example of the timing, has not been promoted to the final arrival color, the peripheral control MPU promotes the motivated state at the timing to the final arrival color.

  When the target variation of the motivation meter change effect is a variation corresponding to the deviation, the peripheral control MPU ends the motivation meter change effect and returns the motivation meter to the initial state when receiving the symbol confirmation command. The symbol confirmation command is a command that the main control MPU transmits to the peripheral control MPU at the end of the special symbol variation time. The peripheral control MPU receives the symbol confirmation command and displays the decoration displayed on the effect display device 1600. Stop the design completely.

  If the target variation of the motivation meter change effect is a variation corresponding to the big hit, the peripheral control MPU receives a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state transmitted from the main control MPU is started in step S138. The motivation state of the motivation meter is displayed in the final reached color. In other words, when the target variation is a variation corresponding to a big hit, the peripheral control MPU does not initialize the motivation meter until receiving the big hit game start command even if the symbol determination command is received. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of superiority that is won in a big hit.

  In addition, when the effect that the motivation state of the motivation meter is promoted to a predetermined level (assumed to be yellow in this case) is executed, the deviation variation ends, and when the deviation variation ends (the deviation variation is a symbol confirmation command (Excluding the period from the reception of the symbol confirmation command until the start of the next change), the final reached color of the motivated state is a color indicating the motivated state above the predetermined level. Suppose there is a pending hold. At this time, the peripheral control MPU displays a motivation meter in which white and blue, which are levels lower than yellow, are excluded at the start of the suspension fluctuation, and the motivation state is always promoted to yellow or more in the suspension fluctuation. May be executed. In other words, even if the color of the motivated state changes and deviates, if there is a hold where the final arrival color is determined with a higher degree of expectation than the changed color, the motivation meter is initialized when deviated It is to continue without doing.

  By executing the above-described effect, even if the motivation meter promotion effect is executed, the player can maintain a sense of expectation for the next fluctuation without being disappointed immediately. It can give a sense of tension to the player.

  In addition, for example, it is assumed that the deviation fluctuation is completed when the effect that the motivation meter in the motivated state is promoted to a predetermined level is finished, and the next fluctuation is not held at the end of the deviation fluctuation. At this time, for example, if the internal gaming state is advantageous for the player, such as a high probability (probability change) non-time-short state, the peripheral control MPU is motivated during the standby state until the next change starts. You may blink the color which shows the motivation state below the predetermined level of a meter. In other words, the flashing display effect may be executed as the same process regardless of the motivated state after the promotion in the deviation fluctuation. This blinking display effect is an aspect that is never shown on the changing motivation meter.

  In addition, even if it is a case where it transfers to a power saving mode in the state where the blink display effect is performed, it is desirable that the display mode of the motivation meter that can be displayed during the change does not appear. The power saving mode is a mode that shifts when a standby state in which no change is performed continues for a predetermined time or longer, and the pachinko machine 1 is controlled by suppressing the light amount of the effect display device 1600 and the light emission of various lamps. This mode reduces power consumption.

  In this way, by realizing an effect that suggests an advantageous state for the player, the gaming interest is improved. In particular, even if the motivation meter promotion effect is executed, even if the win is not won, the player may perform the flashing display effect described above after the motivation meter promotion effect. Even if the fluctuation of the promotion effect of the motivation meter is out of place, it can be expected.

  Note that the peripheral control MPU does not necessarily perform such a blinking display effect in the above-described situation, and may be executed at a predetermined rate when the situation occurs. Further, in the situation described above, the peripheral control MPU may execute the blink display effect only when a predetermined operation of a predetermined operation unit is executed.

  There may be a player who feels troublesome in the flashing display effect. In addition, if a blinking display effect is being executed when the hall is opened, the operation of other gaming machines that are not executing the blinking display effect may be reduced. In order to avoid such a situation, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not the blinking display effect is to be performed by a predetermined operation of a predetermined operation unit during standby when the special symbol variation is not performed. That is, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 can be changed by the predetermined operation of the predetermined operation unit.

  In addition, if the player recognizes that the internal gaming state is a high probability (probability change) non-short-time state and the hall closes, if the hall realizes this advantageous state, the ram will be cleared. There is a possibility that the player is in a disadvantageous state (normal game state), that is, a disadvantage for the player. For this reason, the hall may not be realized by reducing the amount of light emitted (decreasing the brightness) on the image that is blinking by a predetermined operation of a predetermined operation unit, or by reducing the light emission amount of the effect display device 1600 or the like. It is preferable that it can be adjusted to.

[15-3. Hand production]
Hereinafter, “hand effect”, which is an example of an effect executed at the timing when the motivated state of the motivated meter is promoted, will be described. FIG. 157 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline example of hand effects. First, the peripheral control MPU uses the effect display device 1600 to execute a notice effect. Various speakers, various lamps, and the like may be used in combination for the notice effect. In the example of FIG. 157, the motivation meter is in the initial state at the start of the notice effect.

  In the example of FIG. 157, “Atsuka may!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, suggesting the possibility of further development of the effect. The notice effect may be a notice effect dedicated to hand effects, or may be a notice effect that can be developed into effects other than hand effects.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the introduction effect. In the introduction effect, the peripheral control MPU uses a predetermined light guide plate (hereinafter, the first light guide plate 2710 (not shown) provided in the back unit 3000 as the predetermined light guide plate) while the advance notice effect described above is advanced. For example, the hand pattern on the first light guide plate 2710 is made visible to the player. At this time, the peripheral control MPU displays a black image prior to the notice effect so that the player can visually recognize the notice effect on the effect display device 1600.

  Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU lowers the brightness of the notice effect on the effect display device 1600 to a predetermined value or less, or the effect display device so that the priority of the semi-transparent black image is in front of the notice effect. 1600. Further, the peripheral control MPU may display part or all of the effect display device 1600 in black so that the player cannot visually recognize the notice effect in the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control MPU causes the first light guide plate 2710 to blink for a predetermined time after blinking the first light guide plate 2710 a predetermined number of times.

  Note that there may be a plurality of variations in the hand displayed on the first light guide plate 2710 in the introduction effect. Specifically, for example, when the degree of expectation of the color after promotion of the motivation meter is low, the ratio of white hands appearing due to the light emission of the first light guide plate 2710 is high, and when the degree of expectation is high, it is red. The rate at which hands are revealed is high.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes a turning effect. The peripheral control MPU reduces the area for displaying the notice effect on the effect display device 1600 and displays the region on the effect display device 1600 around the reduced region in black. Further, the peripheral control MPU performs display in such a manner that the hand pattern that has been made visible on the front light guide plate 2610 has been transferred to the black display area of the effect display device 1600. The display of the light emission and effect display device 1600 is controlled.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU may display, for example, “Dokkun” or the like that gives the player a sense of expectation on the black display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the peripheral control MPU may output a sound such as a heartbeat from various speakers simultaneously with the display of “dokun”. In addition, when the degree of expectation of the color after the promotion of the motivation meter is high, an image of a special hand (for example, an image of a hand wearing a ring) is high on the effect display device 1600 instead of a normal hand image. It may be displayed as a percentage.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes a promotion confirmation effect. Peripheral control MPU displays in the promotion confirmation effect that the hand image displayed on effect display device 1600 enters the reduced notice effect display area, and then the reduced notice effect display area returns to its original size. The display of the effect display device 1600 is controlled so that Further, the peripheral control MPU ends the notice effect, displays “Please do your best!” On the effect display device 1600, and gives the love image to the displayed hand image, and executes the effect of passing the love letter to the main character. To do.

  It is desirable that the time required for the roaring effect is longer than the time required for the promotion confirmation effect. This is to maintain the player's expectation for the promotion of the motivated state of the motivation meter. Furthermore, it is desirable that the time required for the roaring effect is longer than the sum of the time required for the introduction effect and the time required for the promotion confirmation effect. This is because to what color the motivation state of the motivation meter is promoted is an important point for the player.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes a meter color determination effect. In the meter color determination effect, the peripheral control MPU displays, on the effect display device 1600, a display such as “chance !!” indicating that the big hit expectation is high together with the character image of the main character wearing the aura. The display is, for example, a dedicated effect that can be executed only by hand effects.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU controls the display of the effect display device 1600 so that, for example, the aura color that the hero wears moves to a motivation meter, and the motivation state of the motivation meter is displayed. The aura color is a color that suggests the expected degree of the motivated color after the promotion of the motivation meter. For example, the color after the promotion of the motivation meter at the promotion timing is the same as the aura color.

  For example, the number of types of the aura color may not be the same as the number of colors indicating the motivated state. Consider an example where the number of aura colors is less than the color that shows the motivation. Specifically, when the aura color is blue, green, and red, when the aura color is blue, the motivation state is shown as blue or higher, and when the aura color is green, the motivation state is green or higher. If the aura color is red, the motivation state should be more than red. The motivation meter's motivation color is higher than the aura color and is expected to be a big hit, so that it can give the player a sense of excitement and provide a sense of security. Also, if a motivated state with a lower expectation than the aura color is indicated (for example, green is indicated as the motivated color even though the aura color is red), the big hit It is good also as premium usage such as confirming.

  In addition, when the number of aura colors is smaller than the color indicating the motivated state (for example, when the aura color is composed of three types of blue, green, and red), the color indicating the motivated state by the aura color is good. You may make it vary the ratio which becomes color. For example, if the aura color is blue, the motivated color is red at a rate of 5%. If the aura color is green, the motivated color is red at a rate of 10%. If the aura color is red, 20%. Make sure that the motivational color is red. The same applies when the aura color is green or red.

  Further, for example, there may be a plurality of types of love letters having different expectations depending on the color of the love letter, the decoration attached to the love letter, and the like. That is, the peripheral control MPU may select and display a love letter having a higher expectation at a higher rate as the expectation in the color after the promotion of the mood meter is increased at the promotion timing. In addition, the peripheral control MPU may suggest the degree of expectation indicating how far the color of the mood meter to be promoted at the promotion timing is used by using both the selected love letter type and the aura color.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU ends the hand effect and executes the subsequent effect. In addition, while the said production | presentation is performed, it is the state which the motivation state of the motivation meter was promoted. Further, it is desirable that the characters “chance !!” appearing in the meter color determination effect remain displayed while the subsequent effect is being executed. The peripheral control MPU may execute the notice effect again from the beginning or midway in the subsequent effect after the end of the hand effect.

  Note that the peripheral control MPU may execute a gaze effect of a hand effect when the motivation state of the motivation meter is not promoted (for example, when white is selected as the final reached color of the motivation state). Specifically, for example, in the introductory effect, the peripheral control MPU ends the hand effect without lighting the first light guide plate 2710 for a predetermined time after blinking the first light guide plate 2710 a predetermined number of times. Return to. Further, for example, the peripheral control MPU may return to the original effect after finishing the hand effect without executing the promotion confirmation effect after executing the turn effect.

  In addition, an “introduction stage high-accuracy state” that increases the rate at which the introduction stage appears may be provided. Note that, for example, when the game ball is won at the start opening in the low probability non-short time, the game is shifted to the introduction effect high-accuracy state at a predetermined ratio, and the introduction effect high-accuracy state is continued at a predetermined number of fluctuations. When the state is shifted to this state, the rate at which the introductory effect is executed when a non-reach variation pattern is selected is higher than in the normal state (the inductive effect inaccurate state). When the introduction effect is executed when the non-reachable variation pattern is selected, it is desirable to execute the gaze effect that ends the hand effect until the introduction effect.

  Note that one hand effect may be executed across a plurality of variations. Hereinafter, when the first variation in which the hand effect is executed is being executed and there is no hold, the game ball wins the starting opening, and the final reached color of the motivation meter in the second variation corresponding to the winning An example in which a pattern in which red is selected is specifically described.

  Peripheral control MPU considers the effect currently performed with the 1st change as the notice effect in hand effect, for example, and performs an introduction effect and a turn effect. It is assumed that the remaining time of the first variation at the time of winning corresponding to the second variation is equal to or greater than the total time required for the introduction effect and the turn effect. The peripheral control MPU maintains the display of the turn effect on the effect display device 1600 from the end of the first change to the start of the second change. Specifically, for example, the image of the hand and the characters “dokun” are still displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the notice effect display area is further reduced. The peripheral control MPU stops the decorative design in this state (a state in which the notice effect display area is reduced).

  Subsequently, the second change starts while the peripheral control MPU maintains the display of the turning effect. The peripheral control MPU executes the effect of the promotion confirmation effect transition after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the second fluctuation or when the execution timing of the predetermined effect has arrived, and the motivation state of the motivation meter in the meter color determination effect is red Promoted and hand production ended.

  As described above, when the hand effect is stopped (maintained) in the middle of the process and the variation is ended, the hand effect is necessarily developed (the continuation of the hand effect is executed) by the next variation. desirable. In the example described above, since the hand effect is not completed in the first variation, when the winning result corresponding to the first variation is “out of”, the hand effect over the second variation may be executed. desirable. In other words, it is determined that the hand effect is executed across a plurality of variations only when the lottery results for the variations other than the last variation in the plurality of variations are off.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU may control the effect so that the motivated state of the motivated meter is promoted to the final color after a plurality of hand effects. When the first variation in which the hand effect is executed is being executed and there is no hold, the game ball wins the starting opening, and the final reaching color of the motivation meter in the second variation corresponding to the winning is red. Consider an example where a pattern is selected.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU executes a hand effect with the first fluctuation to promote the motivated state to yellow. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU executes the hand effect again with the second fluctuation (that is, resumes or resumes the effect that has been rewound to the predetermined effect timing), and promotes the motivated state to the final reached color, red. . In this case, it is desirable that the peripheral control MPU starts the second variation while maintaining the motivated state promoted to yellow at the end of the first variation.

  Note that when the peripheral control MPU maintains the motivated state that has been promoted to yellow, it performs a presentation that returns to white in just a short time (the motivation meter is initialized) and then returns to yellow again. An effect may be executed. It is desirable that the peripheral control MPU keeps the motivated state to be yellow at the timing of receiving the symbol confirmation command even when the gase demoteing effect is executed.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU starts a gase demote effect, for example, a predetermined time before the decoration symbol stop (for example, 1 second before). Then, the peripheral control MPU returns the motivation state of the motivation meter to the initial state over a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), for example. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU gradually changes the star marks around the white, blue, and yellow circles of the motivation meter so that the motivation meter returns to the initial state at the end of the predetermined time. Then, the peripheral control MPU returns the motivation meter from the initial state to the original state before execution of the gase demoteing effect over a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (before the decorative symbol is stopped).

  The peripheral control MPU starts the same effect at the same timing (a predetermined time before the decorative symbol stop (for example, 1 second before)) when the motivated color is not continued to the next fluctuation. . In other words, when the peripheral control MPU does not continue the motivated color, the star mark around the white, blue, and yellow circles of the motivation meter gradually becomes transparent one second before the stop of the decorative design. After 5 seconds, the initial state is restored, and after maintaining that state for 0.5 seconds, the decorative design is stopped. In this way, by performing the same effect for the case where the motivated state is continued and the case where the motivated state is not continued, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the continued motivated state.

  Further, only when the motivated state is promoted, the hand effect may be developed to the scolding effect (that is, the promotion of the motivated state is determined at the time when the scoring effect is developed). In this case, for example, during the scoring effect Characters such as “Waiting for love letter handing over” may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to allow the player to recognize that the motivated state will be promoted after the scolding effect.

  Further, the above-described promotion confirmation effect may be used not only for the promotion of the motivation meter but also for raising the expectation level of other effects. For example, a plurality of patterns (for example, white characters and red characters) that are displayed on the effect display device 1600 during reach are provided, and the peripheral control MPU displays a character color with low expectation on the effect display device 1600. The character color may be changed to a character with a high expectation by executing a hand effect when the user is in the middle.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU displays a combination of non-probable decorative symbols indicating a big hit on the effect display device 1600 when the probability variable big hit win is changed, and then performs a hand effect to display the displayed decorative symbol as a promising big hit. It may be changed to a combination of decorative symbols. In addition, the peripheral control MPU may execute a hand effect and change the reserved color displayed on the effect display device 1600 from white to blue with high expectation.

  When the peripheral control MPU uses the hand effect to suggest such an increase in expectation, the peripheral control MPU may execute an effect corresponding to each expectation up suggestion instead of the meter color determination effect. For example, when the character color displayed on the effect display device 1600 is changed from white to red, the peripheral control MPU appeals that the character has been changed to a red character by applying an effect. In addition, for example, when changing the reserved color displayed on the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control MPU changes the reserved color by outputting characters such as “change”.

  Also, for example, when the number of holds is three (the changes corresponding to the hold are the first change, the second change, and the third change in the order of winning), the game ball wins the start opening, When a pattern in which the final reached color of the motivation meter in the fourth variation corresponding to the winning is selected is selected, it is necessary to digest a plurality of variations until the variation that changes the motivation state to red.

  In the plurality of variations, the effect of promoting the motivated color has been described above. However, for example, the plurality of variations may be limited to the introduction effect. Specifically, for example, in each of the first to third variations, the peripheral control MPU performs a hand effect without lighting the first light guide plate 2710 after blinking the first light guide plate 2710 a predetermined number of times during the introduction effect. Exit.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU promotes the motivated state of the motivation meter in the initial state until the end of the third variation, and promotes the motivated state in the fourth variation to red. In this way, by executing the hand effect Gase effect across a plurality of fluctuations, the same effect is continuously generated, causing the player to feel that something is happening, and thus the player Can get a sense of expectation. By doing in this way, even if it is a case where the same production is executed accidentally, a sense of tension can be provided to the player.

  In addition, in the introduction effect and the turn effect, a plurality of hands may be displayed on the first light guide plate 2710 and the effect display device 1600. For example, the peripheral control MPU displays three hands on the first light guide plate 2710 in the introduction effect, and then performs the effect using the hands three times. That is, for example, in the introductory effect, an effect using the same number of hands as the number of hands displayed on the first light guide plate 2710 is performed.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU performs, for example, an effect (for example, an effect of handing over the above-mentioned love letter) consisting of a promotion determination effect of the motivation state and a meter color determination effect for each of a plurality of persons corresponding to hands. Alternatively, the hands of some or all of the plurality of people may be used for other expectation enhancement effects.

  In other words, for example, an effect in which three hands are displayed is an effect that is highly expected by the player, such as an effect corresponding to each expected degree increase suggestion performed instead of a promotion confirmation effect or a meter color determination effect. It can also be said that the performance is foretelling that it will be executed at least three more times. Of these three effects, one is a meter color determination effect, two is an effect corresponding to an expectation increase suggestion, all three effects are meter color determination effects, and all three effects It is good also as an effect corresponding to an expectation up suggestion. When three hands are displayed, the peripheral control MPU may digest all three effects with one change. Further, the peripheral control MPU may use an effect of a predetermined number of times (for example, at least once) among the three effects as a prefetch effect. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU has only to digest all three effects until the fluctuation corresponding to the hold to be prefetched is finished, and the effect corresponding to one person's hand is the first. It is possible to digest all three effects across multiple variations, such as digesting with one variation and digesting the production corresponding to the remaining two hands with the second variation following the first variation. .

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU displays an image of a display mode (for example, an image of a foot) different from the hand in the hand effect on the first light guide plate 2710 and the effect display device 1600 instead of the hand image or simultaneously with the hand image. It may be displayed. For example, when displaying an image of a foot, the peripheral control MPU may perform a dedicated effect different from an effect that may develop from a hand effect. Note that the peripheral control MPU may execute a “foot effect” using a foot image in the same manner as the hand effect across a plurality of variations, and may change the display mode of the foot image in the process. Good. Also, for example, when the big hit expectation is high when “hand” and “foot” are displayed at the same time, the hand effect changes the display mode of the image of the foot (for example, the foot from the wrinkled foot is smooth. If you make a big foot), you may increase the expectation of jackpot.

  In addition, a special stage may be provided in which a dedicated effect in which a hand effect is always or at a high rate is executed for all variations. In the special stage, when the hand effect is not executed, it may be determined so that the big hit is confirmed.

[15-4. Other motivation meter promotion effects]
Hereinafter, other examples of effects for promoting the motivated state of the motivated meter will be described. For example, each decorative design has one of numbers 1 to 8, a character corresponding to the number, and a name of the character corresponding to the number. For example, when the peripheral control MPU is changing all the decorative symbols at high speed, a predetermined display mode of the predetermined area of the effect display device 1600 or the first light guide plate 2710 (for example, “Do your best! Message display, “Mikiokun” is the name of the character drawn on the decorative pattern).

  The peripheral control MPU matches the name displayed in the predetermined display mode with the name corresponding to the decorative pattern to be stopped at a high rate when the motivation state of the motivation meter is promoted to one or more stages. In addition, when the motivation state of the motivation meter is not promoted, the name displayed in a predetermined display mode and the name corresponding to the decorative pattern to be stopped are not matched. Thereby, when one or two decorative symbols corresponding to the name displayed in the predetermined display mode are stopped, the motivation state of the motivation meter is promoted.

  The above-described effects can increase the player's expectation for the jackpot. Further, for example, the motivated state may be promoted every time the decorative symbol stops in the pseudo-continuous effect. Moreover, you may make it promote a motivated state every time a decoration design stops over several fluctuations using a prefetch effect. Thereby, whenever a decoration design stops, a player's sense of exaltation increases.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU, when changing all the decorative symbols at high speed, is like a message such as “Good luck, Miki-kun! Good luck, Kose-kun!” (“Kose-kun” is drawn on the decorative symbols. The name of the character drawn on each of the plurality of decorative symbols may be displayed in the display area described above. In this case, the motivation state of the motivation meter is promoted when one or two decorative symbols corresponding to either “Mikikun” or “Koseikuun” are stopped.

  However, it is desirable that the peripheral control MPU does not display the names of characters drawn on all kinds of decorative symbols. In other words, it is desirable that the number of types of effects displayed in the predetermined area of the effect display device 1600 or the first light guide plate 2710 is smaller than the number of types of decorative symbols that stop on the effect display device 1600. If all kinds of decorative symbols are displayed, the player will recognize that the motivated state will be promoted before the decorative symbols stop, so there will be no sense of thrill when the decorative symbols stop. is there.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU displays a message such as “Good luck, Miki-kun! Good luck, Miki-kun!” By the two women in the display area when all the decorative symbols are changing at high speed. May be. In this case, if the decorative symbol corresponding to the mikikun stops, it may be determined that the motivation state of the motivation meter is promoted in a plurality of stages.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU may perform, for example, an effect of promoting the motivated state when the left decorative symbol is stopped, and promoting the motivated state when the right decorative symbol is stopped, or the left decorative symbol. You may perform the effect which promotes a motivated state, when is stopped and a right decoration symbol is stopped. When the left decorative design and the right decorative design are stopped at the same time, the peripheral control MPU may execute an effect that promotes the motivated state when stopped simultaneously. In this way, by displaying a plurality of effects having the same contents (effects for promoting the motivated state), a reach state is formed in addition to the promotion of the motivated state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

[16. Flashback production]
Hereinafter, an example of the flashback effect that is an example of the winning suggestion effect of the special lottery result will be described. The flashback effect is an example of an effect that is executed when a variation pattern including movie reach is selected, for example. In the movie reach, a battle effect between an ally character and an enemy character is generated, and in the battle effect, an effect occurs in which either an ally character or an enemy character appears and attacks the opponent.

  In the battle performance, for example, only when the variation is a big hit (or at a high rate when it is a big win), an effect that the teammate character attacks is generated, that is, when the teammate character attacks, the big hit in the variation is determined (or The big hit expectation is improved).

  Also, in the battle production, for example, even when the fluctuation is a big hit (or when the big hit expectation degree is high), even if the enemy character is attacked, the production that the ally avoids the attack occurs, that is, the enemy character's attack is avoided. Then the big hit is confirmed. In the flashback effect, which character finally appears and attacks in such a battle effect, a predetermined light guide plate (hereinafter referred to as a second light guide plate provided in the back unit 3000 as the predetermined light guide plate). 2810 (not shown)).

  FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline example of a flashback effect. FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of the continuation of the flashback effect shown in FIG. First, the peripheral control MPU displays an image indicating that a specific effect (hereinafter referred to as a battle effect) is executed on the effect display device 1600, and the movie reach (movie reach such as the variation pattern 12 shown in FIG. 153) is displayed. Equivalent).

  In the example of FIG. 158, an image on which the title character “Fateful battle has occurred” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that a plurality of types of title characters having different jackpot expectations may be provided. For example, when a white title is selected, the big hit expectation degree in the change is low, and when a red title is selected, the big hit expectation degree in the change is high.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU causes the second light guide plate 2810 to emit light so that the player can visually recognize the design of the teammate character on the second light guide plate 2810. At this time, the peripheral control MPU may cause the second light guide plate 2810 to blink at high speed or turn it on for a predetermined time.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU may emphasize the teammate character displayed on the second light guide plate 2810 by displaying the effect display device 1600 in black. At this time, the peripheral control MPU displays a predetermined display that emphasizes the ally character on the effect display device 1600 (for example, an aura or a backlight that surrounds the ally character displayed on the second light guide plate 2810). You may go. For example, the predetermined display may be used to suggest a big hit expectation degree, such as when the predetermined display is executed at a high rate when the lottery result in the change is a big hit.

  Moreover, a plurality of light guide plates (for example, light guide plates that emit light in blue, green, and red, respectively) on which the teammate characters are displayed may be provided, and the peripheral control MPU does not use the second light guide plate 2810. A light guide plate selected from a plurality of light guide plates may emit light. At this time, the big hit expectation degree may be determined so as to be different for each of the plurality of light guide plates.

  In this case, the display mode of the ally character in each light guide plate may be the same in all points other than the color, or may be different (specifically, for example, for the light guide plate that emits blue light) The character's whole body is displayed. Only the upper body of the teammate character is displayed on the light guide plate that emits green light, and only the face up of the teammate character is displayed on the light guide plate that emits red light).

  The peripheral control MPU may display a predetermined display on the effect display device 1600 while the second light guide plate 2810 is emitting light, or may turn off the effect display device 1600. The above-described title character display is an example of the predetermined display.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU stops the light emission of the second light guide plate 2810, and then displays the digest video of the ally character (for example, the digest of the video attacked by the ally character) on the effect display device 1600. Thereby, a player's tension can be heightened.

  The peripheral control MPU may select and display one digest video from a plurality of patterns of digest video. In this case, it is desirable that the big hit expectation in each pattern is different. In addition, the peripheral control MPU may execute a notice effect while displaying the digest video.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU displays the image of the enemy character on the effect display device 1600 after completing the display of the digest video of the ally character. The image of the enemy character is displayed in a display mode similar to the display mode displayed by the light emission of the second light guide plate 2810 (hereinafter also referred to as a light guide plate-like display mode).

  The display mode of the light guide plate style is, for example, similar to the friend character displayed on the second light guide plate 2810 in the region on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the region where the friend character is displayed on the second light guide plate 2810. In this mode, enemy characters are displayed in size. In the light guide plate-like display mode, it is desirable that the enemy character be expressed by single color brightness and shade. However, the size of the friendly character and the enemy character are not necessarily the same size (for example, the enemy character may be smaller than the friendly character), and the enemy character may be expressed using a plurality of colors. . By this light guide plate-like display mode, it seems to the player that the enemy character can be seen by the light emission of the back light guide plate after the friendly character is made visible by the light emission of the light guide plate in the foreground, By repeating this, it is possible to recognize that an effect that looks as if the light guide plates in the foreground and the back are alternately emitting light is being executed.

  In addition, the production using the light guide plate can give the player a great sense of expectation, but when there are a plurality of friendly characters and enemy characters, the light guide plate corresponding to each of all the characters is added to the pachinko machine 1. Mounting is difficult due to space and cost in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU can increase the number of allied characters and enemy characters without increasing the number of light guide plates by executing the above-described light guide plate-like display mode using the effect display device 1600. As a result, various effects for making the player have the above-mentioned expectation can be realized without increasing the number of light guide plates.

  As for the display pattern of the enemy character, a plurality of display patterns may be provided in the same manner as the display pattern of the friendly character displayed on the second light guide plate 2810. However, the enemy character is not preferable for the player. Therefore, it is desirable that the number of display patterns of enemy characters is less than the display pattern of the above-mentioned friendly characters (for example, friendly characters are displayed in blue, green, or red, but enemy characters are displayed in blue or green. )

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU ends the display of the enemy character having the same display mode as that of the light guide plate, and displays the digest video of the enemy character (for example, the digest of the video attacked by the teammate character) on the effect display device 1600. Thereby, a player's tension can be heightened.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU may select the enemy character digest video from a plurality of patterns according to the degree of expectation, or display the enemy character digest video, in the same manner as the friendly character digest video. A notice effect may be executed every other day. However, it is desirable that the number of digest video patterns of enemy characters is smaller than the number of digest video patterns of friendly characters.

  In addition, since the player does not want to see the enemy character, the display time of the enemy character and the digest video display time of the enemy character in the light guide plate-like display mode is displayed on the second light guide plate 2810 of the friend character. It is desirable to be shorter than the sum of the time and the digest video display tube of the ally character.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU ends the display of the enemy character's digest video, and then causes the second light guide plate 2810 to emit light again to display the image of the ally character. At this time, the peripheral control MPU may perform an effect similar to the first light emission of the second light guide plate 2810, or the light emission time may be shorter than the first light emission time of the second light guide plate 2810.

  In addition, for the second light guide plate light emission, the peripheral control MPU emits light from the plurality of light guide plates on which the teammate characters are displayed instead of causing the second light guide plate 2810 to emit light, similarly to the first light guide plate light emission. The light guide plate to be used may be selected according to the degree of expectation for jackpot.

  Note that the number of options of the light guide plate to emit light in the second light guide plate light emission may be the same as or less than the number of options in the first light guide plate light emission. When the number of options in the second light guide plate light emission is smaller than the number of options in the first light guide plate light emission, for example, an option with a low jackpot expectation (for example, an option with the lowest jackpot expectation) is excluded. It is desirable. Specifically, for example, when the first light guide plate light emission option is light emission of blue, green, or red (assuming that the big hit expectation increases in the order of blue, green, red), the second time The light guide plate light emission option is green or red light emission.

  Further, when the number of options for light emission of the second light guide plate is the same as the number of options for light emission of the first light guide plate, the contents of the options may be the same or different. Specifically, for example, when the first light guide plate light emission option is blue, green, or red light emission, the second light guide plate light emission option is blue, green, or red light emission, The light emission may be green, red, or gold (gold is expected to have a higher jackpot than red).

  Note that the time required from the first light-emitting effect of the second light guide plate 2810 on which the friend character is displayed to the second light-emitting effect of the second light guide plate 2810 on which the friend character is displayed is a specific effect. It is desirable that the time is longer than the time required until the first light guide effect of the second light guide plate 2810 on which the friend character is displayed is displayed after (title display “Fateful battle occurrence” in FIG. 158) is displayed. . Thereby, a tension can be given to a player. In particular, as described above, when a variation is provided in the display color or the like of the teammate character, the player can be given a sense of tension.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU displays a part of the above-described digest video of the teammate character after stopping the light emission of the second light guide plate 2810. Since it is a part of the digest video, it is displayed in a shorter time than the display time of the digest video described above. The peripheral control MPU may display a part of one digest video selected from a plurality of patterns of digest video. In this case, it is desirable that the big hit expectation in each pattern is different. In this case, it is desirable that the number of digest video patterns of the ally character displayed for the second time is smaller than the number of digest video patterns of the ally character displayed for the first time.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU may select which part of the teammate character's digest video is to be displayed according to the big hit expectation. In addition, the peripheral control MPU may execute a notice effect while displaying the digest video.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU displays a part of the digest video of the ally character, and then displays the enemy character on the effect display device 1600 in a light guide plate-like display mode. The display mode at this time may be the same as the first display mode of the enemy character's light guide plate, or may be a display mode in which the expected degree of jackpot is promoted.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU completely turns off the effect display device 1600 (that is, blacks out), and then, when the variation is a big hit, the teammate character is in a high ratio and the variation is out of place. Make enemy characters appear at a high rate, or do not allow any of your allies or enemy characters to appear. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU, for example, causes the second light guide plate 2810 to emit light again when displaying an ally character, and when displaying an enemy character, the effect display device 1600 again displays the light guide plate-like display mode. Display enemy characters. Thereafter, for example, an attack effect by the displayed character is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the peripheral control MPU may perform a display (for example, background rainbow) indicating the big hit determination on the effect display device 1600, for example, when the teammate character is finally displayed.

  Here, when the ally character is displayed on the second light guide plate 2810, the time from the first light guide plate effect to the second light guide plate effect is three times from the time required for the second light guide plate effect to be executed. It is desirable that the time required until the second light guide plate effect is executed is longer. This is because when the third light guide plate light-emitting effect is executed (that is, when the third teammate character display effect is executed), the expectation of the big hit is extremely high, so it takes time to generate the third light guide plate effect. This is because it is possible to give a player a sense of tension.

  Also, from the time required for the third light guide plate effect to be executed until the third light guide plate effect is executed, until the enemy character display effect is executed in the third light guide plate-like display mode until the end of the variation. It is desirable that this time is shorter. When the third light guide plate effect does not occur (that is, when the third enemy character display effect is executed), since the big hit expectation is very low, the execution time of the low hit big expectation is short and the next variation By making the transition, the player's satisfaction can be improved. Also, in such a case, if the enemy character is displayed forever, there is a possibility that the player's disgust will increase, and this is to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

  When neither the ally character nor the enemy character appears, the peripheral control MPU displays an image that does not include either the ally character or the enemy character on the effect display device 1600, or turns off the effect display device 1600. Or

  The peripheral control MPU alternates between the light emission of the light guide plate on which the friend character is displayed and the display of the enemy character on the effect display device 1600 in the light guide plate style before blacking out the effect display device 1600. You may perform the squealing effect to be performed. In the roaring effect, the display time of the friendly character and the display time of the enemy character may be gradually shortened, that is, the switching between the display of the friendly character and the display of the enemy character may be gradually accelerated.

  The peripheral control MPU displays on the second light guide plate 2810 the enemy character display of the light guide plate-like display mode in the effect display device 1600 from the middle of switching between the display of the friendly character and the enemy character in a short time. An effect of changing the display mode to the light guide plate-like display mode of the ally character may be executed. That is, the display content changes from “a friend of the light guide plate and the enemy of the display mode of the light guide plate” to “a friend of the light guide plate and a friend of the display mode of the light guide plate”. Note that it is desirable that the effect be selected at a high rate when the variation is a big hit (or only when it is a big hit).

  Due to the effect, the second light guide plate 2810 positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the player and the effect display device 1600 positioned on the back side of the second light guide plate 2810 when viewed from the player are alternately displayed. Since the ally character is displayed, it is possible to realize an effect with a three-dimensional effect as if the ally character jumped out of the effect display device 1600. In addition to the switching effect, the friend character may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a light guide plate-like display mode instead of displaying on the light guide plate.

  Note that the image of the ally character displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the effect may be the same as the display mode of the ally character displayed on the second light guide plate 2810, but an image that emphasizes the ally character of the light guide plate ( An image that emphasizes that it has popped out is preferred.

  When a plurality of friendly characters or a plurality of enemy characters are provided, the peripheral control MPU may change the displayed friendly character or enemy character halfway. For example, when displaying a digest video (part or all) of an ally character, displaying a digest video (part or all) of an enemy character, displaying a second ally character on the second light guide plate 2810, and 2 When displaying on the effect display device 1600 in the form of the light guide plate of the enemy character for the second time, both are examples of the timing of character change. In addition, when changing a display character on the way, it is desirable to change to a character with a high expectation degree of jackpot.

  Further, when the big hit expectation degree in the change is high, the peripheral control MPU may replace a part of the effect displaying the enemy character in the example of FIGS. 158 and 159 with the effect displaying the ally character. For example, instead of displaying an enemy character's digest video, a friendly character's digest video may be displayed. The player's expectation is improved by displaying the image of the friend character in the scene where the digest video of the enemy character is originally displayed.

  In the flashback effect, an ally character that is likely to lead to an advantageous result for the player is displayed on the second light guide plate 2810 in front of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the player, and an enemy character that is unlikely to lead to an advantageous result is displayed. By displaying on the effect display device 1600, it is easy for the player to recognize which character is likely to lead to an advantageous result.

  The peripheral control MPU emits at least one movable body (at the initial position) located behind the second light guide plate 2810 when viewed from the player when the second light guide plate 2810 is caused to emit light and the ally character is displayed. You may operate the thing located in the back of the 2nd light guide plate 2810, and may be located in the back of the 2nd light guide plate 2810 in the position after an operation | movement). In the state in which the light guide plate emits light and the teammate character is displayed, the player's consciousness is suitable for, for example, the light guide plate that emits light and the sound effect corresponding to the light emission of the light guide plate. In this state, by operating the movable body described above, it is possible to provide the player with hidden elemental game characteristics.

  In addition, in order to make the operation of the movable body described above a hidden element, the operation width during the operation of the movable body is smaller than the maximum operation width, sound or light accompanying the operation is not output, It is desirable that the light-emitting effect of the light guide plate on which the friend character is displayed continues until the end of the operation (that is, when the movable body returns to the initial position). Further, it is desirable that the peripheral control MPU operates the movable body in combination with the light emission of the light guide plate on which the teammate character is displayed at a high rate when the variation is a big hit.

  On the other hand, since the motion of the movable body described above is a hidden element game characteristic, if there is a correlation between the presence / absence of the motion of the movable body and the big hit expectation, the player pays attention only to the motion of the movable body. The flashback production itself can be awkward. Therefore, the big hit expectation may not depend on whether or not the movable body operates. In this case, when a flashback effect appears, it is desirable that there is a sufficient jackpot expectation (for example, a jackpot expectation value of 50% or more).

  In addition, this movable body can operate | move also in productions other than this flashback production. In effects other than the flashback effect, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, and the like are executed in accordance with the operation of the movable body. Specifically, for example, if the movable body operates when the first half of the SP reach is executed, the expectation degree of the big hit is increased, and if the movable body is operated in that case, the operation of the movable body is performed. Sound output and lamp are emitted. On the other hand, at the time of the operation of the movable body in the flashback effect, sound output or light emission according to the operation of the movable body may not be performed, and an effect on the winning of the special lottery result is performed. Sometimes, a dedicated sound that does not appear or light emission of the lamp may be output. In this way, dedicated sound output and dedicated lamp light emission may be performed, but since it is a hidden element game nature, dedicated sound output and dedicated lamp light emission are performed for a predetermined time (for example, It is preferable that the process is terminated after the elapse of a shorter time than the light emission time of the light guide plate shown in the upper middle diagram of FIG.

  In addition, when the second light guide plate 2810 emits light and a teammate character is displayed, the peripheral control MPU controls to change the display on the effect display device 1600 from a black image to a display mode different from the black image. May be. At that time, the peripheral control MPU may not output a sound when the video on the effect display device 1600 is switched, but may output a sound at a predetermined timing after the switching.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU simultaneously operates a plurality of movable bodies located behind the second light guide plate 2810 when viewed from the player when the second light guide plate 2810 is caused to emit light and a friend character is displayed. The plurality of movable bodies may be operated in a predetermined order. Thus, by operating a plurality of movable bodies, the hidden element can be given up to the player, and a situation in which the hidden element is not noticed by the player at all can be suppressed.

  The peripheral control MPU is a pre-reading effect that displays a friendly character by light emission from the light guide plate using the same or shorter time as the display time of the friendly character display by light emission from the first light guide plate in the flashback effect. An optical plate light emission pre-reading effect may be executed. In other words, the light guide plate having the same mode emits light continuously for a plurality of variations. In addition, when there are multiple types of light guide plates on which allied characters are displayed, only combinations that allow promotion that does not demote the jackpot expectation in continuous light emission of the light guide plate in the light guide plate light emission pre-reading effect are displayed. Is preferred. Specifically, for example, when the light guide plate light emission pattern is blue, green, or red (blue <green <red increases in order of big hit expectation), when light is emitted in green in the light guide plate light emission pre-reading effect After that, no blue light emission appears (if it appears, the big hit may be confirmed).

  Also, the peripheral control MPU may display an enemy character on the effect display device 1600 immediately before or immediately after the title display described above, and execute an effect of selecting an enemy character from the enemy characters. In this case, it is preferable that the selection rate of the enemy characters is determined so that the expectation degree of jackpot of each of the plurality of enemy characters is different. In addition, the peripheral control MPU displays an indicator indicating the degree of jackpot expectation of each of the plurality of enemy characters (for example, a star mark indicating the degree of jackpot expectation for each enemy character) on the effect display device 1600. Is desirable.

  Further, it is desirable that some of the plurality of enemy characters are selected only when the variation is a big hit (that is, the big hit is determined when the some enemy characters are selected). In addition, the peripheral control MPU may perform an effect of selecting an enemy character from the plurality of enemy characters by the player operating the effect operation unit 300 or the like. In this case, since the player selects an enemy character, the expectation degree for each enemy character jackpot is the same.

  In addition, a plurality of display patterns for displaying a plurality of enemy characters may be provided. In this case, the peripheral control MPU uses the display pattern selected from the plurality of display patterns, and the plurality of enemy characters. Is displayed. For example, the multiple enemy characters are “Shindo-kun (low expectation), Hayashi-kun (medium expectation), Yamashita-kun (high expectation), Nanase-kun (expected expectations), Hosoi-kun (decision of jackpot)” In the case of the five types of display patterns, for example, “Shindo-kun (low expectation), Hayashi-kun (medium expectation), Yamashita-kun (high expectation), Nanase-kun (expectation high), A pattern that displays all five types of "Hosoi-kun (decision of jackpot)", "Hayashi-kun (medium expectation), Yamashita-kun (expectation high), Nanase-kun (expected expectations), Hosoi-kun (decision of jackpot)" 4 types of patterns (display patterns in which the character with the lowest expectation is deleted) are included.

  Hereinafter, for example, an example in which a battle effect such as a flashback effect is executed in the short-time game state or the probability change state, and an enemy character is selected from a plurality of enemy characters in the battle effect will be described. If an effect to win a battle effect on an enemy character other than the enemy character whose jackpot is confirmed has already occurred after the most recent normal game state, the peripheral control MPU only battles after the battle effect in the variation corresponding to the jackpot The enemy character may be selected in the production.

  In other words, the enemy character who has won the battle performance in the state where the short-time game state or the probability change state continues (that is, without falling into the normal game state once after entering the short-time game state or the probability change state) It may be determined that a big hit (win) is confirmed when it is selected again in the subsequent battle effects. That is, the peripheral control MPU stores, for example, in the peripheral control RAM or the like the character that has won the battle effect until it falls from the short-time gaming state or the probability variation state to the normal gaming state. In the battle effect in which the enemy character is selected again, for example, the friend character may grasp the weak point of the enemy character and perform an effect that attacks the weak point.

  For example, a battle effect occurs in the short-time game state or the probability change state, wins `` Hayashi-kun '' and wins the big hit, the jackpot game ends, and in the short-time game state or the probability change state without falling to the normal game state Consider the case where a battle effect occurs. In this battle direction, “Shindo-kun (low expectation), Hayashi-kun (medium expectation), Yamashita-kun (high expectation), Nanase-kun (expected expectations), Hosoi-kun (decision of jackpot)” When displayed, if Hayashi-kun was originally selected, the expectation is in the process, but Hayashi-kun is selected because the battle effect has reoccurred without falling to the normal gaming state. If this happens, the jackpot will be confirmed.

  In other words, since the expectation level is not so high even if “Hayashi-kun” is selected, the player cannot enjoy the stage where “Hayashi-kun” appears. You can enjoy the production of Hayashi-kun. In other words, if the big hits continue until the transition to the timeless state (low probability non-time-short state) (so-called continuous change occurs), the enemy character that may lose as the number of consecutive big hits increases Will decrease, and the number of enemy characters will be increased. As a result, it is possible to realize a simulation game element in which a hero who was weak at first grows up every time he defeats an enemy.

  Also, such a jackpot finalizing effect may be selected only when the change is a change that has been won for the probable change jackpot, or the change corresponds to a hold at the end of the jackpot and is won for the jackpot. May be selected only when the change is a so-called (so-called “holding ream”) fluctuation, and the fluctuation is the big hit with the most balls (for example, the big hit of 16R + probability change), and the same big hit is also given to the hold. It may be selected only in some cases.

  However, the peripheral control MPU resets all the information that won the enemy character when the effect that won all the enemy characters in the battle effect is executed in the state where the short-time gaming state or the probability variation state continues. . That is, the peripheral control MPU deletes the information of the winning enemy character stored in the peripheral control RAM, for example. In such a case, the peripheral control MPU may execute a predetermined ending effect or the like in the jackpot game that has entered through the effect of winning the last enemy character when all the enemy characters are won. .

  Even in the case of shifting to the normal gaming state, the peripheral control MPU deletes the information of the winning enemy character stored in the peripheral control RAM or the like. The peripheral control MPU may perform these battle effects during the jackpot game.

[17. Attack decision production]
Hereinafter, an example of the attack determination effect that is an example of the winning suggestion effect of the special lottery result will be described. The attack determination effect is an effect for determining the type of attack of the ally character when the ally character is finally selected in the battle effect such as the flashback effect described above, for example.

  FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline example of the attack determination effect. The peripheral control MPU, for example, finally displays the ally character on the second light guide plate 2810 in the flashback effect described above, and then sets the pressing operation unit 303 to the operation enabled state, and determines “determination technique to be advanced” on the effect display device 1600. "!" Is displayed for a predetermined time. Hereinafter, in the attack determination effect, a period in which the pressing operation unit 303 is in the operation effective state is also referred to as an operation effective period. The peripheral control MPU displays on the effect display device 1600 a display prompting the player to press or repeatedly press the pressing operation unit 303 such as “Press!” While displaying the character or after displaying the character. To do.

  FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the technique selection table. In the following, the techniques that the teammate character will take out consist of three types of techniques that increase the degree of expectation of jackpot in the order of “punch”, “kick”, and “deadly technique”. The technique selection table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The technique selection table shows, for example, technique promotion patterns and distribution of technique promotion patterns according to the number of consecutive hits in each variation pattern.

  In the example of FIG. 161, a common distribution is used for all outlier variation patterns, and a common distribution is used for all jackpot variation patterns. Each of the skill promotion patterns indicates the correspondence between the number of times the pressing operation unit 303 is repeatedly hit and the technique in the operation effective state.

  For example, when the technique promotion pattern a is selected, the technique remains “punch” no matter how many times the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the operation effective state. In addition, for example, when the technique promotion pattern d is selected, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed once in the operation effective state, it is promoted to “punch”, and when pressed 21 times, it is promoted to “kick”. If it is pressed 51 times, it will be promoted to "Soul Move".

  Note that the above-described sorting is determined so that a technique promotion pattern that is easily promoted to a technique with a higher expectation degree for a big hit with a smaller number of consecutive hits is more easily selected at the time of a big hit than at the time of a loss. When the technique promotion pattern k in FIG. 161 is selected, the technique is promoted to a deadly technique by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 once in the operation effective state. The skill promotion pattern k is selected only at the time of big hit. Furthermore, a promotion pattern that is promoted to a deadly technique only when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed once in the operation enabled state is not included in the technique promotion pattern at the time of disconnection. That is, it is desirable to provide an effect that may appear only in the big hit variation pattern.

  In the example of FIG. 161, each promotion pattern indicates the correspondence between the number of times of pressing by the pressing operation unit 303 and the technique. For example, the technique and the pressing operation unit 303 indicated by the player are pressed. The correspondence with the promotion probability of the technique may be shown. That is, every time the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the operation enabled state, a technique promotion lottery may be performed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. In the example of FIG. 160, a technique promotion pattern is selected in which the technique is promoted in the order of punch, kick, and special move by hitting the pressing operation unit 303 continuously. Hereinafter, for example, it is assumed that the technique promotion pattern d in the example of FIG. 161 is selected.

  When the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed once during the operation effective period, the peripheral control MPU displays a display indicating that the technique has been promoted to punching on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period (upper middle diagram in FIG. 160). Subsequently, when the predetermined period ends, the peripheral control MPU displays on the effect display device 1600, for example, an image in which the teammate character is punching and an image that prompts the player to perform further pressing of the pressing operation unit 303. (Upper right diagram in FIG. 160). For example, when a technique promotion pattern in which a technique is promoted only up to punching is selected, such as the technique promotion patterns a and f, after these images are displayed, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed many times. However, the display during the operation effective period does not change.

  Subsequently, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed 21 times in the operation effective period, the peripheral control MPU displays a display indicating that the technique is promoted to the kick on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period (lower left in FIG. 160). Figure). Subsequently, for example, when the predetermined period ends, the peripheral control MPU displays on the effect display device 1600 an image in which the teammate character is kicking and an image that prompts the player to further hit the pressing operation unit 303. (The lower middle diagram of FIG. 160). For example, when a technique promotion pattern in which a technique is promoted only up to a kick is selected, such as the technique promotion patterns b, c, g, and h, the press operation unit 303 is displayed after these images are displayed. No matter how many times it is pressed, the display during the operation effective period does not change.

  Subsequently, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed 51 times during the operation effective period, the peripheral control MPU displays a display indicating that the technique has been promoted to the deadly technique on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period (lower part of FIG. 160). (Right figure). When the operation valid period elapses, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 becomes invalid, and the peripheral control MPU develops an attack effect by the determined technique using the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, the total of the display time of the image indicating that the technique has been promoted to punch, the display time that indicates that the technique has been promoted to kick, and the display time of the image that indicates that the technique has been promoted to the deadly technique, It is shorter than the operation validity period. Also, for example, a display time of an image indicating that a technique has been promoted to a punch (for example, 1 second), a display time that indicates that a technique has been promoted to a kick (for example, 2 seconds), and a technique that has been promoted to a deadly technique It is desirable that the time increases in the order of image display time (for example, 3 seconds).

  Even when the image indicating that the technique is promoted is being displayed, the pressing operation unit 303 may be in the operation effective state. In this case, for example, the peripheral control MPU may or may not display on the effect display device 1600 a display that prompts repeated pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 even during display of an image indicating that the technique has been promoted. Also good.

  In addition, for example, when the number of times of pressing in the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 reaches 21 during the display of the image indicating that the technique has been promoted to punch, the peripheral control MPU indicates that the technique has been promoted to punch. Display of the image indicating that the technique has been promoted to kick is stopped. Thereby, since the effect changes immediately after the 21st press of the pressing operation unit 303, the player can immediately detect the change of the effect.

  In addition, when the number of times of pressing in the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 reaches 21 during the display of the image indicating that the technique has been promoted to punch, the peripheral control MPU indicates that the technique has been promoted to punch. An image display effect indicating that the technique has been promoted to kick may be executed immediately after the end of the predetermined image display period. Thereby, since the player can hit the pressing operation unit 303 repeatedly during the display of the promotion image, it is possible to increase the possibility that the promotion effect to the kick is performed immediately after the promotion effect to the punch is completed. The player's willingness to participate in repeated hits of the part 303 increases.

  In addition, the above-mentioned thing is the same also when the frequency | count of pressing in the operation effective period of the press operation part 303 reaches | attains 51 times during the display of the image which shows that the technique was promoted to the kick.

  Further, when this battle effect is executed in a normal time (low probability non-time short state), the big hit expectation degree may be suggested by a combination of the skill promotion pattern and the motivation state of the motivation meter. FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the jackpot expectation degree table. The big hit expectation degree table shows the big hit expectation degree of the change in the combination of the color of the motivated state of the motivation meter and the technique that the teammate character brings out.

  162 is a technique with the highest expectation that can be promoted in the selected promotion pattern, for example. In the example of FIG. 161, the technique to be delivered in the technique promotion patterns a and f is a punch, and the technique to be delivered in the technique promotion patterns b, c, g, and h is a kick, and the technique promotion patterns d, e, The technique to be executed in i, j, k is a special technique. The peripheral control MPU refers to the special lottery result of the variation, and selects the motivation state and the promotion pattern in the repetitive strike effect in such a distribution that satisfies the big hit expectation degree indicated by the big hit expectation degree table.

  In the example of FIG. 162, for example, the combination of “punch + motivated state red” has a higher expectation of jackpot than the combination of “kick + motivated state green”. In this way, the big hit expectation degree may be set high depending on the motivation state even if the big hit expectation degree due to the technique is low.

  In the example of FIG. 159, the technique is promoted by pressing the pressing operation unit 303, but the technique may be promoted by operation of another operation unit. Specifically, for example, the technique may be promoted by a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. In this case, for example, one press of the above-described press operation unit 303 is replaced with a predetermined number (for example, one turn) of clockwise (or counterclockwise) rotation of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Note that, for example, both the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302 may be in an operation valid state, and the technique may be promoted by both operations. In this case, the peripheral control MPU, for example, displays on the effect display device 1600 to prompt continuous pressing of the pressing operation unit 303, but does not display to prompt the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and further 1 of the rotation operation unit 302. The circumference is equivalent to a plurality of times (for example, 10 times) of pressing by the pressing operation unit 303. Thus, while the technique promotion by the rotation operation unit 302 is a hidden effect, the technique is promoted in a shorter time than when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed by executing rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 that is a hidden effect. Can be made to make the player feel unexpected.

  Unlike the above-described example, a dedicated effect for prompting the player to operate the rotation operation unit 302 may be provided. Hereinafter, the dedicated effect will be described.

  FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the outline of the attack determination effect. FIG. 163 shows an effect example in the case where a technique promotion pattern in which a technique is promoted more than a kick is selected. In the following description, it is assumed that the technique promotion pattern d in FIG. 161 is selected. In addition, hereinafter, “number of consecutive hits” in FIG. 161 is read as “number of laps” of the rotation operation unit 302.

  The peripheral control MPU, for example, finally displays the teammate character on the second light guide plate 2810 in the flashback effect described above, and then sets the rotation operation unit 302 to the operation enabled state, and determines “determination technique to be advanced” on the effect display device 1600. "!" Etc. are displayed for a predetermined time (upper left figure in FIG. 163). In the description of FIG. 163, the operation effective period indicates a period during which the rotation operation unit 302 is in an operation effective state. The peripheral control MPU displays on the effect display device 1600 a display prompting the player to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 such as “Turn !!” while displaying the character or after displaying the character.

  Subsequently, when the rotation operation unit 302 makes one round in the operation effective period, the peripheral control MPU displays a display indicating that the technique has been promoted to punch on the effect display device 1600. In the example of FIG. 162, a message board on which “punching attack !!” is written is displayed (upper middle diagram of FIG. 163). Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU displays, for example, an image that prompts the player to further rotate the rotation operation unit 302 on the effect display device 1600 while leaving a message board display.

  Subsequently, when the rotation operation unit 302 further rotates in this state, the peripheral control MPU causes the player to rotate the message board little by little according to the number of rotations after the technique is promoted to punching. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (upper right diagram in FIG. 163). In addition, it is assumed that “Kick attack !!!” is written on the back side of the message board where “Punch attack !!” is written. When the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, a display in a mode in which the message board rotates little by little is performed on the effect display device 1600.

  Thus, immediately after the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is started, only the characters “Punch attack!” Are visually recognized. Thereafter, as the number of rotations of the rotation operation unit 302 increases, the characters “Punch attack!” Are gradually recognized. It becomes difficult. Subsequently, the characters “Punch Attack!” And “Kick Attack!” Are no longer visible (the lower left figure in FIG. 163), and the characters “Kick Attack!” Appear little by little. Eventually, the surface on which the characters “kick attack !!” on the message board are faced to the player side (the lower middle diagram in FIG. 163) and parallel to the surface of the effect display device 1600 Display is performed (lower right diagram in FIG. 163).

  In the technique promotion pattern d, the technique is promoted to punch when the rotation operation section 302 is rotated once, and the technique is promoted to kick when the rotation operation section 302 is rotated 21 times. The peripheral control MPU, for example, gradually rotates the message board in such a manner that the characters “punch attack !!” can be visually recognized while the number of laps of the rotation operation unit 302 in the operation valid period is from the first to the ninth lap. (In other words, the characters “Punch Attack !!” gradually become difficult to visually recognize).

  For example, when the number of laps is the tenth lap, the peripheral control MPU displays the message board in such a manner that neither the characters “punch attack!” Nor “kick attack!” Can be visually recognized. For example, the peripheral control MPU gradually rotates the message board in a manner in which the characters “kick attack !!” can be visually recognized during the period from the 11th to the 20th week (that is, gradually “ "Kick attack!" Is displayed easily). Then, the peripheral control MPU, for example, when the number of laps is the 21st lap, the surface on which the letters “kick attack !!” on the message board are faced to the player side and the surface of the effect display device 1600 Display in a manner that is parallel to the.

  For example, when the technique promotion pattern b is selected, the technique remains punched even if the number of laps reaches 21 laps, but the peripheral control MPU does not stop until the lap number reaches the 20th lap. The effect similar to the technique promotion pattern d is performed, and the effect on the 20th lap may be maintained from the 21st to the 50th lap. As a result, the player cannot recognize which skill promotion pattern has been selected immediately after the start of the operation of the rotary operation unit 302, so that the timing at which the player's expectation decreases can be delayed.

  If the first operation of the rotation operation unit 302 after the rotation operation unit 302 is in the operation enabled state is clockwise rotation, the peripheral control MPU rotates the message board in the effect display device 1600 thereafter. The display mode may be a mode in which the message board rotates clockwise. Similarly, when the first operation of the rotation operation unit 302 after the rotation operation unit 302 is in the operation enabled state is a counterclockwise rotation, the peripheral control MPU performs a message board in the subsequent effect display device 1600. The rotation display mode may be a mode in which the message board rotates counterclockwise.

  In such a case, it is assumed that the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 clockwise or counterclockwise after the rotation operation unit 302 enters the operation enabled state. In this case, it is desirable for the peripheral control MPU to execute an effect according to the first rotation direction, for example. Specifically, for example, when the rotation operation unit 302 is first rotated clockwise after the rotation operation unit 302 is in the operation enabled state, the peripheral control MPU performs the rotation direction of the message board on the effect display device 1600. Even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise (that is, when a determination different from the determination for the first operation is made), the message on the effect display device 1600 is determined. Rotate the board clockwise.

  If the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation direction of the message board of the effect display device 1600 are completely matched, for example, although it is about to be promoted from a punch attack to a kick attack, it rotates in that state. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the reverse direction, the punch attack returns to a low expectation level, and the player's feeling of expectation is suppressed. Therefore, an effect corresponding to the initial rotation direction is provided as described above. It is desirable to execute.

[18-1. Front light guide plate fixing method]
Hereinafter, an example of a method for fixing the front light guide plate 2610 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 169. FIG. 164 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the center accessory 2500 and the table effect unit 2600 cut along line AA in FIG. 164 (b), and FIG. 164 (b) is a view of the center accessory 2500 and the table effect unit 2600. It is a front view.

  FIG. 165 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 166 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram of a partial cross section of the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610, and the game panel 1100, taken along line BB in FIG. 165. FIG. 167 (b) is a schematic diagram of another example of a partial cross section of the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610, and the game panel 1100, cut along line BB in FIG. 165. FIG. 167 (c) is a schematic diagram of still another example of a partial cross section of the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610, and the game panel 1100, taken along the line BB in FIG. 165. Note that FIG. 167 is a diagram for describing an outline of a partial cross section, and the shape, size, and the like of each part in FIG. 167 do not necessarily match those in the other drawings.

  FIG. 168 is an exploded perspective view in which the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610, and the stage rear end defining member are disassembled. FIG. 169 is a rear view of the center accessory 2500 and the front effect unit 2600.

  The center accessory 2500 has an outer peripheral wall 2507 provided so that the game ball B does not enter the area where the front light guide plate 2610 inside the center accessory 2500 is attached. In FIG. 164 and the like, an outer peripheral wall 2507 disposed along the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in front view and an outer peripheral wall 2507 disposed along the outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the front view are illustrated. Has been. The outer peripheral wall 2507 protrudes substantially perpendicularly to the front surface direction of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a first panel contact portion 2508 and a second panel contact portion 2509 that contact the game panel 1100 when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. From the rear end of the outer peripheral wall 2507 when viewed from the front, a first panel abutting portion 2508 that protrudes substantially perpendicularly to the inner direction of the center accessory 2500 is provided. The center accessory 2500 has a second panel abutting portion 2509 that protrudes substantially vertically rearward when viewed from the front, from the inner end of the first panel abutting portion 2508 in the center accessory 2500.

  As shown in the drawing, the first panel contact portion 2508 and the second panel contact portion 2509 may be formed integrally with the outer peripheral wall 2507, or are separate members from the outer peripheral wall 2507. It may be attached to the outer peripheral wall 2507 with screws or the like.

  The front light guide plate 2610 is attached to two light guide plate attachment portions 2910 provided in the center object 2500. In FIG. 164 and the like, the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 disposed along the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 on the left side when viewed from the front, and the guide disposed along the inner periphery of the center accessory 2500 on the right side when viewed from the front. An optical plate mounting portion 2910 is shown. The light guide plate mounting portion 2910 is disposed in a region where the game ball B does not roll.

  The shape of the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 is, for example, a shape along the outer peripheral wall 2507 of the center accessory 2500, so that the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 can reinforce the outer peripheral wall 2507 of the center accessory 2500.

  As shown in the figure, the center accessory 2500 and the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 may be integrally formed, or the center accessory 2500 and the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 are separate members, and the center accessory 2500 The light guide plate attaching portion 2910 may be attached by screws or the like.

  The light guide plate mounting portion 2910 includes a cylindrical portion 2911 that protrudes toward the back side, and can be screwed into a screw for mounting the front light guide plate 2610. Further, the front light guide plate 2610 has a screw insertion portion 2615 for inserting a screw 2950 at a position corresponding to the cylindrical portion 2911 when the front light guide plate 2610 is overlapped from the back side of the center accessory 2500. Is formed. The insertion part may be an insertion hole or a U-shaped cutout part.

  That is, the front light guide plate 2610 is overlapped from the back side of the center accessory 2500, the screw 2950 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 2615 from the back side, and the screw 2950 is screwed into the cylindrical portion 2911, whereby the front light guide plate 2610 is screwed to the center accessory 2500.

  The light guide plate mounting portion 2910 is disposed at a position closer to the front end by a predetermined width (for example, L in FIG. 164 (a)) than the rear end of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front. The predetermined width is a value in which a predetermined margin is provided for the thickness of the front light guide plate 2610. As the predetermined width is larger, for example, a space is provided between the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100, so that a room for bending the front light guide plate 2610 when the front light guide plate 2610 expands due to a temperature change is provided. .

  However, the distance between the front light guide plate 2610 and another image display device (for example, another light guide plate or effect display device 1600) varies depending on the predetermined width. That is, the perspective between the image displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 and the image displayed on the other light guide plate or the effect display device 1600 varies depending on the predetermined width. However, it is not always necessary that the predetermined width is large.

  In the example of FIG. 167 (a), the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 protrudes substantially perpendicularly to the inner side of the outer peripheral wall 2507 from the rear end (first panel contact portion 2508) of the outer peripheral wall 2507 when viewed from the front. . Thereby, even if the front light guide plate 2610 expands due to a temperature change, the outer peripheral wall 2507 is less likely to be damaged.

  As shown in the example of FIG. 167 (b), the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 is closer to the front end of a predetermined width (for example, G in FIG. 167 (b)) than the rear end of the outer peripheral wall 2507 when viewed from the front. May protrude substantially perpendicularly to the inner side of the outer peripheral wall 2507. The predetermined width G is preferably a value satisfying, for example, H / 2 ≦ G <H (H is a length in the front-rear direction of the outer peripheral wall 2507 when viewed from the front).

  For example, even when G <H / 2, when the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the rear end position of the front light guide plate 2610 when viewed from the front is the rear end of the outer peripheral wall 2507. The position of the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 only needs to be determined so as to be closer to the front end of a predetermined width (for example, G ′ (for example, H / 2 ≦ G ′ <H) in FIG. 167 (b)). . Even if G <H / 2, the distance D in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the outer peripheral wall 2507 to the front end of the tubular portion 2911 when viewed from the front may satisfy H / 2 ≦ D <H. That's fine.

  In the example of FIG. 167 (c), similar to FIG. 167 (a), the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 projects substantially perpendicularly from the rear end of the outer peripheral wall 2507 to the inner side of the outer peripheral wall 2507 when viewed from the front. However, the cylindrical portion 2911 projects to the front end side when the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 is viewed from the front, and the length of the cylindrical portion 2911 in the front-rear direction is longer as an example of FIG. 167 (a). .

  Specifically, when the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the distance in the front-rear direction between the rear end position of the front light guide plate 2610 and the rear end of the outer peripheral wall 2507 when viewed from the front is a predetermined width ( For example, the length of the tubular portion 2911 in the front-rear direction is determined so as to satisfy the condition of G ′ (for example, H / 2 ≦ G ′ <H) in FIG. 167 (c). In the example of FIG. 167 (c), if the condition is satisfied, the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 is closer to the front end of a predetermined width (<G ′) than the rear end of the outer peripheral wall 2507 when viewed from the front. You may protrude from the position.

  In the example of FIG. 167 (c), a position in which the distance in the front-rear direction from the protrusion start position of the tubular portion 2911 in the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 is longer than in the examples of FIG. 167 (a) and FIG. 167 (b). A front light guide plate 2610 is attached. Thereby, for example, when the front light guide plate 2610 expands and contracts due to a temperature change or the like, the cylindrical portion 2911 is likely to move in the expansion and contraction direction, so that damage to the front light guide plate 2610 can be suppressed.

  In the example of FIGS. 167 (b) and 167 (c), when the front light guide plate 2610 expands due to a temperature change, the outer periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 contacts the position near the front end of the outer peripheral wall 2507. The closer to the front end of the outer peripheral wall 2507, the lower the strength against the outward force of the outer peripheral wall 2507. Therefore, when the front light guide plate 2610 further expands in this state, the front light guide plate 2610 causes the outer peripheral wall 2507 to be outward. As a result, the front light guide plate 2610 can be prevented from being deformed in the front-rear direction. This also provides a room for the front light guide plate 2610 to bend in the front-rear direction when the front light guide plate 2610 expands.

  Moreover, the cylindrical part 2911 may protrude in the back side at the time of seeing the light-guide plate attaching part 2910 in the front view like the example of FIG. 167 (a), and FIG. 167 (b) and FIG. 167 (c). ), The light guide plate mounting portion 2910 may protrude to the front side when viewed from the front. In addition, when the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500 as in the example of FIG. 167, it is desirable that the outer periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 does not contact the center accessory 2500. This is to provide room for the front light guide plate 2610 to expand in the outer peripheral direction.

  The light guide plate mounting portion 2910 is disposed on the back side of the rear end of the outer peripheral wall 2507 when viewed from the front unless the front light guide plate 2610 is in contact with other members or the like disposed in the depth direction when viewed from the front. It may be. Specifically, for example, the light guide plate attachment portion 2910 may protrude from the second panel contact portion 2509 toward the inner side of the outer peripheral wall 2507.

  When the front light guide plate 2610 is screwed to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 is in contact with the light guide plate attachment portion 2910 only at the cylindrical portion 2911 protruding to the back side of the light guide plate attachment portion 2910. . Thereby, in a region other than the cylindrical portion 2911 of the light guide plate mounting portion 2910, when a space is provided between the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 and the front light guide plate 2610, the front light guide plate 2610 expands due to a temperature change. Is provided with room for the front light guide plate 2610 to bend.

  Note that one or more reinforcing ribs having the same height as the cylindrical portion 2911 may be provided on the back surface of the light guide plate mounting portion 2910. In this case, in the state where the front light guide plate 2610 is screwed to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 contacts the reinforcing rib. Thereby, the front light guide plate 2610 can be firmly fixed, and the strength of the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 against the force in the depth direction of the front view can be increased.

  When the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 has a thickness for forming a screw hole, the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 may have a screw hole instead of the cylindrical portion 2911. In this case, the front light guide plate 2610 and the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 come into contact with each other in a state where the front light guide plate 2610 is screwed to the center accessory 2500. Accordingly, the front light guide plate 2610 can be strongly fixed. For example, in an environment where the temperature change of the front light guide plate 2610 is small, the front light guide plate 2610 may be fixed using such screw holes. .

  The diameter of the screw insertion portion 2615 that is the insertion hole is desirably a value obtained by adding a predetermined margin to the diameter of the screw portion of the screw 2950. Thereby, damage to the front light guide plate 2610 when the front light guide plate 2610 expands or contracts due to a temperature change can be suppressed.

  As described above, the screw insertion portion 2615 may be an insertion hole or a notch portion such as a U-shape. The effect of suppressing the bending of the front light guide plate 2610 due to the temperature change described above can be increased as the ratio of the notch portion in the screw insertion portion 2615 is increased. On the other hand, the front light guide plate 2610 can be fixed more strongly as the ratio of the insertion holes in the screw insertion portion 2615 increases. Therefore, for example, a notch portion may be provided at a fixed location near the heat source such as an LED or a movable body, and an insertion hole may be provided at a fixed location far from the heat source.

  The screws 2950 stopped by at least a part of the cylindrical portion 2911 may be stopped at a position that can be visually recognized by the player. For example, the screws 2950 fixed to the two cylindrical portions 2911 on the left side of the front view and the cylindrical portion 2911 on the lower right side of the front view (see, for example, FIG. 164 (b)) are located in an area that is visible to the player. ing. Further, since the game ball B does not roll in the area, the player can easily visually recognize the area even during the game. Thereby, not only the hall clerk but also the player can check the screw fixing trouble of the front light guide plate 2610 during the game, so the check burden due to the hall can be reduced.

  Further, the screw 2950 stopped by at least a part of the cylindrical portion 2911 may be stopped at a position where it cannot be visually recognized by the player. For example, when the right decorative body 2506 attached to the center accessory 2500 is opaque, the screw 2950 at the upper left of the rear view (see, for example, FIGS. 164 (b) and 169) is not visible to the player. It is. Since at least a part of the screw 2950 is invisible, the design of the center accessory 2500 is improved. Although the front light guide plate 2610 is transparent, the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 and the like are not shown in FIG.

  Therefore, for example, painting of each part of the center accessory 2500 so that a screw 2950 near the heat source such as an LED or a movable body is visible from the player, and a screw 2950 far from the heat source is not visible from the player. In addition, various decorative bodies may be arranged.

  In addition, a screw insertion hole 2912 for attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100 is formed in the center accessory 2500. The diameter of the screw insertion hole 2912 is smaller than the diameter of the screw hole of the cylindrical portion 2911, for example. Accordingly, it is possible to distinguish easily between a screw insertion hole 2912 for attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100 and a screw hole of the cylindrical portion 2911 for attaching the front light guide plate 2610 to the center accessory 2500. it can.

  Further, the screw insertion hole 2912 may be formed in a region where the game ball B does not roll, or may be formed in a region where the game ball B rolls. The central area where the game ball B of the street center role does not roll is an effect display area in which the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 are arranged. Therefore, by forming at least a part of the screw insertion holes 2912 in the area where the game ball B does not roll, the ratio of the center accessory 2500 (particularly the effect display area in the center accessory 2500) in the game panel 1100 is increased. Can be realized, and as a result, a powerful production can be realized. Further, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the area for planting the obstacle nail on the game panel 1100 while increasing the ratio.

  For example, the screw insertion hole 2912 formed in the center on the left side of the front view (see, for example, FIG. 164 (b)) is formed in an area where the game ball B does not roll, and the screw insertion hole 2912 It may also be used as an insertion hole for attaching the optical plate 2610 to the center accessory 2500.

  In this case, the front light guide plate 2610 is overlapped from the back side of the center accessory 2500, and the screw 2950 is inserted into the screw insertion hole 2912 from the front side of the center accessory 2500, and the screw 2950 corresponds to the screw insertion hole 2912. The front light guide plate 2610 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 2615, and the screw is screwed into a screw hole provided in the game panel 1100.

  The center accessory 2500 is provided with a stage rear end demarcating member 2504 for preventing the game ball B flowing down to the stage 2503 from falling behind the center accessory 2500. The protrusion 2505 of the stage rear end defining member 2504 may abut a part of the lower end of the front light guide plate 2610. In this case, the front light guide plate 2610 is connected to the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 and the stage rear end defining member 2504. It is fixed to the center accessory 2500 so as to be sandwiched.

  For example, a screw hole for screwing the front light guide plate 2610 may be provided in the protruding portion 2505. In this case, the front light guide plate 2610 is overlapped from the front side of the stage rear end defining member 2504, and a screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion 2615 of the front light guide plate 2610 corresponding to the screw hole from the front side of the center accessory 2500, The front light guide plate 2610 is screwed to the stage rear end defining member 2504 by screwing the screw into the screw hole of the stage rear end defining member corresponding to the screw insertion portion 2615.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 has a rebound preventing member for preventing the game ball B from entering the effect display area (the area where the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 are arranged) inside the center accessory 2500. May be attached. The rebound preventing member is disposed on the upper part of the stage 2503. A screw hole for screwing the front light guide plate 2610 may be provided in the rebound preventing member, and the front light guide plate 2610 may be screwed.

[18-2. Another example 1 of fixing method of front light guide plate]
Hereinafter, another example 1 of the method of attaching the front light guide plate 2610 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 (a) is a front view of another example of the center actor 2500 and the front effect unit 2600, and FIG. 170 (b) is an enlarged perspective view of a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. The center accessory 2500 includes a plurality (four in the example of FIG. 70A) of light guide plate mounting portions 2920 having a predetermined shape protruding inward of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500. The light guide plate mounting portion 2920 is disposed at the upper left part of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 in the front view upper right part, the front view upper right part, the front view left lower part, and the front view right lower part. The area where the game ball B does not roll.

  In the example of FIG. 170 (a), the shape of the light guide plate mounting portion 2920 in the upper left part of the front view, the lower left part of the front view, and the lower right part of the front view is rectangular. The shape of the light guide plate mounting portion 2920 in the upper right part of the front view is a shape in which the hypotenuse of the right triangle is replaced with the curved portion on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500.

  The light guide plate mounting portion 2920 in the upper left portion of the front view and the lower left portion of the front view is extended from the center accessory 2500 so that only one side of the light guide plate mounting portion 2920 is connected to the outer peripheral wall 2507. The light guide plate mounting portion 2920 in the lower right portion of the front view is extended from the center accessory 2500 so that two sides of the light guide plate mounting portion 2920 are connected to the outer peripheral wall 2507. The light guide plate mounting portion 2920 at the upper right portion of the front view is extended from the curved portion of the center accessory 2500.

  In the example of FIG. 170 (a), the light guide plate mounting portion 2920 in the upper left part of the front view and the lower left part of the front view, the light guide plate attachment part 2920 in the upper right part of the front view, and the light guide plate attachment part 2920 in the lower right part of the front view. Of the length of the outer periphery of the light guide plate mounting portion 2920, the ratio of the length of the portion connected to the outer peripheral wall 2507 is increased.

  The greater the proportion of the length of the outer periphery of the light guide plate mounting portion 2920 that is connected to the outer peripheral wall 2507, the greater the strength of the light guide plate mounting portion 2920 in the front-rear direction and the leading to the center accessory 2500. The light plate can be attached strongly. On the contrary, the smaller the ratio, the lower the strength of the light guide plate mounting portion 2920 in the front-rear direction, so that there is room for the front light guide plate 2610 to bend in the front-rear direction. Therefore, for example, the closer to the heat source such as an LED or a movable body, the smaller the proportion of the length of the outer periphery of the light guide plate mounting portion 2920 that is connected to the outer peripheral wall 2507, and the larger the proportion as the distance from the heat source is. Good.

  Compared with the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 described with reference to FIG. 164 and the like, the light guide plate mounting portion 2920 has a smaller area in the region overlapping the front light guide plate 2610, and thus the visibility of the front light guide plate 2610 is improved. Further, when the front light guide plate 2610 expands due to a temperature change, a space for bending the front light guide plate 2610 can be increased.

  The center accessory 2500 and the light guide plate mounting portion 2920 may be integrally formed, or the center accessory 2500 and the light guide plate mounting portion 2920 are separate members, and the light guide plate mounting is attached to the center accessory 2500. The part 2920 may be attached by screws or the like. In the example of FIG. 170, the center accessory 2500 includes four light guide plate attachment portions 2920, but the number of light guide plate attachment portions 2920 may be three or less, or may be five or more.

  The light guide plate mounting portion 2920 includes a cylindrical portion 2921 that protrudes to the back side and can be screwed with a screw for mounting the front light guide plate 2610. Further, a screw insertion for inserting a screw 2950 into the front light guide plate 2610 at a position corresponding to the screw hole of the cylindrical portion 2921 when the front light guide plate 2610 is overlapped from the back side of the center accessory 2500 is performed. A portion 2615 is formed.

  That is, the front light guide plate 2610 is overlapped from the back side of the center accessory 2500, the screw 2950 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 2615 from the back side, and the screw 2950 is screwed into the cylindrical portion 2921, whereby the front light guide plate 2610 is screwed to the center accessory 2500. The light guide plate mounting portion 2920 is disposed at a position closer to the front end by a predetermined width than the rear end when the center accessory 2500 is viewed from the front. The predetermined width is a value in which a predetermined margin is provided for the thickness of the front light guide plate 2610.

  The light guide plate mounting portion 2920 may have a reinforcing rib 2922 that protrudes toward the back side that reinforces the cylindrical portion 2921. In the example of FIG. 170, four reinforcing ribs 2922 are provided so as to form a cross shape around the cylindrical portion 2921.

  The reinforcing rib 2922 may have the same height as the cylindrical portion 2921. Thereby, when the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 comes into contact with the front light guide plate 2610, so that the front light guide plate 2610 can be strongly fixed. Further, at least one reinforcing rib 2922 (for example, the leftmost reinforcing rib 2922 in FIG. 170 (b)) may be formed integrally with the outer peripheral wall 2507 of the center accessory 2500. Thereby, the intensity | strength of the light-guide plate attaching part 2920 can be raised.

[18-3. Another example 2 of fixing method of front light guide plate]
Hereinafter, another example 2 of the method of attaching the front light guide plate 2610 will be described with reference to FIG. 171 (a) to 171 (c) are front views showing an outline of another example of the center accessory 2500. FIG. 171 (a) to (c), for convenience, components other than the center accessory 2500 and a game panel mounting portion 2930, a screw insertion portion 2931, a light guide plate mounting portion 2940, and a screw insertion portion 2941 which will be described later are omitted. Has been.

  FIG. 171 (d) is a schematic view of another example of a partial cross section obtained by cutting the center accessory 2500 attached to the front light guide plate 2610 and attached to the game panel 1100 along the line AA in FIG. 171 (c). is there. Note that FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the outline, and the shape, size, and the like of each part in FIG. 171 do not necessarily match those of the other drawings.

  The center accessory 2500 has a game panel attachment portion 2930 for attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100. The game panel mounting portion 2930 is disposed, for example, in an area where the game ball B does not roll along the inside of the outer periphery on the left side when viewed from the front of the center accessory 2500. Further, for example, the shape of the game panel mounting portion 2930 is, for example, a shape along the outer peripheral wall 2507 of the center accessory 2500, and from the rear end of the outer peripheral wall 2507 when viewed from the front to the inner side of the center accessory 2500. It protrudes almost vertically.

  By providing the game panel mounting portion 2930 in the area where the game ball B does not roll, the ratio of the center accessory 2500 (particularly the effect display area in the center accessory 2500) in the game panel 1100 can be increased, and consequently A powerful production can be realized. Further, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the area for planting the obstacle nail on the game panel 1100 while increasing the ratio.

  The game panel attachment portion 2930 is formed with a screw insertion portion 2931 through which a screw for attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100 is inserted. The center accessory 2500 is overlaid from the front side of the game panel 1100 so that the screw insertion portion 2931 overlaps the screw hole provided in the game panel, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion 2931 from the front side of the center accessory 2500. The center accessory 2500 is screwed to the game panel 1100 by screwing into the screw holes of the game panel 1100.

  In the example of FIG. 171 (a), the center accessory 2500 has a light guide plate attachment portion 2940 for attaching the front light guide plate 2610 to the center accessory 2500. The light guide plate mounting portion 2940 protrudes from the game panel mounting portion 2930 toward the inside of the center accessory 2500. The light guide plate attachment portion 2940 is formed with a screw insertion portion 2941 through which a screw for attaching the front light guide plate 2610 to the light guide plate attachment portion 2940 is inserted. As shown in the example of FIG. 171 (a), the light guide plate mounting portion 2940 protrudes from the game panel mounting portion 2930 toward the inner side of the center accessory 2500, so that the light guide plate mounting portion 2940 is likely to be in the front-rear direction. As a result, the front light guide plate 2610 is also likely to be in the front-rear direction.

  The front light guide plate 2610 is overlapped from the front side of the center accessory 2500 so that the screw insertion portion 2941 overlaps the screw hole provided in the front light guide plate 2610, and the front side of the front light guide plate 2610 is placed in the screw hole of the front light guide plate 2610. Then, the front light guide plate 2610 is screwed to the center accessory 2500 by being screwed into the screw insertion portion 2941.

  In addition, the kind of screw used for the screw insertion part 2931 and the screw insertion part 2941 may be the same, and may differ. Moreover, the magnitude | size of the screw insertion part 2931 and the screw insertion part 2941 may be the same, and may differ. When the types of screws used for the screw insertion portion 2931 and the screw insertion portion 2941 are different, or when the sizes of the screw insertion portion 2931 and the screw insertion portion 2941 are different, at the time of assembly of the pachinko machine 1, It is possible to easily determine whether the center insertion object 2500 is a screw insertion part 2931 for attaching to the gaming panel 1100 or the front light guide plate 2610 for screw attachment part 2941.

  In the example of FIG. 171 (b), a screw insertion portion 2941 for attaching the front light guide plate 2610 is formed in the game panel attachment portion 2930. That is, in the example of FIG. 171 (b), the game panel mounting portion 2930 is also used as a light guide plate mounting portion. By using the game panel mounting portion 2930 as a light guide plate mounting portion, it is possible to increase the area in the inner area of the outer peripheral wall 2507 where the member of the center accessory 2500 is not disposed, and to arrange the area in the depth direction. The visibility of the effect display area, the movable body, the decorative body, the lamp, and the like is improved.

  Note that the screw insertion portion 2931 is preferably formed at a position that does not overlap the front light guide plate 2610 in the front-rear direction when the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500. When the screw insertion portion 2931 is formed at the overlapping position, when the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500 before the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the screw insertion portion 2931. This is because it is difficult to insert the screw into the screw insertion portion 2931.

  Further, for example, the shorter the distance E between the screw insertion portion 2931 and the screw insertion portion 2941 is, the stronger the game panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the front light guide plate 2610 are attached to each other. The center accessory 2500 and the front light guide plate 2610 are loosely attached.

  In the example of FIG. 171 (c), the center accessory 2500 has a light guide plate attachment portion 2940 for attaching the front light guide plate 2610 to the center accessory 2500. For example, the light guide plate mounting portion 2940 is disposed along the inside of the outer periphery on the left side when viewed from the front of the center accessory 2500.

  Further, the light guide plate mounting portion 2940 is disposed in a region overlapping the game panel mounting portion 2930 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the area | region where the member of the center accessory 2500 arrange | positioned at the inner area | region of the outer peripheral wall 2507 is not arrange | positioned can be increased, and the effect display area | region arrange | positioned in the depth direction of the said area | region, a movable body, a decoration body, And visibility of lamps and the like is improved. In addition, the light guide plate mounting portion 2940 is disposed, for example, at a position close to the front end of a predetermined width (for example, I in FIG. 171 (c)) from the rear end when viewed from the front.

  Similarly to FIG. 171 (a), the light guide plate attachment portion 2940 is formed with a screw insertion portion 2941 for attaching the front light guide plate 2610 to the light guide plate attachment portion 2940. Note that the screw insertion portion 2931 and the screw insertion portion 2941 are desirably formed at positions that do not overlap in the front-rear direction. When the screw insertion portion 2931 and the screw insertion portion 2941 are formed at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction, the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500 before attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100. This is because the front light guide plate 2610 blocks the screw insertion portion 2931 and it is difficult to insert the screw into the screw insertion portion 2931.

  Note that the game panel attachment portion 2930 may be formed integrally with the outer peripheral wall 2507 or may be a member different from the outer peripheral wall 2507 and attached to the outer peripheral wall 2507 with screws or the like. Similarly, the light guide plate mounting portion 2940 may be formed integrally with the outer peripheral wall 2507 or the game panel mounting portion 2930, or may be a separate member from the outer peripheral wall 2507 and the game panel mounting portion 2930. It may be attached to 2507 or the game panel attaching part 2930 with screws or the like.

  In each drawing of FIG. 171, only one gaming panel mounting portion 2930 and one or zero light guide plate mounting portions 2940 are shown. However, the center accessory 2500 includes a plurality of gaming panel mounting portions 2930 and a plurality of guiding panels. You may have the optical plate attaching part 2940. FIG. In addition, the game panel attachment portion 2930 and the light guide plate attachment portion 2940 protrude substantially vertically forward when viewed from the front, such as the cylindrical portion 2911 in FIG. 167 (b), instead of the screw insertion portion 2941. You may have a cylindrical part which has the insertion part 2941. FIG.

[19. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU executes whether or not the central pressing operation unit 303a has been operated using the detection history by the pressing detection sensor 381 acquired every cycle (cycle in which the timer interrupt process is performed). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation determination flag is turned off even though the press detection sensor 381 detects the press, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. . In addition, the peripheral control MPU performs an operation determination flag when pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 continuously for n cycles or more in the latest frame (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than the total number of cycles of one frame). By turning ON, it is possible to suppress an error in operation determination due to erroneous detection of the pressure detection sensor 381 such as noise and chattering, and consequently, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In addition, since the length of the bit string in the work area 1261 that stores the detection history of the pressure detection sensor 381 acquired for each cycle is the same as the total number of cycles in one frame, the work area 1261 is displayed at the time of frame update. The entire detection history of the pressure detection sensor 381 in the latest frame can be stored, and the memory capacity used for the work area 1261 can be saved.

  In addition, the production operation unit 300 may include a plurality of press detection sensors, and in this case, it is possible to reduce a press detection omission when the player presses the center press operation unit 303a. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON when any of the plurality of press detection sensors detects a press continuously for n cycles or more, so that the player can set the central press operation unit 303a. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation where the operation determination flag is turned off even though the player presses the button, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest of the player.

  Moreover, the priority order may be determined in advance for the plurality of press detection sensors 381, and the peripheral control MPU executes the press operation determination in order from the press detection sensor having the highest priority order, and turns on the press operation determination flag. When it is determined that the frame is set, the determination of the pressing operation in the frame may be stopped. Thereby, the processing amount which concerns on pressing operation determination can be reduced. In addition, by setting a high priority in the pressure detection sensor near the position where the player is likely to touch when the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the processing amount reduction effect related to the pressing operation determination is further improved. Can be increased.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU is configured to detect a pressing operation determination flag when pressing is detected in the same continuous n cycles or more by a plurality of pressing detection sensors of a predetermined ratio or more of the plurality of pressing detection sensors in the latest frame. May be set to ON (n is an integer equal to or larger than 2 and less than the total number of periods of one frame). As a result, the peripheral control MPU can further suppress erroneous operation determination due to erroneous detection of pressure due to noise, chattering, and the like, and thus suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU suppresses erroneous operation determination due to erroneous detection even when, for example, a foreign object is caught in one pressure detection sensor and the pressure detection sensor is always shielded from light. Can be suppressed, and as a result, a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a descent is detected by the descent detection sensor 382 continuously in the most recent n cycles in each cycle, and the current effect state is the special effect operation instruction state and the most recent n. When it is determined that the descent is detected by the descent detection sensor 382 continuously in the cycle, the elevating cam member 371 is operated in step S1108 of the certain cycle without waiting for the start of the next frame, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is lowered. Lock in position. This shortens the time from when the player moves the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b to the lowered position until the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is locked, so the player moves the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b to the lowering position. Then, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unnatural action in which the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b slightly rises, and consequently, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the work area 1261 corresponding to the latest frame includes the first bit string at the time of command input effect, the operation determination flag of the part corresponding to the work area 1261 is set to ON. To do. Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU compares the operation acceptance state with the operation determination flag of each operation part, and determines the effect state to be shifted. As a result, it is possible to suppress omission of detection of each operation part of the central pressing operation unit 303a and erroneous detection, and accordingly, a situation in which a command corresponding effect is not executed even though the player inputs a correct command, and an error is detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a command-corresponding effect is executed even when a command is input.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag set to ON in the first situation in which the operation determination flags of a plurality of units are set to ON in step S1012 of the frame in which the operation reception state of the unit with the previous frame is present. The pressing of the corresponding part in the immediately preceding frame is considered invalid. Further, in the first situation, the peripheral control MPU may consider that only one part among the parts corresponding to the operation determination flag set to ON is pressed in the immediately preceding frame according to a predetermined priority. In addition, in the first situation, the peripheral control MPU may consider that a portion that should not be pressed in the operation reception state is pressed by the immediately preceding frame. The peripheral control MPU determines that the specific command has been established by executing any of the processes described above in the first situation, for example, when all the parts of the central pressing operation unit 303a are continuously pressed. You can avoid the situation.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU performs an operation determination of the central pressing operation unit 303a using a detection determination process in the middle of the frame and an operation determination process at the start of the frame. In the operation determination process at the start of the frame, the peripheral control MPU turns on the operation determination flag when the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 continuously for n cycles or more during the latest frame. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation determination flag is turned off even though the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. In particular, the peripheral control MPU can execute the operation-corresponding effect quickly by executing the detection determination process in the middle of the frame, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  The peripheral control MPU executes a second history determination process in the middle of the frame in addition to the first history determination process. In the first history determination process and the second history determination process, the peripheral control MPU turns on the operation determination flag when the pressure detection sensor 381 detects a press continuously for n cycles or more during the determination target period. To do. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an error in the operation determination due to erroneous detection of the pressure detection sensor 381 such as noise and chattering, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. In particular, the peripheral control MPU can execute the operation corresponding effect early by executing the second history determination process in the middle of the frame in addition to the first history determination process. Can be improved.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 1, the peripheral control MPU determines an effect to execute the continuation of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variation before the determination target variation in the notice determination process with the determination target variation. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2, the peripheral control MPU adds a pseudo-continuous effect to the previous variation of the determination target variation in the notice determination process, and determines an effect to execute the added pseudo-continuous effect with the determination target variation. To do. As a result, the peripheral control MPU can realize a continuous quasi-continuous effect across a plurality of fluctuations, and thus can increase the player's interest in the quasi-continuous effect. This also allows the peripheral control MPU to realize a pseudo-continuous effect with a large number of consecutive times (high expectation) in a short total variation time.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 2, the peripheral control MPU executes an operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 and the like instead of the pseudo-continuous effect. Thus, the peripheral control MPU can realize a virtual pseudo-continuous effect even when the variation time of the variation before the determination target variation in the notice determination process is shortened. In addition, when the peripheral control MPU executes a virtual pseudo-continuous effect by the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 or the like instead of the pseudo-continuous effect, the peripheral control MPU displays the continuous number of virtual pseudo-continuous effects on the effect display device 1600. By displaying, it can be suggested to the player that the virtual pseudo-continuous performance is being executed.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 in the variation being executed in the pseudo-continuous effect changing process 3, and substitutes for the pseudo-continuous effect in the determination target variation of the other pre-change and the notice determination process. The effect of executing the operation and the like of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is determined. As a result, the peripheral control MPU can realize a virtual pseudo-continuous effect by using the variation being executed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU can increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit by suggesting the degree of big hit expectation according to the motivated state using the motivation meter. In particular, when the jackpot expectation is high, the player's expectation for the jackpot is increased by performing an effect using a motivation meter with a rare pattern in which a color with a low jackpot expectation (for example, yellow or less) is excluded. It can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU can increase the player's expectation for the big hit by executing a hand effect in which the display of the light guide plate and the effect display device 1600 is interlocked as an effect for determining the meter color of the motivation meter. . In particular, when the peripheral control MPU executes the hand effect Gase effect across a plurality of variations, the same effect is continuously generated, causing the player to feel that something is happening, and consequently The player can get a sense of expectation.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU recognizes the player as if the effect using the light guide plate is being executed by displaying the light guide plate-like display mode on the effect display device 1600 in the flashback effect or the like. Can be made. In addition, although the effect using the light guide plate can give a great expectation to the player, the display of the light guide plate style display in the effect display device 1600 is performed without increasing the number of light guide plates. Thus, it is possible to realize various effects for causing the player to have the above-mentioned expectation.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU displays a friendly character that is likely to lead to an advantageous result for the player in a flashback effect or the like on the light guide plate in front of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the player, and is unlikely to lead to an advantageous result. By displaying the enemy character on the effect display device 1600, it is easy for the player to recognize which character is likely to lead to an advantageous result.

  The peripheral control MPU may operate at least one movable body located behind the light guide plate when viewed from the player when the light guide plate emits light. In the state where the light guide plate emits light, the player's consciousness is suitable for, for example, the light guide plate that emits light and the sound effect corresponding to the light emission of the light guide plate. By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with hidden elemental game characteristics.

  In an example where a battle effect such as a flashback effect is executed in the short-time game state or the probability change state, and an enemy character is selected from a plurality of enemy characters in the battle effect, the big hit is confirmed after the most recent normal game state. If an enemy character other than the enemy character has already had an effect of winning the battle effect, the peripheral control MPU is concerned only in a fluctuation corresponding to a big hit (or a high expectation of an advantageous gaming state such as a big hit). The enemy character may be selected in a battle effect after the battle effect. Thereby, since the expectation degree of the enemy character that is not expected to be high may be improved, the player can also enjoy the effect in which the enemy character appears.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU is informing that the technique has been promoted to the predetermined technique in the attack determination effect, the operation in the operation effective period is a condition for promotion to the next technique of the predetermined technique. If it is determined that the above condition is satisfied, the notification may be stopped, or immediately after the notification period of the notification, the fact that the player has been promoted to the next technique may be notified. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operation unit increases.

  Further, in the attack determination effect, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation of the message board on which the technique name on the effect display device 1600 is linked, the player's operation for the rotation operation unit 302 is linked. Willingness to participate increases.

  The light guide plate mounting portion 2910 is disposed at a position closer to the front end by a predetermined width than the rear end of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front. As the predetermined width is larger, for example, a space is provided between the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100, so that a room for bending the front light guide plate 2610 when the front light guide plate 2610 expands due to a temperature change is provided. .

  Further, in a state where the front light guide plate 2610 is screwed to the center role 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 is in contact with the light guide plate attachment portion 2910 only at the cylindrical portion 2911 protruding to the back side of the light guide plate attachment portion 2910. . Thereby, in a region other than the cylindrical portion 2911 of the light guide plate mounting portion 2910, when a space is provided between the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 and the front light guide plate 2610, the front light guide plate 2610 expands due to a temperature change. Is provided with room for the front light guide plate 2610 to bend.

  Further, the screws 2950 stopped by at least a part of the cylindrical portion 2911 of the light guide plate mounting portion 2910 may be stopped at a position that can be visually recognized by the player. Further, since the game ball B does not roll in the area, the player can easily visually recognize the area even during the game. As a result, not only the hall clerk but also the player can check the screw-fixing failure of the front light guide plate 2610 during the game, so the check burden due to the hall can be reduced.

  The diameter of the screw insertion portion 2615 that is the insertion hole is desirably a value obtained by adding a predetermined margin to the diameter of the screw portion of the screw 2950. Thereby, damage to the front light guide plate 2610 when the front light guide plate 2610 expands or contracts due to a temperature change can be suppressed.

  Moreover, the visibility of the front light guide plate 2610 is improved by reducing the area of the region where the light guide plate mounting portion 2920 and the front light guide plate 2610 overlap. Further, when the front light guide plate 2610 expands due to a temperature change, a space for bending the front light guide plate 2610 can be increased.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine, or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined, Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, the rotation decoration body 3126 in which the multiple (four) decoration part 3127 which can be rotated around the axis | shaft extended in the left-right direction and is mutually different in the circumferential direction is formed as a movable production | presentation unit. Although four of them are provided on the same axis, the present invention is not limited to this. A rotating decorative body that is rotatable around a vertically extending axis and has a plurality of decorative portions that are different from each other in the circumferential direction is provided. It may be provided with at least one, provided with at least one rotating decorative body that can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, provided with at least one movable decorative body that slides in the left-right direction, etc. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is used for the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 that are moved up and down via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The clutch mechanism 3250 may be provided between the drive motor and a movable decorative body that moves in the left-right direction, a movable decorative body that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the like.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided with the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, and the roller 3254. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and rotation from the drive motor is performed. The first sun gear, the first planetary gear, and the rotation connected to the drive motor side are provided with a speed reduction unit that temporarily decelerates the speed and a speed conversion unit that shifts the decelerated rotation and transmits it to the output side. A first planetary gear mechanism having an immovable fixed ring gear, and a second planetary gear mechanism having a second sun gear, a second planetary gear and a rotatable rotating ring gear coupled to the first sun gear. In addition, a carrier provided with support shafts on both sides is arranged between the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism, and the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism There are may be those adapted to be transmitted at a reduced speed rotation from the drive motor provided the difference in the number of teeth on the rotating ring gear between at least one gear of the ring gear and the sun gear.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 381 Press detection sensor 381a Press detection sensor 381b Press detection sensor 381c Press detection sensor 382 Lowering detection sensor 1261 Work area 1310 Main control board 1510 Peripheral control board 1511 Peripheral control part 1512 effect display control unit 1600 effect display device 2500 center role 2507 outer peripheral wall 2610 front light guide plate 2615 screw insertion portion 2910 light guide plate attachment portion 2911 cylindrical portion 2912 screw insertion hole 2920 light guide plate attachment portion 2920 screw 2921 cylindrical portion 2930 game Panel mounting portion 2940 Light guide plate mounting portion 3000 Back unit 3300 Upper front movable rendering unit 3301 Unit base 3302 Upper front drive motor (drive motor)
3303 First link bar 3304 Second link bar (link member)
3305 Upper stopper 3306 Lower stopper 3350 Upper front movable decorative body 3351 Central decorative body (main decorative body)
3352 First protruding decorative body (sub decorative body unit)
3352a First protruding decorative part (sub decorative body)
3352b First connecting rod (connecting member)
3352c Link attachment portion 3353 Second projecting decorative body (sub-decorating body unit)
3353a Second protruding decorative part (sub decorative body)
3353b Second connecting rod (connecting member)
3353c Link mounting part

Claims (1)

A display device for displaying a predetermined pattern;
A speaker that outputs a predetermined sound;
A light emitter that emits predetermined light; and
A movable body operable in a rear region of the display device as viewed from the player;
A game control means for executing a lottery in accordance with a winning of a game ball to a predetermined winning opening, and shifting to a special gaming state when winning the lottery,
Peripheral control means for controlling display of the predetermined picture by the display device, output of the predetermined sound by the speaker, emission of the predetermined light by the light emitter, and operation of the movable body. Machine,
The peripheral control means includes
A first pattern that causes the movable body to operate in the rear region and to execute at least one of the output of the predetermined sound by the speaker or the light emission of the predetermined light by the light emitter;
The movable body is operated in the rear area, the predetermined picture is displayed on the display device, and the predetermined sound output by the speaker and the predetermined light by the light emitter can be executed in the first pattern. A second pattern that does not cause light to be emitted, and
The predetermined pattern displayed on the display device has a plurality of patterns,
When the predetermined pattern is displayed on the display device according to a predetermined display mode, the expectation of winning the lottery is enhanced.

Images